Panasonic DBS 576 Feature Operation

Panasonic DBS 576 Feature Operation
Panasonic
Technical
a Manual
Supports DBS 576 Version 3.6
Section 700
Feature
Operation
DBS 576 Version 3.6
Issued October 2000
The contents of this document are subject to change without notice and do not constitute a commitment on
the part of Panasonic Telecommunication Systems Company (PTSC). Every effort has been made to
ensure the accuracy of this document. However, due to ongoing product improvements and revisions,
Panasonic cannot guarantee the accuracy of printed material after the date of publication nor can it accept
responsibility for errors or omissions. Panasonic will update and revise this document as needed.
The software and hardware described in this document may be used or copied only in accordance with the
terms of the license pertaining to said software or hardware.
Reproduction, publication, or duplication of this manual, or any part thereof, in any manner, mechanically
electronically, or photographically is prohibited without permission of Panasonic Telecommunication
Systems Company (PTSC).
Copyright 2000 by Panasonic Telecommunication Systems Company (PTSC)
All rights reserved.
Contents
Chapter 1. About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Chapter 2. List of Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Chapter 3. System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
AEC Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Attendant Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Automatic Call Distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Automatic Route Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Background Music/MOH Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Battery Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Building Block Expansion Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Built-In Voice Mail Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Call Progress Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Caller ID Alpha Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Centrex/PBX Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Class of Service - Trunk/Tie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class of Service - Ext/Ext Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class of Service - Extension Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class of Service - T1 Trunk Ring Back Service Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class of Service - Trunk to Trunk Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class of Service - Extension (Station) Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12
3-13
3-13
3-16
3-16
3-16
CO Ringing Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
DID Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIL Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIL Delayed Incoming Ring Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISA Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-17
3-18
3-19
3-20
3-20
CO Trunk Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
CO Trunk Interface - DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CO Trunk Interface - Ground Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CO Trunk Interface - ISDN BRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CO Trunk Interface - ISDN-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CO Trunk Interface - Loop Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21
3-21
3-21
3-22
3-22
Computer Telephony Integration Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Daylight Saving Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
iii
Contents
Section 700 - Operation
Day/Night System Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Manual Day/Night Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Automatic Day/Night Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Digital Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Inward System Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distinctive Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-27
3-28
3-29
3-29
Door Box Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Extension Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Digital Key Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Device Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DP/DTMF SLTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISDN/BRI S-Point Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISDN/PRI S-Point Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-31
3-31
3-32
3-32
3-32
Flexible Numbering Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Free Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Hunting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Pilot Terminal Hunt Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pilot Distributed Hunt Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch Back Hunt Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circular Hunt Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Next Extension/Hunt Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-34
3-34
3-34
3-35
3-35
Internal Hold Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LAN TAPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCO Tenant Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Music-on-Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Name Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-36
3-36
3-38
3-38
3-39
3-39
Extension Name Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Speed Dial Name Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Network Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Network Attendant Reversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Call Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Centralized Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Centralized Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Extension Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Flash Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Transfer Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tandem Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-46
3-46
3-46
3-46
3-46
3-46
3-47
3-47
3-47
3-47
3-47
Non-Blocking Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Failure Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power On Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-48
3-49
3-49
3-50
Telephone Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
PC-Based Customizing Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
iv
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Contents
QSIG ISDN Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Ringing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Day 1/ Day 2/Night Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Day 1/ Day 2/Night Delayed Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DID Day/Night Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DID Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Busy Lamp Field Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Busy Lamp Field Delayed Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slide Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-51
3-52
3-52
3-52
3-53
3-53
3-53
3-54
System Speed Dial TRS Override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station Message Detail Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T1 Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Toll Restriction Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Access Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-54
3-55
3-57
3-57
3-58
3-59
Virtual Port used for Virtual Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Virtual Port used for Floating Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Voice Mail Integration (Third Party) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Answer Supervision for Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DID/DNIS/DDI Voice Mail ID Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disconnect Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Priority Message Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Key ID Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Mail Transfer Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-60
3-61
3-61
3-62
3-62
3-62
3-63
Chapter 4. User Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
About User Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Set Absence Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Set Call Forward ID Codes for Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Set Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Set Caller ID Logging Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Set Day of Week Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Set Exception Day Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Set Extension Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Set Message Key ID Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Set Mode Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Set Personal Speed Dial Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Set Personal Speed Dial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Set Send Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Set Special Day Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Set System Date/Time/Day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Set System Speed Dial Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
v
Contents
Section 700 - Operation
Set System Speed Dial Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set System Speed Dial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Text Message Replies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Walking TRS Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-34
4-35
4-37
4-38
4-40
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Key Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Absence Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Account Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Non-Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Attendant Group Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Auto Repeat Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Background Music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Busy Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Callback Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Call Forwarding-All Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding - Busy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding - No Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding-All Calls and Do-Not-Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14
5-15
5-16
5-17
Call Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
System Hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floating Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exclusive Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Broker’s Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18
5-19
5-20
5-21
5-21
Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Extension Group Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension Direct Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Group Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Direct Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-24
5-25
5-26
5-26
Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Supervised Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Unsupervised Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Caller ID Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Call Log Operation on a Small Display Key Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Call Log Operation on a Large Display Key Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Camp-on (Call Waiting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conference Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directory Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-34
5-37
5-39
5-43
Large-Display Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Small-Display Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
vi
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Contents
Changing the Display Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Do-Not-Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSS/72 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EM/24 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handsfree Answerback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handsfree Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headset Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hot Dial Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hot Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intercom Calling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Last Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-46
5-47
5-48
5-48
5-49
5-49
5-56
5-57
5-57
5-58
5-59
5-59
5-60
5-61
DSS/BLF Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Direct Line Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Multi-CO (MCO) Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Message Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Waiting/Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mute Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offhook Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offhook Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offhook Voice Announce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
One-Touch Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Onhook Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-65
5-65
5-67
5-68
5-68
5-69
5-72
5-74
5-74
Meet-Me Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Reset Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ringing Line Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Room Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Silent Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-76
5-76
5-77
5-79
5-81
Personal Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed Dial Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed Dial Name Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-81
5-83
5-85
5-87
Station Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
Timed Reminder Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
CO Line Key Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCO Line Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCO Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-95
5-95
5-96
5-96
Trunk Queuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
Universal Night Answer to Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
Variable Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
vii
Contents
Section 700 - Operation
Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Walking TRS Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zip Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-101
5-102
5-103
5-104
Chapter 6. DSLT Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Digital Single Line Telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Absence Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Account Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Non-Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Attendant Group Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Auto Repeat Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Background Music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Busy Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Callback Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Call Forwarding-All Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding - Busy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding - No Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
Call Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
System Hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floating Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exclusive Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Broker’s Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-16
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Extension Group Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension Direct Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Group Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Direct Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20
6-22
6-22
6-23
Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Supervised Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Unsupervised Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Camp-On (Call Waiting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conference Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do-Not-Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hot Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intercom Calling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Last Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Waiting/Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offhook Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-26
6-27
6-29
6-30
6-31
6-32
6-32
6-33
6-34
6-35
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Contents
Offhook Voice Announce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Onhook Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Meet-Me Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Reset Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Room Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Personal Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
System Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Speed Dial Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Station Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Timed Reminder Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Direct Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
MCO Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Trunk Queuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Universal Night Answer to Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Walking TRS Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Chapter 7. SLT Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Absence Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Account Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Non-Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Attendant Group Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Busy Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Callback Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7
7-7
7-8
7-9
Call Forwarding-All Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Call Forwarding - Busy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Call Forwarding - No Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Call Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
System Hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floating Hold (Retrieve Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exclusive Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Broker’s Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-13
7-14
7-15
7-15
7-16
Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Extension Group Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension Direct Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Group Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Direct Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-20
Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Supervised Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Unsupervised Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
ix
Contents
Section 700 - Operation
Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Camp-On (Call Waiting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conference Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do-Not-Disturb (DND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hot Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intercom Calling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Last Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Waiting/Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offhook Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offhook Voice Announce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-23
7-24
7-25
7-27
7-27
7-28
7-29
7-29
7-30
7-31
7-32
Meet-Me Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Reset Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Room Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Personal Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
System Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Speed Dial Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Station Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Timed Reminder Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Direct Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
MCO Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Trunk Queuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Universal Night Answer to Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Walking TRS Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Appendix A. ARS and TRS Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Detailed Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
TRS Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
ARS/TRS Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
TRS Configuration and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
TRS Programming/Operation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Example TRS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
ARS Configuration and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
ARS/TRS Programming/Operation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Example ARS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1
x
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Chapter 1. About This Manual
If you are using this manual for a single System, make note of its software version in the following
table. This information may be referenced by technicians or owners of the System.
Software version information for systems shipped with this document
CPC Model:
Software Version:
Organization
This manual contains detailed descriptions of features. The feature descriptions are organized
according to the following categories:
Feature Categories
Description
System Features
System Features are either available on a systemwide basis or aid in the overall administration of the
System.
User Maintenance Features are used by the end user
to maintain the System. These items include setting
time and date, Personal Speed Dial (PSD) numbers
and names, System Speed Dial (SSD) numbers and
names, extension names, Verified ID codes, Call
Forward ID codes for Voice Mail, Message Key ID
codes, Mode schedule, Special Day mode, Exception Day mode, and Day of Week mode.
Key Telephone Features are available to System Key
phones. System Key phones are proprietary digital
sets that provide feature access through a combination of feature keys and access codes.
DSLT Features are available to Digital Single-Line
Telephones. DSLTs provide digital audio quality and
limited feature key access in a single-line set.
SLT Features are available to industry-standard 2500
sets. Since SLTs are not equipped with feature keys,
most features are accessed by using the dialpad and/
or the switchhook.
User Maintenance
Key Telephone Features
Digital Single-Line Telephone (DSLT) Features
Single Line Telephone
(SLT) Features
Purpose
The purpose of this manual is to provide an overview of feature operations and requirements. Where
applicable, the following types of information are provided for each feature:
Types of information
Purpose
Description
Provides an overview of how the feature works and,
in some cases, what it is typically used for
Includes step-by-step instructions on how to use the
feature
Lists any special hardware that is required to use the
feature
Operation
Hardware Requirements
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
1-1
Chapter 1. About This Manual
Related Programming
Considerations
Section 700 - Operation
Lists the programming subsystems associated with
the feature
Provides details on feature interactions and limitations
Abbreviation List
ACD Automatic Call Distributor
ARS Automatic Route Selection
BGM Background Music
BLF Busy Lamp Field
BRI
Basic Rate Interface
DBS Digital Business System
CFWD Call Forward
COS Class of Service
CTAPI Computer Telephony Application Programming Interface
CTI
Computer Telephony Integration
DDI
Direct Dial Inward
DID
Direct Inward Dial
DIL
Direct In Line
DISA Direct Inward System Access
DL
Direct Line
DN
Directory Number
DND Do-Not-Disturb
DNIS Dialed Number Identification Service
DP
Dial Pulse
DSLT Digital Single Line Telephone
DSS Direct Station Selector
DSU Digital Service Unit
DTMF Dual Tone Multifrequency
FF
Flexible Function
HD
High Density (DBS 576HD)
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LCR Least Cost Routing
MCO Multiple CO (Pooled Trunk Access)
MIS
Management Information System
MOH Music On Hold
PNPDNPhantom Non-Primary Directory Number
PRI
Primary Rate Interface
PSD Personal Speed Dial
SLT
Single Line Telephone
SMDR Station Message Detail Recorder
SPI
Service Provider Interface
SSD System Speed Dial
TAPI Telephony Application Programming Interface
TRS Toll Restriction Service
1-2
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Chapter 2. List of Features
This chapter contains the following tables which list the features available with the system:
Table
Page
System Features
2-2
Maintenance Features
2-3
Extension Features
2-4
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
2-1
Chapter 2. List of Features
Table 1.
Section 700 - Operation
System Features
Topic
2-2
Page
AEC Disconnect
3-4
Attendant Groups
3-4
Automatic Call Distributor
3-5
Automatic Route Selection
3-6
Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer
3-7
Background Music/MOH Separation
3-7
Battery Backup
3-8
Building Block Expansion Capability
3-8
Built-In Voice Mail Unit
3-9
Call Progress Tones
3-10
Caller ID
3-10
Caller ID Alpha Tagging
3-11
Centrex/PBX Compatibility
3-12
Class of Service
3-12
CO Ringing Types
3-17
CO Trunk Interface
3-20
Computer Telephony Integration Capability
3-22
Data Security
3-23
Daylight Saving Time
3-23
Day/Night System Mode
3-24
Digital Pad
3-27
Direct Inward System Access
3-28
Distinctive Ringing
3-29
Door Box
3-29
Extension Interface
3-31
Flexible Numbering Plan
3-33
Free Slot
3-33
Hunting Groups
3-33
Internal Hold Tone
3-36
LAN TAPI
3-36
MCO Tenant Group
3-38
Memory Backup
3-38
Music-on-Hold
3-39
Name Assignments
3-39
Network Facilities
3-45
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 2. List of Features
Topic
Page
Non-Blocking Architecture
3-48
Power Failure Transfer
3-49
Power On Maintenance
3-49
Programming Devices
3-50
QSIG ISDN Lines
3-50
Ringing Modes
3-51
System Speed Dial TRS Override
3-54
Station Message Detail Recording
3-55
T1 Line
3-57
Toll Restriction Service
3-57
Trunk Access Groups
3-58
Virtual Port
3-59
Voice Mail Integration (Third Party)
3-60
Table 2.
Maintenance Features
Topic
Page
Set Absence Messages
4-3
Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension
4-5
Set Call Forward ID Codes for Voice Mail
4-6
Set Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension
4-7
Set Caller ID Logging Extensions
4-8
Set Day of Week Mode
4-9
Set Exception Day Mode
4-11
Set Extension Names
4-13
Set Message Key ID Code
4-14
Set Mode Schedule
4-15
Set Personal Speed Dial Names
4-17
Set Personal Speed Dial Numbers
4-22
Set Send Text Messages
4-23
Set Special Day Mode
4-24
Set System Date/Time/Day
4-31
Set System Speed Dial Names
4-34
Set System Speed Dial Numbers
4-35
Set Text Message Replies
4-37
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
2-3
Chapter 2. List of Features
Section 700 - Operation
Topic
Set Verified Account Codes
4-38
Set Walking TRS Codes
4-40
Table 3.
Extension Features
Topic
2-4
Page
Page
Absence Message
5-4
Account Codes
5-6
Attendant Group Calls
5-9
Auto Repeat Dial
5-9
Background Music
5-10
Busy Override
5-11
Callback Request
5-12
Call Forwarding
5-14
Call Hold
5-18
Call Hold
5-21
Call Pickup
5-23
Call Transfer
5-27
Caller ID Call Log
5-30
Camp-on (Call Waiting)
5-34
Conference Calls
5-37
Directory Numbers
5-39
Display Information
5-43
Do-Not-Disturb
5-46
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion
5-47
DSS/72 Console
5-48
EM/24 Console
5-48
Flash
5-49
Flexible Function Keys
5-49
Handsfree Answerback
5-56
Handsfree Operation
5-57
Headset Operation
5-57
Hot Dial Pad
5-58
Hot Line
5-59
Intercom Calling
5-59
Last Number Redial
5-60
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 2. List of Features
Topic
Page
Line Appearances
5-61
Message Key
5-65
Message Waiting/Callback
5-65
Mute Function
5-67
Offhook Monitor
5-68
Offhook Signaling
5-68
Offhook Voice Announce
5-69
One-Touch Keys
5-72
Onhook Dialing
5-74
Paging
5-74
Reset Call
5-76
Ringing Line Preference
5-76
Room Monitoring
5-77
Silent Monitor
5-79
Speed Dialing
5-81
Station Lockout
5-91
Timed Reminder Call
5-93
Trunk Access
5-94
Trunk Queuing
5-97
Universal Night Answer to Page
5-98
Variable Mode
5-99
Voice Recognition
5-101
Volume Control
5-102
Walking TRS Class of Service
5-103
Zip Mode
5-104
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
2-5
Chapter 2. List of Features
Section 700 - Operation
This page intentionally left blank.
2-6
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Chapter 3. System Features
System Features are either available on a system-wide basis or aid in the overall administration of the
System.
This chapter contains detailed descriptions of the following System Features:
Topic
Page
AEC Disconnect
3-4
Attendant Groups
3-4
Automatic Call Distributor
3-5
Automatic Route Selection
3-6
Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer
3-7
Background Music/MOH Separation
3-7
Battery Backup
3-8
Building Block Expansion Capability
3-8
Built-In Voice Mail Unit
3-9
Call Progress Tones
3-10
Caller ID
3-10
Caller ID Alpha Tagging
3-11
Centrex/PBX Compatibility
3-12
Class of Service
3-12
Class of Service - Trunk/Tie
3-12
Class of Service - Ext/Ext Restriction
3-13
Class of Service - Extension Feature
3-13
Class of Service - T1 Trunk Ring Back Service Tone
3-16
Class of Service - Trunk to Trunk Restriction
3-16
Class of Service - Extension (Station) Timers
3-16
CO Ringing Types
3-17
DID Ringing
3-17
DIL Ringing
3-18
DIL Delayed Incoming Ring Enhancement
3-19
DISA Ringing
3-20
Multiple Ringing
3-20
CO Trunk Interface
3-20
CO Trunk Interface - DID
3-21
CO Trunk Interface - Ground Start
3-21
CO Trunk Interface - ISDN BRI
3-21
CO Trunk Interface - ISDN-PRI
3-22
CO Trunk Interface - Loop Start
3-22
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-1
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Topic
Computer Telephony Integration Capability
3-22
Data Security
3-23
Daylight Saving Time
3-23
Day/Night System Mode
3-24
Manual Day/Night Mode
3-25
Automatic Day/Night Mode
3-27
Digital Pad
3-27
Direct Inward System Access
3-28
Distinctive Ringing
3-29
Door Box
3-29
Door Box Sensor
3-30
Extension Interface
3-31
Digital Key Telephones
3-31
Analog Device Capability
3-31
DP/DTMF SLTs
3-32
ISDN/BRI S-Point Interface
3-32
ISDN/PRI S-Point Interface
3-32
Flexible Numbering Plan
3-33
Free Slot
3-33
Hunting Groups
3-33
Internal Hold Tone
3-36
LAN TAPI
3-36
MCO Tenant Group
3-38
Memory Backup
3-38
Music-on-Hold
3-39
Name Assignments
3-39
Extension Name Assignments
3-40
Speed Dial Name Assignments
3-43
Network Facilities
3-2
Page
3-45
Network Attendant Reversion
3-46
Network Call Routing
3-46
Network Call Transfer
3-46
Network Centralized Attendant
3-46
Network Centralized Voice Mail
3-46
Network Extension Calling
3-46
Network Flash Transfer
3-47
Network Hold
3-47
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Topic
Page
Network Paging
3-47
Network Transfer Recall
3-47
Tandem Connection
3-47
Non-Blocking Architecture
3-48
Power Failure Transfer
3-49
Power On Maintenance
3-49
Programming Devices
3-50
PC-Based Customizing Tool
3-50
QSIG ISDN Lines
3-50
Ringing Modes
3-51
Day 1/ Day 2/Night Ringing
3-51
Day 1/ Day 2/Night Delayed Ringing
3-52
DID Day/Night Ringing
3-52
DID Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing
3-52
Busy Lamp Field Ringing
3-53
Busy Lamp Field Delayed Ringing
3-53
Slide Ringing
3-53
Alarm Ringing
3-54
System Speed Dial TRS Override
3-54
Station Message Detail Recording
3-55
T1 Line
3-57
Toll Restriction Service
3-57
Trunk Access Groups
3-58
Virtual Port
3-59
Virtual Port used for Floating Hold
3-59
Virtual Port used for Virtual Extension
3-59
Voice Mail Integration (Third Party)
3-60
Answer Supervision for Voice Mail
3-60
Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail
3-61
DID/DNIS/DDI Voice Mail ID Code
3-61
Disconnect Signal
3-62
High Priority Message Waiting
3-62
Message Key ID Code
3-62
Voice Mail Transfer Key
3-63
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-3
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
AEC Disconnect
Description
This feature allows the System to send a disconnect signal of 1 second to an analog device indicating
that the calling party has hung up (terminated the call). This feature is useful with a Third-party Voice
Mail or an Answering Machine. By default this feature is disabled.
Hardware Requirements
•
AEC port
Related Programming
•
FF3-0: Loop Disconnect Signal
Considerations
•
The 1 second time duration of the disconnect signal is fixed. (It cannot be changed.)
Attendant Groups
Description
An attendant phone is often used as a central answering point for other extensions. In addition,
attendant phones frequently have special capabilities for monitoring and programming extensions.
You can reach the assigned attendant group by dialing the feature access code for Attendant Calls
(usually 0). If an attendant phone is available but does not answer within a set time, the call will move
to the next available attendant phone. If all members of the attendant group are busy for a specified
time, the call can be forwarded to other extensions or another hunt group. The system allows up to 20
extensions to be included in an attendant group.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
FF5-0-01: Attendant Hunt Pilot Number
FF5-0-02: Day 1 Attendant Hunting
FF5-0-03: Day 2 Attendant Hunting
FF5-0-03: Night Attendant Hunt
FF2: Ring Type
Considerations
•
•
•
3-4
The System allows one attendant group for each system mode (Day 1, Day 2, and Night).
An attendant group can contain both real extensions and virtual extensions. If virtual, several
phones can be made to ring at the same time.
Attendant groups can use only Pilot Terminal Hunt Group or Pilot Distributed Hunt Group. For
more information, see “Hunting Groups” on page 3-33.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 3. System Features
The pilot number for an attendant group is flexible (i.e., any extension number can be designated
as the pilot [not a real extension]).
If a member of the attendant group has Do-Not-Disturb (DND) or Call Forwarding - All set, that
phone is temporarily removed from the attendant group.
If a member of the attendant group has Call Forwarding - Busy set and the extension is busy, the
call goes to the next phone in the attendant group.
If all members are busy for the duration of the busy queuing timer, the call can be forwarded to
another hunt group or another extension.
Attendant groups support the following call types:
• Direct Inward Dialing (DID) / Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) / Direct
Dial Inward (DDI)
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
• Extension calls
• Private network attendant calls
• Call reversion
• Call forwarded to Attendant Hunt Group
•
•
•
•
Automatic Call Distributor
Description
The System provides an optional Automatic Call Distributor (ACD) for efficient presentation,
handling, and management of incoming calls to one or more groups of specialized users.
This optional Built-in ACD is contained on a single circuit card that is installed in the System. This
“built-in” capability eliminates the need for custom wiring and other installation.
Each specialized user is known as an ACD agent. Each agent position is equipped with a large display
telephone (VB-44225) that provides Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) messages to assist the agent in
handling calls.
The Built-in ACD provides:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
576-36-700
Up to 3 agent groups (ACD Version 3.0 and higher)
Up to 2 agent groups (ACD Version below 3.0)
Up to 32 agent IDs per group
Up to 64 agent IDs per system (ACD Version 2.0 and higher)
Up to 32 agents
Up to 6 supervisor IDs per system (ACD Version 3.0 and higher)
Up to 2 supervisor IDs per system (ACD Version below 3.0)
Up to 4 voice ports per group
Up to 4 voice ports per system
1 Music-On-Hold (MOH) source (Main System MOH source)
1 Management Information System (MIS) Monitor Port (RS-232C)
Abandoned Call Report counter available with MIS reports (This is not the same as the
Abandoned Call Timer added to the Station Message Detail Recorder [SMDR] reports.)
2-week memory for MIS reports
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-5
Chapter 3. System Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
Section 700 - Operation
Up to 6 recorded messages (flexible length, max. 96 sec. per system) (ACD Version 3.0 and
higher)
In Version 3.0 and higher, the Silent Monitor feature has been added. This feature allows an
ACD supervisor to monitor a call between an ACD agent and a caller without the knowledge
of either party. For more information, see “Silent Monitor” on page 5-79, Section 400 Programming, and Section 520 - Built-In ACD Reference Manual.
In addition to MOH, ACD Version 3.0 provides up to eight analog extension ports that can be
connected to a recorded announcement device. See Section 520 - Built-In ACD Reference
Manual.
Up to 6 recorded messages (max. 14 sec. per message) (ACD Version below 3.0)
Zip Tone which automatically answers calls when an agent is using the Headset mode (CPC
Version 2.5 and higher)
Wrap Mode which allows an agent to complete any paperwork before becoming available to
take another call. (CPC Version 2.5 and higher)
Hardware Requirements
•
See Section 520 - Built-In ACD Reference Manual.
Related Programming
•
See Section 520 - Built-In ACD Reference Manual.
Considerations
•
For more information, see Section 520 - Built-In ACD Reference Manual.
Automatic Route Selection
Description
When Automatic Route Selection (ARS) is enabled, the system follows a preselected route for calls.
Usually the selected routing is the least cost route.
ARS works in conjunction with Toll Restriction Service (TRS). Calls can be denied based on the
programmed TRS level for the originating party. (For more information, see “Ringing Modes” on
page 3-51.)
•
•
•
•
3-6
Three levels of ARS checking are available based on the dialed number following the ARS
access code:
• Direct Route Selection: The simplest form of ARS routing that upon ARS entry
(enter 9) directly selects the trunk group and any dialed number modification.
• Route List Selection: A more complex routing that includes up to 5 alternative
levels of route selection and includes TRS level checking.
• Time List Selection: The most complex routing that determines the appropriate
route list based upon the day and time.
Forced ARS is available on an Extension Class of Service (COS) basis.
A special day list provides tailored ARS routing for up to 20 holidays, vacation days, etc.
Automatic modification of dialed numbers is available. This includes deleting up to 24 prefix
digits and adding up to a 10-digit prefix and a 10-digit suffix. The modification of dialed
numbers can include pauses, Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) conversion, itemized code
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
(extension number) and an authorization code. (Itemized code and authorization are not used
in some areas.)
Up to 8 authorization codes are available.
For more information on ARS/TRS, see “ARS and TRS Operation” on page Appendix A.-1.
•
•
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer
Description
The System can be set to automatically transfer trunk calls out to another trunk without requiring the
call to be answered internally. This transfer may be either trunk based or extension based (i.e., call
forward outside).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Background Music/MOH Separation
Description
Separate inputs are provided for Background Music (BGM) and Music-on-Hold (MOH). This allows
one music or sound source to be used for background music and another music or sound source to be
used for music on hold.
A typical advantage of this is playing a pre-recorded promotional tape to held parties (since many
may be customers) while providing a selected background music for use in the office.
Note: CPC-HS has only one input that is used for both BGM and MOH.
Hardware Requirements
•
Background music requires an SCC card (VB-44181).
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-7
Chapter 3. System Features
•
Section 700 - Operation
Both Background Music and Music on Hold (if using external MOH) require a sound source.
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Battery Backup
Description
When backup batteries are installed, the System will continue to operate in the event of a power
failure. If using Battery Backup, backup batteries must be installed in each cabinet.
A fully loaded System will operate at least 30 minutes on backup batteries for the DBS 576..
Hardware Requirements
•
DBS 576: Back-up battery unit (VB-44025)
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
Any device connected to the System but that does not derive its power from the System must
have a backup power source to operate. These devices include any System Message Detail
Recording (SMDR) printer (or recorder), fax machine, answering machine, modem, cordless
telephone, etc.
Building Block Expansion Capability
Description
The System is designed to support easy expansion. Each cabinet in the System supports 96 ports (12
flexible slots) as well as 2 option slots. Up to 6 cabinets may be installed in the System for a total of
576 ports.
Up to 2 expansion cabinets may be connected to a base cabinet. When a fourth cabinet is required,
another base cabinet is installed. Up to 2 expansion cabinets may be connected to the second base
cabinet.
This building block approach allows you to easily add equipment when needed without a major
interruption in service or a major delay.
Hardware Requirements
•
3-8
N/A
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
In addition to the additional cabinets and related cabinet hardware/cabling required for
expansion, when the System is expanded the CPC card and/or TSW cards may need to be
upgraded as well. The CPC-96 supports up to 96 ports. The CPC-288 supports up to 288 ports
and should be combined with time switch card TSW288. The CPC-576 supports up to 576 ports
and should be combined with time switch card TSW576.
Built-In Voice Mail Unit
Description
The System supports the Built-in Voice Mail Unit. This unit assists in providing reliable, effective
communications. This is a simple device that includes an automated attendant function and can be
used to record conversations (where permitted).
The Built-in Voice Mail Unit is easy to install. It is installed in a cabinet card slot and no cabling is
required.
Some of the major features include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Automated attendant
Automatic recording for incoming and outgoing calls
One-touch mail box transfer
Mail box status display (Key LED on digital telephone)
Mail box grouping
2-way recording
Outside notification
Date/time stamp
Integrated Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) control (with large LCD telephone)
Message light control
Up to 254 mail boxes
Up to 40 hours of message storage time
Up to 8 voice ports
For more information, see the System Built-In Voice Mail With Two-Way Recording Reference
Manual.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF7: Built-In Voice Mail
Considerations
•
N/A
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-9
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Call Progress Tones
Description
The System supplies a full array of call progress tones. These tones provide audible indications of the
status of calls and include dial tone, busy tone, ringback tone, error tone, confirmation tone, and
splash tone. The complete specification for these tones may be found in Section 300 - Installation.
In addition to call progress tones, Direct Station Select (DSS) LEDs and the display provide
additional indication of the status of calls.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Caller ID
Description
A properly equipped system supports Caller ID, a service offered by the network telephone service
provider. The CO sends calling number information to the system after the first ring. Users with
display telephones can see Caller ID information as incoming calls ring at their extension. They can
also access previous calls via the Caller ID Call Log feature. The Caller ID number is recorded in
SMDR.
Prior to Version 3.0, the system would not display Caller ID information for an extension that was in
use when a call was received. In Version 3.0 or higher, Caller ID information is displayed on the
second line of an LCD display when an incoming call is received during conversation. If the second
incoming call is from another extension, the LCD displays the extension name or number.
Hardware Requirements
•
Loop-start trunk card (8) (VB-44510) with Caller ID circuit card (8) (VB-44513), Loop-start
trunk card (4) (VB-44514) with Caller ID circuit card (4) (VB-44515), ISDN (PRI = VB-44540,
BRI = VB-44530).
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
FF2-0: Caller ID
FF2-0: Caller ID Ring Control
FF3-0: Call Duration Display
FF1-0-01: Alpha Tagging (Name/No. Display)
Considerations
•
3-10
ISDN (PRI/BRI - T Point) can get calling party information.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
•
•
•
•
Chapter 3. System Features
Caller ID service must be ordered from the local telephone operating company or the
interexchange carrier.
Caller ID data is usually sent between the first and the second rings of the incoming trunk call.
The trunk may be programmed to immediately ring at the station or wait until after the Caller ID
digits are received before ringing at the station. If the trunk is programmed to ring immediately,
the Caller ID digits will not display until after they are received and processed.
Caller ID numbers may be denied from being sent for some callers (private). Some long distance
carriers may not provide Caller ID data (out of area).
Prior to Version 3.0, Caller ID supported only the number format. Version 3.0 and higher
supports selection of the number or name.
In Version 3.0, Caller ID displays the highest ringing priority call (call queued to ring at the
target extension immediately after the present call terminates).
Caller ID Alpha Tagging
Description
If the received Caller ID phone number matches any number in the System Speed Dials (SSD000SSD199), then the associated System Speed Dial name can be displayed as the Caller ID information.
Alternatively, the DID name may be displayed instead.
In Version 3.0 and higher, Caller ID information will be shown on the second line of the LCD display
when an incoming call rings a display phone with a conversation already in progress. Second
incoming calls include extension Camp-on, extension Call Wait, queued DIL, both Appearance and
non-Appearance calls (CO, MCO, virtual or DN, recall, BLF).
Hardware Requirements
•
ISDN (PRI = VB-44540, BRI = VB-44530)
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-01: System (Alpha Tagging)
Considerations
•
The system may be set to display Caller ID in one of two priorities as follows:
Priority Choice 1
• CID name (future feature)
• Alpha tagging if matched
• DID name
•
•
Priority Choice 2
• DID name
• CID name (future feature)
• Alpha tagging if matched
Currently Caller ID only supports the single format (number only). Multiple format (number and
name) is not currently available but is planned as a future feature.
Caller ID Call Logging only shows the CID number.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-11
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Centrex/PBX Compatibility
Description
Centrex/PBX Compatibility allows the System to be connected behind centrex or PBX lines.
The System supports up to 6 access codes for dialing centrex or a PBX. These access codes allow the
System, System Message Detail Recording (SMDR) output to exclude the number dialed to reach a
centrex or PBX line.
When connected behind a PBX or Centrex, Toll Restriction Service (TRS) can be used to restrict
calls.
The System also supports transmission of a flash signal over the centrex or PBX link.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Class of Service
Description
A Class of Service (COS) allows or restricts access to a group of features or functions. For instance,
an Extension COS may allow Call Forwarding features. In the System, both extensions and trunks use
classes of service.
The System supports the following COSs for trunks and extensions:
•
COS - Trunk/Tie
•
COS - Ext/Ext Restriction
•
COS - Extension Feature
•
COS - Trunk to Trunk Restriction
Class of Service - Trunk/Tie
Tie/Trunk COS allows or restricts access to various features. Each trunk is assigned to one of 16 trunk
classes of service (00-15).
The following table shows the features that can be enabled/disabled for each trunk COS.
3-12
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Table 3-1. Trunk COS
Number
Feature
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Intercom Ringing Tone (CO or intercom ring tone)
Dial Tone to Tie Lines (Enable/Disable)
Forced Recover on Fast-Busy Tone (Send fast busy or disconnect line)
DID/DDI Dialed Number Conversion Table (DID/DNIS Table A or B)
Paging on DISA/Tie-Line Call (Allow/Restrict)
DISA Security Code Verification
Network Flash Forwarding (Version 2.0 or higher)
Network Flash Receive (Version 2.0 or higher)
Brokers Hold for Network Calls (Version 2.0 or higher)
Priority Message-Waiting Set/Cancel (Version 2.0 or higher)
Network-to-Network Transfer (Version 2.0 or higher)
Camp-On for Tie-Lines (Version 2.0 or higher)
T1 Trunk Ring Back Service Tone (Version 3.5 or higher)
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Class of Service - Ext/Ext Restriction
Ext/Ext Restriction COS allows or restricts calls placed to other extensions based upon the Extension
COS. Each Extension COS is programmed to either originate or not originate calls to another
Extension COS.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Class of Service - Extension
FF1-0-10: Ext - Ext Restriction
FF2: Extension COS Assignment
Considerations
•
N/A
Class of Service - Extension Feature
Extension COS allows or restricts access to certain extension features. (The extension features are
described later in this manual.) Each extension is assigned to one of 16 classes of service (00-15).
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-13
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
The following table shows the features that can be enabled/disabled for each Extension COS.
Table 3-2. Extension COS
Class of Service Features
Number
3-14
Feature
1
Intercom Call Type (Tone/Voice)
2
Onhook Transfer at Ringback (Allow/Restrict)
3
Onhook Transfer at Talk (Allow/Restrict)
4
On-Hook Transfer at Camp-On (Allow/Restrict)
5
Exclusive Hold for Non-Appearing CO (System/Exclusive)
6
Exclusive Hold on SLTs (System/Exclusive)
7
Brokers Hold on SLTs (3-Party Conference/Brokers)
8
Hookflash During Talk on SLTs (Allow/Restrict)
9
SSD Assignment (Allow/Restrict)
10
SSD Assignment to MCO Tenant Groups (Allow/Restrict)
11
SSD Dialing (Allow/Restrict)
12
Intercom Redialing (Allow/Restrict)
13
Direct Trunk Access (Allow/Restrict)
14
MCO Incoming Call Answer (Allow/Restrict)
15
Paging (Allow/Restrict)
16
Auto Repeat Dial (Allow/Restrict)
17
DND Set/Clear (Allow/Restrict)
18
DND Set/Clear (Other) (Allow/Restrict)
19
Call Forward/All Calls (Allow/Restrict)
20
Call Forward/No Answer (Allow/Restrict)
21
Call Forward-Busy (Allow/Restrict)
22
Call Forward (Other) (Allow/Restrict)
23
User Maintenance Log-in (Allow/Restrict)
24
Priority Message Waiting Send (VM) (Allow/Restrict)
25
Message Waiting Send (Allow/Restrict)
26
System Mode Switch (Allow/Restrict)
27
Busy Override Send (Allow/Restrict)
28
Manual Camp-On Send (Allow/Restrict)
29
Manual Camp-On Receive (Allow/Restrict)
30
Callback Request Send (Allow/Restrict)
31
Callback Request Receive (Allow/Restrict)
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Class of Service Features
32
Trunk Queuing (Allow/Restrict)
33
Manual DND Override Send (Allow/Restrict)
34
Forced DND Override (Allow/Restrict)
35
8-Party Conference (Allow/Restrict)
36
Voice Call Send (Allow/Restrict)
37
Voice Call Receive (Allow/Restrict)
38
Dial Tone Stop (Allow/Restrict)
39
Dial Tone Pre-Pause Check (Check/No check)
40
Long Talk Alarm for Outgoing CO Calls (Enable/Disable)
41
Recall Timer Apply (Recall to Extension/Recall to Attendant)
42
Forced ARS (Not Forced/Forced)
43
API Event Reporting (No/Yes)
44
Call Forward/Outside (Allow/Deny)
45
Onhook Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer (Allow/Deny)
46
Station Call Park Answer (Allow/Deny)
47
Station Call Park Transfer (Allow/Deny)
48
OHVA (Allow/Deny)
49
OHVA Answer (Allow/Deny)
50
Call-Waiting Answer at HOLD
51
On-Hook Park
52-54
Not Used
55
Station Lockout (Own)
56
Station Lockout (Other)
57
Absence Message Set
58
UNA Pickup
59
Intercom Ring Tone at CO (Version 2.0 or higher)
60
BGM Access
61
CFD Setting For a PDN By Pressing the NPDN
62
Busy Override
63
Silent Monitor Initiate
64
Silent Monitor Receive
65
Transfer Recall
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-15
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Related Programming
•
FF2: Trunk COS
•
FF3: Extension COS Assignments
Considerations
•
N/A
Class of Service - T1 Trunk Ring Back Service Tone
With Version 3.5 and higher, the system can be programmed to send a simulated ring back tone to T1
trunks when the CO does not provide a ring back tone.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-04: Trunk COS
Considerations
•
Supports Ground Start/Loop Start Trunks
Class of Service - Trunk to Trunk Restriction
Trunk to Trunk COS allows or restricts call transfers from one trunk to another trunk based on the
originating and receiving trunk COS.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-04: Class of Service Trunk/Tie
•
FF1-0-11: Trunk-Trunk Restriction
Considerations
•
N/A
Class of Service - Extension (Station) Timers
Prior to CPC Version 2.0, timers related to certain extension functions such as the Hold Recall Timer
were only available on a system-wide basis. Beginning with CPC Version 2.0 these extension
functions may continue to use the same system-wide timers or a newly added Station Timer Class
settings. Up to eight Station Timer Classes may be specified. Then an extension may be assigned a
Station Timer Class.
The following table shows the extension timers that may be assigned on a class basis.
3-16
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Table 3-3. Station Timer Class
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Station Timer
Hold Recall Timer (KTEL)
Hold Recall Timer (SLT)
Transfer Recall Timer (KTEL and SLT)
Hold/Transfer Recall Ringing Timer
Call Park Recall Timer
Call Forward No Answer Timer (Day 1)
Call Forward No Answer Timer (Day 2)
Call Forward No Answer Timer (Night)
Floating Hold Recall Timer
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-1-05: Station Timer Class Definitions
FF3-0 (Extensions): Station Timer Class Assignments
Considerations
•
N/A
CO Ringing Types
Description
Several types of CO ringing are available for the System including the following:
•
•
•
•
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Ringing
Direct In Line (DIL) Ringing
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ringing
Multiple Ringing
These ringing types may be used in any combination in the System.
DID Ringing
DID Ringing allows calls on a common CO to be directed to ring to a specific extension or group of
extensions, etc. based upon the final digits dialed. These final digits are received from the DID trunk
and compared to a DID Table that determines where the calls should ring. Depending on the
assignments in the DID Table, names or trunk numbers are displayed. (Names can be up to 10 digits
long.)
DID Ringing can be very useful by sending calls directly to a specific extension, hunt group, etc.
based upon the number dialed. Since a relatively small number of trunks handle the DID calls, this
can be more cost efficient than DIL trunks or attendant group answering and transfer. (DID may send
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-17
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
a call to a group using the Virtual Extension feature.) DID Busy/Delayed Ringing is also available
with DID Ringing. (See “DID Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing” on page 3-52.)
For more information on DID CO Trunk Interface, see “CO Trunk Interface - DID” on page 3-21.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
Caller ID takes priority over the DID name assignment.
•
Only one of the two DID tables may have name assignments.
•
If the DID/DIL destination is a Directory Number (DN), the call goes to an extension that has a
destination key even if the Primary Directory Number extension is busy or does not answer.
•
If the DID/DIL destination is an UNA extension, the UNA will ring depending on DID number
tenant group/ DIL incoming CO tenant group.
DIL Ringing
DIL Ringing allows calls on a specific CO line to be directed to ring a specific extension, System
Speed Dial (SSD) number (for redirecting calls out), and hunting group.
This can be very useful when a trunk is dedicated to a specific person or purpose. However, this can
be a more expensive use of the line since it has a more limited use.
Prior to Version 3.0, it was impossible to distinguish between Private Line incoming calls and
Directory Number incoming calls. Version 3.0 and higher allows the person receiving the call to
easily distinguish between these types of incoming calls.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
3-18
•
If the DID/DIL destination is a Directory Number (DN), the call goes to an extension that has a
destination key even if the Primary Directory Number extension is busy or does not answer.
•
If the DID/DIL destination is an UNA extension, the UNA will ring depending on DID number
tenant group/ DIL incoming CO tenant group.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
DIL Delayed Incoming Ring Enhancement
Prior to Version 3.0, a DIL call that was not answered by the Immediate Ringing extension was
simultaneously passed to all other extensions in the MCO if Delayed Ringing was set. Beginning with
Version 3.0, an incoming DIL call that is not answered can be passed to a single Delayed Ring
destination or to all extensions with an MCO key that includes the incoming trunk. If the Delayed
Ringing extension is not answered, the call is forwarded the extension’s preprogrammed location
(e.g., Voice Mail, Call Forwarding, etc.) For example:
DIL Immediate
(DIL Destination = 300)
DIL Delayed
(DIL Delayed Destination = 301)
Both Versions
FF2-0-BSSC-031 (DIL Dest. = 300)
1. Call rings on Ext. 300 only
Version 2.6
Version 3.0
FF2-0-BSSC-0441 (DIL Dest. = 300)
1. Call rings on Ext. 300
2. Call rolls over to Ext. 301, 302 and
303 simultaneously because they have
an MCO key that includes the trunk.
FF2-0-BSSC-041 (DIL Dest. = 300)
1. Call rings on Ext. 300
2. System can be programmed to ring
Ext. 301 only, or to ring all three
extensions.
Note: The program settings in the previous figure can also be used for the following Delayed
Ringing extension destinations:
- Speed Dial
- Hunt Group Number
- Attendant Group Number
- ERA Number
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF2-0-BSSC-03 (Ring Assignment)
•
FF2-0-BSSC-04 (Delayed Ring Assignment)
•
FF1-0-02-0027 (DIL Delayed Ringing Pattern)
Considerations
•
N/A
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-19
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
DISA Ringing
DISA Ringing (which is related to the DISA feature) allows a CO trunk specified as a DISA CO trunk
to ring and give off-site users dial-in access to the System. Once the DISA trunk is accessed, the user
receives dial tone and may dial an extension.
For more information on DISA, see “Direct Inward System Access” on page 3-28.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Multiple Ringing
Description
Multiple Ringing allows CO calls into the System to be directed to ring multiple extensions in the
System. This can be very useful when anyone in a group may answer a call. This can also be very
useful at night when only a selected number of people are available to handle calls.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
CO Trunk Interface
Description
The System supports several types of CO Trunk Interfaces including the following:
•
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
•
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) - Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
•
ISDN - Primary Rate Interface (PRI)
•
Loop Start and Ground Start
Each trunk type supports various features such as Delayed Ringing, Night Ringing, etc.
3-20
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
CO Trunk Interface - DID
The DID feature allows an extension to have a dedicated direct number. The dedicated number allows
calls to be made directly to the extension, without the caller going through the attendant.
The DID number may have from 1 to 4 digits (typically 4).
Each DID Trunk Interface card (VB-44520) supports up to 8 DID trunks.
Hardware Requirements
•
The -48V power supply is required.
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
The DID Trunk card supports 1 to 4-digit dial-pulse (10 pps) or Dual Tone Multifrequency
(DTMF) signaling.
DID numbers must be between 0 and 9999.
CO Trunk Interface - Ground Start
Ground start trunks are supported in the System with the VB-44511 Loop Start/Ground Start trunk
interface. Each card supplies 8 circuits that can be individually configured for either loop start or
ground start operation.
Ground start trunks are useful in preventing call collision.
Hardware Requirements
•
When ground start trunks are used, the -48V power supply is required.
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
CO Trunk Interface - ISDN BRI
The System supports ISDN BRI with the VB-44530 ISDN BRI interface unit. The VB-44530 is a TPoint ISDN-BRI that supports 2 B (bearer) channels and 1 D (data) channel (2B + D; 192kbps). This
unit connects to an ISDN Data Service Unit (DSU). Point-to-point and point-to-multi operations are
selectable.
The ISDN-BRI supports enblock setting and enblock setting at the sub-address.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-21
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Considerations
•
A DSU is required (not available from Panasonic).
CO Trunk Interface - ISDN-PRI
The System supports ISDN-PRI with the VB-44540 ISDN PRI Interface unit. The VB-44540 is a T/SPoint ISDN-PRI that supports 23 B (bearer) channels and 1 D (data) channel (23B + D; 1544kbps).
This unit connects to an ISDN DSU.
Up to 3 units may be installed in a cabinet if you use full channel (23B + D or 24 B). A maximum of
18 units may be utilized in a fully equipped system. When all 24 channels on a unit are utilized, 3 slot
positions are required.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
CO Trunk Interface - Loop Start
The VB-44510 Loop Start interface unit supplies 8 loop start analog trunks circuits. In addition, the
VB-44511 Loop Start/Ground Start interface unit may alternatively be used to connect to loop start
trunks.
Hardware Requirements
•
VB-44510 Loop Start Card
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Computer Telephony Integration Capability
Description
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) coordinates communications between computers and the
telephone system. This is accomplished by using a Telephony Application Programming Interface
(TAPI) server to connect the DBS 576 with a Local Area Network.
LAN TAPI is designed to enhance the DBS 576’s performance by supporting both standard and
custom computer telephony applications. A TAPI Service Provider (TSP) resides on a host computer
running Windows NT Server/Version 4.0 or greater. Beginning with Version 3.0 and higher, CTAPI
has been added to support LAN TAPI. (See LAN TAPI on p. 3-36 for additional information.)
3-22
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Hardware Requirements
•
API Card
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Data Security
Description
If you are using a line for data (modem connections, etc.), Data Security makes it possible to prevent
interruptions. Data Security can be implemented for either all phone use or outside line use.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Daylight Saving Time
Description
The Daylight Saving Time feature allows you to program the 576 so that it automatically adjusts the
system’s internal timeclock forward or back on specific days of the year. This time change is then
reflected on the phone’s display (Key Telephone only).
Depending on the day of the year, the system will set the time according to the following:
Day of the year
First Sunday in April
Last Sunday in October
System Action
System clock adds one hour to current time at 2 a.m.
System clock subtracts one hour from current time at 2 a.m.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-23
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Considerations
•
Daylight Saving Time can only be enabled or disabled in system programming. See Section 400:
Programming for more information.
Day/Night System Mode
Description
Day/Night System Mode enables you to switch the System between two Day modes and a Night
mode. These modes determine incoming call handling, Toll Restriction Service (TRS) call handling,
and attendant group support.
While in a Night mode (generally used at night or any time when your office is closed), incoming
calls can ring at selected extensions (e.g., a night watchman’s extension or an extension connected to
an answering machine). Outbound calls can be restricted to certain phones. Calls can be directed to a
nighttime attendant group instead of the normal daytime attendant group.
The System provides one Night mode for night call handling. However, there are three night feature
access codes (Night, Night 1, and Night 2). These three codes may be used to provide different twoway Voice Processing Unit messages (i.e., Night may select one message, Night 1 may select a
different message, and Night 2 may select a third message.)
Typically, the Day mode is used for normal call processing of outside calls, TRS calls, and attendant
calls. The second day mode (Day 2) may be used for alternative call handling such as during a lunch
break, etc.
There are two ways to change day/night service modes:
•
Manually
•
Automatically
The following table lists the impact on TRS, Ringing, Attendant, and Built-in Voice Processing Unit
in the various system modes:
Table 3-4. System Mode Impact on TRS, Ringing, Attendant, and Built-in Voice Processing Unit
SYSTEM
MODE
TRS
RING
ATTENDANT
BUILT-IN
VOICE
PROCESSING
UNIT
Day 1
Day TRS Mode
Day 1 Ring Pattern
Day 1 Attend. Group
Day 1 Message
Day 2
Day TRS Mode
(Same for Day 1 and
Day 2)
Day 2 Ring Pattern
Day 2 Attend. Group
Handling
Day 2 Message
Night
Night TRS Mode
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night Ring Pattern
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night Attend. Group
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night Message
3-24
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
SYSTEM
MODE
Chapter 3. System Features
TRS
RING
ATTENDANT
BUILT-IN
VOICE
PROCESSING
UNIT
Night 1
Night TRS Mode
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night Ring Pattern
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night Attend. Group
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night 1 Message
Night 2
Night TRS Mode
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night Ring Pattern
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night Attend. Group
(Same for Night 1,
and 2)
Night 2 Message
Manual Day/Night Mode
You can manually change the System mode to Day 1, Day 2, Night, Night 2, or Night 3 mode by
either entering the correct dial code or by pressing the appropriately programmed FF key.
When using manual mode, the System may be configured to either use MCO tenant Day/Night modes
or system-wide Day/Night mode.
Operation
To switch Day/Day 2/Night modes using Feature Access Codes (CPC Ver. prior to 2.0):
Switch Mode
Toggle Day 1,
Day 2, and Night
Modes
Procedure
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Indication
Intercom dial tone
ON/OFF LED lights
2. Enter 760.
3. Press the ON/OFF key
ON/OFF LED goes off
If changing to Night mode, Red LED lights
If changing to Day mode, Red LED goes off
Day 2 Mode
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
ON/OFF LED lights
2. Enter 761 for the Day 2 Feature
code.
3. Press the ON/OFF key
ON/OFF LED goes off
Green LED lights
Night 1 Mode
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
ON/OFF LED lights
2. Enter 762 for the Night 1 Feature
code.
3. Press the ON/OFF key
ON/OFF LED goes off
Red Night LED lights
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-25
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Switch Mode
Night 2 Mode
Procedure
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Indication
Intercom dial tone
ON/OFF LED lights
2. Enter 763 for the Night 2 Feature
code.
3. Press the ON/OFF key
ON/OFF LED goes off
Red Night LED lights
To switch Day/Day 2/Night modes using Feature Access Codes (Ver. 2.0 and later):
Switch Mode
Toggle Day 1,
Day 2, and Night
Modes
Procedure
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Indication
Intercom dial tone
ON/OFF LED lights
2. Enter 760.
3. Press the ON/OFF key
ON/OFF LED goes off
If changing to Day 2 mode, Green LED lights
If changing to Night mode, Red LED lights
If changing to Day 1 mode, LED goes off
Day 2 Mode
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
ON/OFF LED lights
2. Enter 761 for the Day 2 Feature
code.
3. Press the ON/OFF key
ON/OFF LED goes off
Green LED lights
Night 1 Mode
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
ON/OFF LED lights
2. Enter 762 for the Night 1 Feature
code.
3. Press the ON/OFF key
ON/OFF LED goes off
Red Night LED lights
Night 2 Mode
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
ON/OFF LED lights
2. Enter 763 for the Night 2 Feature
code.
3. Press the ON/OFF key
ON/OFF LED goes off
Red Night LED lights
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
3-26
N/A
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Considerations
•
•
•
Day and Night modes can be assigned to FF keys on a phone. You can switch between Day 1,
Day 2, Night, Night 1, and Night 2 modes simply by pressing the appropriate key. The FF key
lights red when the System is in the assigned mode.
With CPC version 2.0 and later - Day 1/Day 2/Night toggle mode key can be assigned. Pressing
the key toggles between modes. When in Day 1 mode, the FF key LED is not lit. When in Day 2
mode, the LED lights green. When in Night mode, the LED lights red.
Prior to CPC version 2.0 - Day 1/Night toggle mode key can be assigned. Pressing the key
toggles between modes. When in Day mode, the FF key LED is not lit. When in Night mode, the
LED lights red.
Automatic Day/Night Mode
You can set the System to automatically enter a particular Day/Night mode determined by the time of
day. Each day of the month can be assigned 1 of 3 automatic system mode patterns. Each of the
patterns can be set to change modes up to 5 times per day.
Up to 20 special days can be programmed with up to 5 automatic mode changes for the day.
An Exception Day period is available for overriding the automatic mode for extended periods of time.
For instance, if an office is shut down for the week of July 4th, the System can be programmed to not
operate in the automatic mode for those days. The System will stay in the same mode for the period.
The mode may be manually changed at any time.
For instance, the System can be set to automatically enter Day 1 mode at 8:00 a.m. on weekdays and
enter Night mode at 5:00 p.m. on weekdays. All incoming calls, TRS and attendant group handling
would change accordingly. On Saturday and Sunday, the System would stay in Night mode.
The Automatic Day/Night modes may be set in User Maintenance. See “Set Mode Schedule” on page
4-15, “Set Special Day Mode” on page 4-24, “Set Exception Day Mode” on page 4-11, and “Set Day
of Week Mode” on page 4-9.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
You can only set Automatic Day/Night modes on a system-wide basis. If tenant groups require
separate Day/Night modes, you must set these modes manually.
You can manually override Automatic Day/Night modes. (see “Manual Day/Night Mode” on
page 3-25)
Digital Pad
Description
Digital pad settings allow adjustment of call levels for different call types. There are 29 pad classes in
the System. For pad class, a volume adjustment is assigned for a connection to any pad class
assignment. The volume adjustment is between -30dB and +30 dB.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-27
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
There are 8 extension pad classes and 16 trunk pad classes. In addition, there are pad classes for
conference calls, page port, MFR, RAI Modem, and Conference Call Unit. One pad class is currently
not used.
For instance, a call from an extension assigned to extension pad class 1 to a trunk assigned to trunk
pad class 3 would received the volume adjustment assigned to this connection combination.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Direct Inward System Access
Description
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) gives off-site users dial-in access to the System. You access
DISA from an outside location by entering a digit number assigned to a DISA trunk.
For security reasons, 16 incoming DISA ID codes/TRS class can be assigned. If a code is assigned, it
must be entered as soon as the DISA trunk answers.
Operation
To make a DISA call to an extension:
Action
1. From an outside location, enter the DISA trunk number.
Result
DISA dial tone
2. If an incoming DISA code is assigned enter the DISA code
(up to 10 digits). Otherwise, proceed to step 3.
3. Dial the extension number.
To make a DISA call to an outside number:
Action
1. From an outside location, enter the DISA trunk number.
Result
DISA dial tone
2. If an incoming DISA code is assigned enter the DISA code
(up to 10 digits). Otherwise, proceed to step 3.
3. Enter the Trunk group number (9 or 81-84)
4. Dial the phone number.
3-28
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Hardware Requirements
• N/A
Related Programming
• FF1-0-26: DISA Incoming Code
•
•
•
FF1-0-26: DISA Outgoing Codes and TRS Assignments
FF1-0-04: Class of Service (DISA ID Check)
FF2: Ring Type
Considerations
•
•
•
•
Busy override cannot be used for a DISA line.
DISA can be used to access extensions as well as outside numbers.
Paging cannot be accessed from a DISA line.
While dialing an extension number, the * key may be entered to cancel dialing and return to dial
tone. The # key may be entered to disconnect.
Distinctive Ringing
Description
Distinctive Ringing sets CO calls to ring with a distinctive ring based on the trunk. This “ring” also
identifies the call as an outside call instead of an inside call.
Beginning with CPC version 2.0, calls to a key telephone or DSLT can also be set to distinctive
ringing on an extension basis.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF2-0: (Trunks) Ring Pattern and Frequency
FF3-0: (Extensions) Ring Pattern and Frequency
FF1-0-04: (System) Trunk Class of Service
Considerations
•
N/A
Door Box
Description
The door box (also called door phone) allows visitors to announce their presence from the office door,
etc. When the button on the door box is pressed, one or more phones ring in the System. When
answered, a two way conversation is made between the door box and the answering phone.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-29
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
The answering party can operate a connected door opener (if equipped).
Operation
To answer a door box:
Action
Result
1. Answer the door box. (Door box calls ring in on a dedicated
FF key.)
Two way conversation possible
2. Enter 3 while connected to the door box extension.
Door unlocks
Hardware Requirements
•
The door box requires a Door Box Adaptor (VB-43701), Door Box (VA-43705), and Door
Opener. Door openers are not sold by Panasonic; however, they can be purchased from an
electronics dealer.
•
Up to 2 Door Boxes can be connected to a Door Box Adaptor and utilize the same trunk.
•
The Door Opener can be set to open for 15 seconds, 30 seconds, or one minute.
•
While the Door Opener is functioning, a call from another Door Box on the same Door Box
adaptor cannot be answered.
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
The trunk connected to the Door Box Adaptor must be set to dial pulse (DP).
Door Box Sensor
The sensor is a device that detects when a circuit is opened or closed. Sensors can be used to detect
events such as the opening of windows or doors. When the sensor is tripped, a tone sounds at a
designated extension. Sensors are not sold by Panasonic; however, they can be purchased separately
from an electronics dealer.
Hardware Requirements
•
The sensor is attached to the Door Box Adaptor (VB-43701).
•
Trunk lines connected to the Door Box Adaptor signal the designated extension when the sensor
is tripped.
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
3-30
The trunk connected to the sensor must be a dial-pulse (DP) trunk.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Extension Interface
The System supports a full array of extension devices including the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Panasonic’s proprietary key telephones
Standard analog devices
Dial Pulse (DP) / Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Single Line Telephone (SLT)
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) - Basic Rate Interface (BRI) S-point devices
ISDN-Primary Rate Interface (PRI) S-point devices
Digital Key Telephones
The System supports the complete line of Panasonic proprietary 44-Series Digital Key Telephones as
well as the Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT). These models include:
•
•
•
•
16 Button Standard Telephone in Gray (VB-44210G) and Black (VB-44210B)
22 Button Standard Telephone in Gray (VB-44220G) and Black (VB-44220B)
22 Button Display Speakerphone in Gray (VB-44223G) and Black (VB-44223B)
22 Button Voice Response Compatible Display Speakerphone in Gray (VB-44224G) and
Black (VB-44224B)
22 Button Large-display Speakerphone in Gray (VB-44225G) and Black (VB-44225B)
34 Button Standard Telephone in Gray (VB-44230G) and Black (VB-44230B)
34 Button Display Speakerphone in Gray (VB-44233G) and Black (VB-44233B)
EM24 - 24 Button Expansion Module in Gray (VB-44310G) and Black (VB-44310B)
DSS 72 - 72 Button DSS/BLF in Gray (VB-44320G) and Black (VB-44320B)
DSLT (VB-41200)
•
•
•
•
•
•
In addition to the above Digital Key Telephone models, the System supports the complete line of the
older Panasonic proprietary 43-series telephones.
For information on Key Telephone features and operation, see Chapter 5 of this manual. For
information on the DSLT features and operation, see Chapter 6 of this manual.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Analog Device Capability
The System supports analog telephone devices. These devices include fax machines, answering
machines, cordless telephones, computer modems as well as standard rotary and push button
telephones. This provides full flexibility in configuring the System.
Hardware Requirements
•
Analog devices must be connected to an analog port.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-31
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
DP/DTMF SLTs
The System supports both DP (rotary dial) and DTMF (push button) analog extension types.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
The CPC card provides 4 DTMF receivers. Traffic levels may require that one or more MFR
(DTMF) circuit cards be installed. Each MFR card provides 8 DTMF decoders.
ISDN/BRI S-Point Interface
The System supports ISDN-BRI terminal devices for connection as extensions. The BRI provides 2 B
(bearer) plus 1 D (data) channel support (2B +D; 192 kbps).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
ISDN/PRI S-Point Interface
The System supports ISDN-PRI terminal devices with the ISDN/PRI S Point Interface (VB-44540).
The PRI provides 23 B (bearer) plus 1 D (data) channel support (23B +D; 1544 kbps).
Either 8, 16, or 24 circuits may be enabled on the interface. Each enabled group of 8 circuits requires
a slot position in the System. A fully used card uses 3 slot positions for the DBS 576.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
3-32
N/A
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Flexible Numbering Plan
Description
The System provides flexible numbering for feature access special numbers and extension numbers.
The dialing plan allows settings for digits dialed at dial tone, digits dialed at ringback tone, digits
dialed at busy tone, two patterns of feature codes dialed at dial tone, two patterns of feature codes
dialed at ringback tone, and two patterns of feature codes dialed at busy tone.
Feature access codes can be used when replacing another PBX system with a DBS 576 System.
Rather than learning the new access codes, the System feature access codes can be changed to match
the old system. As a result, telephone users are less confused by the change and the requirement for
retraining is reduced. Two sets of feature access codes are available (one of the two must be assigned
to the terminal).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Free Slot
Description
Each cabinet in the DBS 576 System contains 12 free (universal) slots. These slots can be used for
trunk cards, extension cards, or certain option cards.
Some circuit cards such as the Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) - Primary Rate Interface
(PRI) card occupy more that one slot.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Hunting Groups
Description
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-33
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hunting allows calls to be automatically transferred among a preselected group of phones. If a phone
is busy or there is no answer in a set amount of time, the call will hunt to the next phone in the hunt
group.
A phone assigned to a hunt group is called a member. Up to 20 members can be assigned to a hunt
group. Up to 12 hunt groups are available per cabinet.
Several methods of station hunting are available. Some methods require use of a pilot number (a
fictitious extension number) while others start by a direct call to a hunt group member.
The System supports the following hunting groups:
•
Pilot Terminal Hunt Group
•
Pilot Distributed Hunt Group
•
Switch Back Hunt Group
•
Circular Hunt Group
•
Next Extension/Hunt Group
Pilot Terminal Hunt Group
Pilot Terminal Hunt Group directs calls to a pilot number. The System begins with the first member
and hunts through the group for the first available member to receive the call. If no member is
available (extension is busy or there is no answer for a specified amount of time), the call is queued
for the first member to become available. You can also set the Queuing Timer to specify how long the
System will search the initial hunt group before beginning to search the next hunt group or extension.
The main advantage of this type of hunting is that the same hunting order is taken for all calls. This is
useful in presenting calls to selected members first.
Pilot Distributed Hunt Group
Pilot Distributed Hunt Group directs calls to a pilot number. The System reviews who received the
last call and begins hunting with the next member. If the last member in the group is reached and no
member is available, the hunt continues with the first member and proceeds forward. After a complete
search and no available member is found (extension is busy or there is no answer for a specified
amount of time), the call is queued for the first member to become available. You can also set the
Queuing Timer and specify how the long the System will search the initial hunt group before
beginning to search the next hunt group or extension.
The main advantage of this type of hunting is that calls are evenly distributed throughout the group.
Switch Back Hunt Group
Switch Back Hunt Group initiates hunting in a specified group for calls made to a member extension
in the group. If the called member of the hunt group is busy, the System begins hunting forward to the
end of the group. If no member is available, the system hunts backward from the called member. If no
member is available (extension is busy or there is no answer for a specified amount of time), the call
is queued for the first member to become available. You can also set the Queuing Timer and specify
how the long the System will search the initial hunt group before beginning to search the next hunt
group or extension.
The main advantage of this type of hunting is that calls can be directed to start with a selected portion
of the hunting group based on the directed number. However, all members are eventually searched.
3-34
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Circular Hunt Group
Circular Hunt Group initiates hunting in a specified group for calls made to a member extension in the
group. If the called member of the hunt group is busy, the System begins hunting forward to the end of
the group and then moves forward from the first member of the group. If no member is available
(extension is busy or there is no answer for a specified amount of time), the call is queued for the first
member to become available. You can also set the Queuing Timer and specify how the long the
System will search the initial hunt group before beginning to search the next hunt group or extension.
The main advantage of this type of hunting is that calls can be directed to start with a selected portion
of the hunting group based on the directed number. However, all members are eventually searched.
Next Extension/Hunt Group
Next Extension/Hunt Group lets you specify which extension or hunt group to search after the
Queuing Timer expires. This hunt group can be set as any type of hunt group, an attendant group, or
an extension (including virtual extensions).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
•
FF5-1: Hunt Groups Mode
FF5-1: Pilot Number
FF5-1: Member
FF5-1: Delayed Hunt Timer
FF5-1: Queuing Timer
FF5-1: Next Hunting
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
If a member of the hunt group has Do-Not-Disturb (DND) or Call Forwarding - All set, that
phone is temporarily removed from the hunt group.
If a member of the hunt group has Call Forwarding - Busy set and the extension is busy, the call
goes to the next phone in the hunt group.
If all members are busy for the duration of the busy queuing timer, the call can be forwarded to
another hunt group or another extension.
A hunt group can contain both real extensions and virtual extensions. If virtual, several phones
can be made to ring at the same time.
The pilot number for a hunt group is flexible (i.e., any extension number can be designated as the
pilot [not a real extension]).
Hunt groups support the following call types:
• Direct Inward Dialing (DID) / Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) / Direct
Dial Inward (DDI)
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
• Extension calls
• Private network attendant calls
• Call forward incoming
• Call forwarded to Attendant Hunt Group
For Version 3.0 and higher, a queuing wait timer allows you to queue calls in a Hunt Group for a
fixed period of time. When the call has passed through the Hunt Group once, the timer is
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-35
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
activated and the call is re-routed to the top of the group. The system continues to hunt for an
available agent until the timer limit expires, and the call is diverted to another location.
Internal Hold Tone
Description
If a Music-on-Hold (MOH) sound source is unavailable, a periodic hold tone generated internally in
the System can be provided to a caller. For more information, see “Music-on-Hold” on page 3-39.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1: MOH Assignment
Considerations
•
N/A
LAN TAPI
Description
LAN TAPI opens a line of communications between the DBS 576’s switching
systems and a PC. This is accomplished through the use of a Telephony Server
connected to a LAN. Users on PCs can use specific applications to send and receive
information to and from the DBS 576 via the LAN. Using a software program called
the Telephony Service Provider (TSP), call control information (TAPI commands) is
translated into commands that can be interpreted by the DBS 576. This “open”
communication between the PC and the telephone system allows the user to initiate
and handle calls via the application running on the PC.
Figure 1 illustrates the major LAN TAPI components and system connections.
3-36
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Figure 3-1. LAN TAPI system
5
4
RS232 serial connection
3
Office local area network
2
Server PC
Telephone system wiring
1
6
Telephone
User PC
Telephone
User PC
Telephone
User PC
For example, a user at PC (1) selects the “Dial” function from the TAPI-compliant
Personal Information Manager (PIM). The operating system routes this request over
the LAN (2) to the main Telephony Server (3), which translates and forwards the
request using Panasonic’s CT-API Protocal over a serial connection (4) to the DBS
576 (5). The DBS 576 then places the call from the user's telephone (6). The entire
process is completed quickly and automatically once invoked by the user.
Hardware Requirements
•
•
•
•
•
Windows NT network
Telephony Server connected to the network
Panasonic TSP software installed on the Telephony Server
PC (Windows 95/98 or NT operating system)
Supported TAPI application
Related Programming
•
See Section 575 - LAN TAPI Installation
Considerations
•
N/A
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-37
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
MCO Tenant Group
Description
When the System is configured for tenant operation, MCO Tenant Group determines which trunks
groups are used for incoming and outgoing calls.
Each MCO trunk group is assigned to an MCO tenant group for incoming calls and for outgoing calls.
By default, Trunk Group 1 is assigned to MCO Tenant Group 1, Trunk Group 2 is assigned to MCO
Tenant Group 2, etc. for both incoming and outgoing calls.
For outgoing calls, each tenant group has 5 auto-trunk selections available. By default the first autotrunk selection is seized by entering 9, the second by entering 81, etc.
The number of MCO tenant groups available depends on the number of ports in the system as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
96-port system: 1 to 12 MCO tenant groups
192-port system: 1to 24 MCO tenant groups
288-port system: 1 to 36 MCO tenant groups
384-port system: 1 to 48 MCO tenant groups
480-port system: 1 to 60 MCO tenant groups
576-port system: 1 To 72 MCO tenant groups
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
FF1-3: MCO Incoming/Outgoing
FF5-2: MCO Outgoing Trunk Assignments
FF5-3: MCO Incoming Trunk Assignments
FF2: Trunk Tenant Group Assignments
FF3: Extension Tenant Group Assignments
Considerations
•
When you first assign a trunk to a Trunk Tenant Group from the initial setting of (0), the system
automatically assigns the trunks as a member of the same number MCO Trunk Group (FF5-2 and
FF5-3). For instance, if Trunk 10 is assigned as a member of Trunk Tenant Group 1, then Trunk
10 is automatically assigned as a member of MCO Outbound Trunk Group 1 and MCO Inbound
Trunk Group 1. These assignments can be manually changed if desired.
Memory Backup
Description
Data stored in the CPC card can be copied to another CPC card in the OP2 card slot for the first
cabinet. This is particularly useful when performed after completion of initial system setup (as a
recovery measure) or before major changes are made to system configuration. This backup CPC can
then be used to immediately restore system operation.
This feature is a maintenance feature to be performed by the System certified dealer only.
3-38
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Hardware Requirements
•
A second CPC card that matches the type installed must be used to copy the memory.
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Music-on-Hold
Description
The System can provide Music-on-Hold (MOH) to parties on hold (either CO line, extension, or
network party). The MOH feature can also be used to play announcements or advertisements if
desired.
Hardware Requirements
•
The music source must be purchased separately. It is not provided with the System.
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
Important: A license may be required from the American Society of Composers, Authors, and Publishers (ASCAP) or similar organizations to transmit radio
or recorded music through the MOH feature. Panasonic Telecommunication
Systems Company, its distributors, and affiliates assume no liability should users
of Panasonic equipment fail to obtain such a license.
Name Assignments
Description
Names may be assigned to the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Extensions
Trunks
Direct Inward Dials (DIDs)
Personal Speed Dials (PSDs)
Systems Speed Dials (SSDs)
Trunks names and DID names must be assigned in dealer programming mode. Extension names and
Speed Dial names may be assigned from a display telephone.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-39
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
This feature does not require the use of a DSS/72 console or entering the programming mode.
Extension Name Assignments
Extension names can be up to 10 characters in length. (Assignment of extension names must be
allowed in the Extension Class of Service [COS].)
Operation
To set extension names using a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the * key.
4. Enter 2 for the Extension Name Assignment mode.
EXT
NO.=>
EXT
NAME displays
5. Enter the extension number.
XXX
6. Press the HOLD key.
A B C D E F XXX displays (where
XXX = extension number)
7. Press the FLASH key to clear the existing data.
A B C D E F XXX displays (where
XXX = extension number)
8. Enter the extension name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
3-41.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 3-42.)
9. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See “Example 1. Large-Display Phone” on page 3-41.
• See “Example 2. Small-Display Phone” on page 3-42.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
10. Repeat steps 7-8 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired extension name.
Note: Press the FLASH key to clear the entire entry.
3-40
11. Press the HOLD key when finished.
Next extension number displays
12. To enter another extension name, press the CONF key and
repeat steps 5-11.
EXT
NO.=>
EXT
NAME displays
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Example 1. Large-Display Phone
To enter D:
a. Press the first soft key on the top left.
b. Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row.
To enter o:
a. Press the third soft key from the top right.
b. Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-41
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Example 2. Small-Display Phone
Refer to the following diagram to determine which one-touch key to press. (See step 7-8 above.)
abcdef
ghijkl
mnopqr
stuvwx
y z : & / sp
ABCDEF
GHIJKL
MNOPQR
STUVWX
YZ.,’-
To enter D:
a. Press the first one-touch key from the left on the bottom row.
b. Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row.
To enter o:
a. Press the third one-touch key from the left on the top row.
3-42
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
b. Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
Extension names can be up to 10 characters in length.
The ability to make extension name assignments is allowed/restricted to anyone with a COS that
allows access to User Maintenance features. (See Chapter 4 “User Maintenance” of this
document.)
Speed Dial Name Assignments
You can assign names to PSD numbers from a display telephone without entering the programming
mode. If allowed in the Extension COS, you can also assign names to SSD numbers.
Operation
PSD Names:
To set PSD names using a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the * key.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-43
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
4. Enter 0 for the PSD Name Assignment mode.
A B C D E F P80 displays (where P80 =
PSD bin 80)
5. Press the up or down arrow key to display the desired PSD
bin number.
A B C D E F PXX displays (where PXX
= desired PSD bin number)
6. Enter the extension name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
3-41.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 3-42.)
Note: Press the FLASH key to clear any existing data
7. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See “Example 1. Large-display phone” on page 3-41.
• See “Example 2. Small-display phone” on page 3-42.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
8. Repeat steps 6-7 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired PSD name.
Note: Press the FLASH key to clear the entire entry.
9. Press the HOLD key when finished.
Next PSD bin number displays
10. To enter another speed dial name repeat steps 5-9.
SSD Names:
To set SSD names using a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the * key.
4. Enter 1 for the SSD Name Assignment mode.
SSD
NO.=>
SSD
NAME displays
5. Enter the speed dial bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
-SSDXXX
6. Press the HOLD key.
A B C D E F XXX displays (where XXX
= specified SSD bin number)
7. Press the FLASH key to clear the current data.
3-44
A B C D E F XXX displays (where XXX
= specified SSD bin number)
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Action
Result
8. Enter the speed dial name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
3-41.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 3-42.)
9. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See “Example 1. Large-display phone” on page 3-41.
• See “Example 2. Small-display phone” on page 3-42.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
10. Repeat steps 8-9 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired SSD name.
Note: Press the FLASH key to clear the entire entry.
11. Press the HOLD key when finished.
Next SSD bin number displays
12. To enter another speed dial name, press the CONF key and
repeat steps 5-11.
SSD
NO.=>
SSD
NAME displays
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
PSD names can contain a maximum of 7 characters. SSD names can contain a maximum of 16
characters.
The ability to make extension name assignments is allowed/restricted to anyone with a Class of
Service (COS) that allows access to User Maintenance features. (See Chapter 4 “User
Maintenance” of this document.)
•
Network Facilities
Description
The System supports networking facilities such as:
•
•
•
•
576-36-700
Network Attendant Reversion (Version 2.5 and higher)
Network Call Routing
Network Call Transfer
Network Centralized Attendant (Version 2.5 and higher)
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-45
Chapter 3. System Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Section 700 - Operation
Network Centralized Voice Mail (Version 2.5 and higher)
Networking Extension Calling
Network Flash Transfer (Version 2.5 and higher)
Network Hold (Version 2.5 and higher)
Network Paging
Network Transfer Recall (Version 2.5 and higher)
Tandem Calling
For more information on System Networking, see the System Networking Reference Manual.
Network Attendant Reversion
Network Attendant Reversion enables calls to revert to the attendant in the same cabinet. Calls will
not revert if the cabinet receiving the call has no attendant. Network Attendant Reversion does not
work with Network Hold.
Network Call Routing
Network Call Routing allows multiple systems that are interconnected in a network, to direct calls to a
specific tie line based on the number dialed. The call does not leave the network.
Network Call Transfer
Network Call Transfer allows a call at an extension to be transferred to another extension in the
network.
Network Centralized Attendant
Network Centralized Attendant allows one primary attendant group in the network to handle network
attendant calls.
Related Programming
•
FF6-2-07: Closed Numbering
Network Centralized Voice Mail
Network Centralized Voice Mail allows one primary voice mail system to support the network. (This
feature does not apply to integrated Voice Mail or Built-In Voice Mail.)
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
FF6-2-04: Route Table: Digit Modify Pattern No.
FF6-2-05: Digit Modify Table - Add Ending Digits
FF6-2-05-0005: Numbering Plan
FF6-2-06: Authorization Code (UK Only)
FF6-2-09-0001: Dialing Access Voice Mail System
FF1-0-04: Trunk COS (Priority Message - Waiting Send/Cancel)
FF8-1-05: Call-Forward ID Codes for Voice Mail
FF8-1-06: MSG Key ID Codes (USA only)
Network Extension Calling
3-46
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Network Extension Calling allows you to reach an extension on another PBX. Based on the number
you dial, the System network routes the call automatically.
Network Flash Transfer
When three or more systems are networked together with one System as the tandem, Network Flash
Transfer determines where a call is held when Network Hold is pressed.
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-04: Trunk COS (Network Flash Forwarding)
Network Hold
Network Hold allows the user to place a call on hold by pressing a programmed line key or MCO key.
When using Network Hold, you cannot establish a conference call between nodes, and only one party
can place the call on hold.
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-04: Trunk COS (Broker’s Hold for Network Calls)
•
FF1-1-01-0020: Network Flash Signal Timer
•
FF1-2-02: FF Dial Codes: Plan A (Network Flash Send During Intercom Dial Tone)
•
FF1-2-03: FF Dial Codes: Plan B (Network Flash Send During Intercom Dial Tone)
•
FF4-0-BSSC-0: FF-Key Assignment (Network Flash During Talk on FF-key)
Network Paging
Network Paging allows users on one System to page on another System when the appropriate Class of
Service (COS) allows.
Network Transfer Recall
Network Transfer Recall allows a call which has been transferred to another node to recall back to the
transferring extension.
Tandem Connection
Tandem Connection allows calls that are received over the network tie lines to be automatically routed
on to another PBX or out to the public network.
Hardware Requirements
•
T1 or E&M Card
Related Programming
•
FF6: ARS/TRS
Considerations
•
N/A
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-47
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Non-Blocking Architecture
Description
The System is totally non-blocking. All extension and outside lines are available for use at the same
time.
Hardware Requirements
•
The CPC-96 supports up to 96 ports. The CP-288 supports up to 288 ports and should be
combined with time switch card TSW288. The CPC-576 supports up to 576 ports and should be
combined with time switch card TSW576.
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
3-48
N/A
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Power Failure Transfer
Description
Power Failure Transfer provides telephone service to a limited number of Single Line Telephones
(SLTs) during a power failure. The SLTs are connected to the CO via a Power Failure Unit (PFU). In
the event of a power failure, the power failure extensions have dial tone directly from the CO.
(System features and restrictions do not apply.)
Hardware Requirements
•
PFU (VB-43703)
•
An SLT that will be connected to the PFU.
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
Up to four SLTs can be connected to one PFU.
•
For added protection against power outages, backup batteries can be installed in the System.
Backup batteries provide full telephone service and system features to all System extensions for
a limited amount of time. With maximum traffic, the backup batteries last up to 30 minutes in the
DBS 576.
Power On Maintenance
Description
The System allows you to change most circuit cards, programming, and many other maintenance
features while the System is powered on and operating. Very few operations require the System to be
powered down or out of service. The System therefore continues to operate without interruption for
most maintenance functions.
A limited number of items such as the replacement of some common control circuit cards requires the
system to be powered down.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-49
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Programming Devices
Description
The dealer may program the System either by using:
•
•
A digital key telephone equipped with display
A PC-Based Customizing Tool
Telephone Programming
The System can be fully programmed from an extension telephone equipped with 12 FF keys and a
display. While major system configuration changes may be more easily performed using a PC
programmer, all programming is available via a telephone. This is especially useful for minor changes
to the system configuration.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
PC-Based Customizing Tool
The System can be completely configured using the PC-Based Customizing Tool. This may be done
either by directly connecting to the System or by remote connection using a modem.
The System database can be uploaded and downloaded for easy storage and retrieval.
The PC-Based Customizing Tool connects to the System through the RS232C maintenance port.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
QSIG ISDN Lines
Description
QSIG is a digital signaling protocol for private-network phone systems comprised of ISDN lines.
Internationally, it is also called Private Signaling System No. 1 (PSS1).
3-50
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
QSIG, developed in the late 1980’s and still in the process of global standardization, provides the
ability to efficiently interconnect the remote ISDN PBX sites of large organization. In addition to
normal phone service, QSIG also supports advanced applications such as interconnection of voice/
fax/DP servers, broadband private networks, etc. In other words with QSIG “it’s not just a phone line
anymore.”
For more information on QSIG, see Section 570: QSIG Reference.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF2-1: QSIG ISDN Lines
Considerations
•
N/A
Ringing Modes
Description
The System supports multiple types of CO ringing including the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Day 1/Day 2/Night Ringing
Day 1/Day 2/Night Delayed Ringing
Direct Inward Dial (DID) Day/Night Ringing
DID Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Ringing
BLF Delayed Ringing
Slide Ringing
Alarm Ringing
Day 1/ Day 2/Night Ringing
When the System is in Day 1 mode, calls can be directed to ring at one or more extensions or at a hunt
group per the Day 1 ringing assignments.
When the System is in Day 2 mode, calls can be directed to ring at one or more extensions or at a hunt
group per the Day 2 ringing assignments.
When the system is in Night mode, call can be directed to ring at one or more extensions or at a hunt
group per the Night ringing assignments.
Inbound calls can be directed to desired normal daytime locations by setting the system into a Day
mode. By having a second day mode (Day 2) alternative call handling is available during day
operation. For instance, during lunch, calls can be directed to an alternative position.
Calls can be directed specific night locations when the system is set to Night mode.
For more information on Day Ringing, see “Day/Night System Mode” on page 3-24.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-51
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Day 1/ Day 2/Night Delayed Ringing
Delayed Ringing causes an incoming outside call that is unanswered at a primary extension within a
certain period of time, to ring at a designated extension or extensions. Delayed ringing destinations
can be set for Day 1, Day 2 and Night modes. CO Delayed Ringing is also available for hunt group
pilot numbers.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF2: Trunk Setting (Ringing Assignments)
FF1-1-02: CO Delayed Timer (Day 1/Day 2/Night)
Considerations
•
N/A
DID Day/Night Ringing
Incoming DID calls can be set to ring at day destinations when the system is in day mode and ring at
night destinations when the system is in night mode.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-4: DID Day Destination
FF1-4: DID Night Destination
Considerations
•
N/A
DID Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing
DID Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing causes an incoming DID call to a busy primary extension to
ring at a designated extension or extensions. DID Busy/Delayed Ringing also causes an incoming
DID call that is unanswered at a primary extension within a certain period of time, to ring at a
designated extension or extensions. Separate ring destinations are available for day and night modes.
DID Busy/Delayed Ringing is also available for hunt group pilot numbers. However, when the
Queuing Timer expires, the call leaves the hunt group and is forwarded to the DID Busy/Delayed
Ringing destination.
3-52
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-4: DID Day Busy/Delayed Destination
FF1-4: DID Night Busy/Delayed Destination
FF5-0-02: Queuing Timer
Considerations
•
•
Call Forwarding takes priority over DID Busy/Delayed Ringing
If the call is part of a hunt group and the Queuing Timer expires, the call is forwarded to the DID
Busy/Delay Ringing destination. (See “DID Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing” on page 3-52.)
Busy Lamp Field Ringing
Extensions that have Direct Station Select (DSS)/BLF FF keys assigned may be set to ring on those
keys.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF4: FF Key Assignment
Considerations
•
•
ISDN phones may not set BLF ringing.
For more information on BLF ringing, see “Line Appearances” on page 5-61.
Busy Lamp Field Delayed Ringing
Extensions that have Direct Station Select (DSS)/BLF FF keys assigned may be set to delay ring on
those keys.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-1-03-0013: BLF Delayed Ring Timer
FF4: FF Key Assignments
Considerations
•
•
ISDN phones may not set BLF ringing.
For more information on BLF ringing, see “Line Appearances” on page 5-61.
Slide Ringing
Similar to Delayed Ringing, Slide Ringing allows an alternate position to answer calls. If a call is not
answered within a slide ringing time period, the call can be set to ring at another phone with that trunk
key.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-53
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
One possible use for Slide Ringing is in an office with a common secretary. A non-ringing FF key can
be assigned for each CO trunk used by the group. If a call is not answered within the slide ringing
timer, the call will ring the common secretary.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF11-02: Slide/Alarm Ringing Timer
FF2: Trunk setting (Slide Ringing)
FF4: FF Key Assignment (Direct Line Key)
Considerations
•
N/A
Alarm Ringing
Alarm Ringing allows the incoming ringing tone to be changed if the call is not answered in a
predetermined time. This can be very useful in alerting others to pick up unanswered calls.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF2: Trunk Programming (Alarm Ringing)
FF11-02: Slide/Alarm Ringing Timer
Considerations
•
If slide ringing is enabled, it will override alarm ringing.
System Speed Dial TRS Override
Description
System Speed Dial (SSD) numbers may be used to outdial calls from extensions that otherwise have
outgoing call restrictions (i.e., Toll Restriction Service [TRS]).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
3-54
N/A
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Station Message Detail Recording
Description
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) provides detailed call records of outgoing calls. SMDR
records can be output to a printer or an external call accounting system.
Various types of information are reported on the SMDR record and each type of information occupies
a set position in the SMDR format (See Figure 2 on page 3-56.) One type of information is the
“condition code” which occupies the first position in the output format. This code specifies what type
of call was made or received (e.g., DISA Incoming call [S] or Closed Numbering call [W]). However,
condition codes are prioritized, and the type of call determines what code is displayed.
The following tables shows the priority of condition codes for outgoing calls and incoming calls.
Table 3-5. Priority of outgoing call condition codes
Priority
Condition
Code
Description
Highest
T or H
2nd
F
T = Outgoing Transfer Call
H = Outgoing Hold Call
F = Call Forward Outside Call
3rd
W
W = Closed Numbering Call
4th
L
L = LCR Outgoing Call
Lowest
O
O = Outgoing Call
For example, an outgoing call is an LCR Outgoing call (L) but it is also a transferred call. The SMDR
data condition code will be T to indicate that the call was an Outgoing Transfer. (A transferred call’s
condition code takes precedence over the type of call - LCR Outgoing call [L].)
Table 3-6. Priority of incoming call condition codes
Priority
Condition
Code
Highest
h or t
2nd
D, N, or S
Lowest
I or A
Description
h = Incoming Hold
t = Incoming Transfer
D = DID/DDI Incoming Call
N = Network Incoming Call
S = DISA Incoming Call
I = Incoming Call
A = Abandoned Call
For example, an incoming call is a DID/DDI Incoming call (D), but it is also a transferred call. The
SMDR data condition code will be t to indicate that the call was an Incoming Transfer call. (A
transferred call’s condition code takes precedence over the type of call - DID/DDI Incoming call [D].)
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-55
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Figure 3-2. Output data format
Format #1
T MM/DD HH:MM:SS HH:MM:SS NNNN TTTT dddddddddddddddddddddddd aaaaaaaaaa vvvvvH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Format #2
T MM/DD HH:MM:SS HH:MM:SS NNNN TTTT dddddddddddddddddddddddd aaaaaaaaaa vvvv
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
dddddddddddddddd cccccccc mm:ssH
9
10
11
1
Condition Code: (I: Incoming call / D: DID.DDI incoming call / h: Hold incoming call / N: Network
incoming call / S:DISA incoming call / t: Transfer incoming call / A: Abandoned Call / O: Outgoing
call [Non LCR] / F: Call forward outside call / H: Hold outgoing call / L: LCR outgoing call / T:
Transfer outgoing call / W: Closed Numbering call)
2
Call Start Time (MM=01 to 12 / DD=01 to 31 / HH=00 to 23 / MM=00 to 59 / SS=00 to 59)
3
Call Duration Time (HH=00 to 23 / MM=00 to 59 / SS=00 to 59)
4
CO User No. (Extension line No.: 0 to 9999 / CO line No.: C001 to C576)
5
CO line No. (CO line No.: 001 to 576 / When CO line is disconnected while the call is on hold: *001
to *576)
6
Dialed No. (24 digits max. including 0-9, *, # Cannot display Flash or Pause. If a number is hidden, *
will appear instead of digits. * will stay with the call even if the call is transferred. For Format 2, an I
Proceeds the digits if it is an incoming call.)
7
Accounting Code (10 digits max.)/Verified Account Code (Verified Account Code table number
V001 to V500)
8
DISA Security Code ID (DISA ID Code table number D001-D016)
9
Caller Data (Format #2 only)
10
ISDN Charge Data (Format #2 only - originator number applies to ISDN only) - Not used (Format # 2
only) Future Use
11
Incoming Ringing Time (Format #2 only) (MM=00 to 99 / SS=00 to 59)
H
Carriage Return Line Feed
Related Programming
•
•
•
3-56
FF2: SMDR for Outbound Calls (for Analog, E&M Tie Line, and ISDN)
FF2: SMDR for Inbound Calls (for Analog, E&M Tie Line, and ISDN)
FF1-006: Serial Port Receive Data
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 3. System Features
FF1-009: SMDR Output Format
Hardware Requirements
•
A printer or external call accounting system is required to receive SMDR data.
Considerations
•
•
A call must be answered to generate SMDR data (e.g., answered by voice mail, call pickup, etc.)
You can specify which type of SMDR data format is sent (i.e., either Format 1 - 80 characters or
Format 2 - 120 characters).
T1 Line
Description
The T-1 line provides up to 24 voice channels over a four-wire circuit. The 576 can support either 8,
16, or 24 channels. When the card is set for 16 channels, it occupies two flexible card slots. When the
card is set for 24 channels, it occupies three flexible card slots.
Unlike most other cards, the 576’s T-1 cards must be installed in selected flexible card slots. Up to
three T-1 cards can be installed in a single cabinet, and a fully configured six-cabinet system can
support up to 18 T-1 cards.
Hardware Requirements
•
•
Digital Service Unit (DSU)
Network Sync Card
Related Programming
•
FF2: T1-CO Lines
Considerations
•
•
The T1 Line proivdes trunk signaling modes for Loop Start, Ground Start, and E&M.
Also see Class of Service - T1 Trunk Ring Back Service Tone on p. 3-16 for more information on
T1 Line features.
Toll Restriction Service
Description
Toll Restriction Service (TRS) allows access levels, including the prohibition of long distance calls or
after-hours calls, to be assigned to specific extensions or CO lines. This minimizes non-business
related calls and reduces phone bills by only allowing long distance calls over designated lines.
TRS can be used in conjunction with Automatic Route Selection (ARS).
•
•
576-36-700
TRS classes are set on an extension and trunk basis. Up to 50 TRS classes can be assigned.
Each TRS class is then assigned to a TRS level. This level is used as the basis for allowing or
restricting calls.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-57
Chapter 3. System Features
•
Section 700 - Operation
There are 10 TRS levels available: 0 denies all calls, 1-8 may be partially restrictive per
assignments, and 9 allows all calls.
TRS can restrict the number of digits dialed (1 to 20 digits limit or no limit).
TRS can restrict the use of System Speed Dials (SSDs) for out dialing on a TRS class basis;
either no system speed dials or limit the range of SSDs.
TRS can restrict the use of the star (*) or pound (#) digits on a TRS class basis.
•
•
•
The following calling restrictions are also available:
•
Forced ARS Restriction (The ARS feature controls outside calls.)
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
The dialing restrictions included in this feature help prevent unauthorized outgoing calls. It is
possible; however, to program your System to allow SSD to override TRS.
For more information on ARS/TRS, see the ARS/TRS Reference Manual.
Trunk Access Groups
Description
Trunks can be placed in trunk groups. When a trunk group is accessed, the System automatically
selects an open trunk from the group.
Operation
To access a trunk group:
Action
Result
1. Enter a trunk access code (default trunk group access codes
are 9 or 81-84).
2. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-3: MCO Access
Considerations
•
3-58
Trunks can only appear in one trunk group.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 3. System Features
If Automatic Call Routing is enabled, the MCO access code (9 by default) automatically
accesses the Automatic Route Selection (ARS) features.
Virtual Port
Description
Virtual ports are not physical ports in the System. They are phantom or simulated ports used in the
System to support:
•
•
Virtual extension ringing
Virtual floating hold
Up to 96 virtual ports may be assigned per cabinet.
Virtual Port used for Virtual Extension
You can assign an actual extension number to a virtual port. You can then assign the extension number
as any actual extension (incoming call settings and types, Station Class of Service (COS), tenant
group, pickup group, etc.). You can also assign the virtual port to an FF key on one or more telephones
and set to ring. Any call directed to the virtual port extension number will ring the assigned
telephone(s).
Virtual extensions provide a mechanism for ringing multiple phones simultaneously. For instance, a
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) entry can only be set to ring to one extension number. However, if the
DID is set to ring a virtual extension and the virtual extension is assigned to ring keys on multiple
extensions, the DID will ring the multiple extensions.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Virtual Port used for Floating Hold
You can assign a virtual port that is not assigned an extension number to be used for floating hold. The
virtual port is assigned to an FF key. Calls can then be placed on hold on the virtual port FF key. Any
extension that is assigned the same virtual port FF key can then pick up the held call.
This can be used like a system park feature.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-59
Chapter 3. System Features
•
Section 700 - Operation
N/A
Voice Mail Integration (Third Party)
Description
The System supports third party Voice Mail systems with features such as:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Answer Supervision for Voice Mail
Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail
Direct Inward Dial (DID)/DNIS/Direct Dial Inward (DDI) ID Code for Voice Mail
Disconnect Signal
High Priority Message Waiting
Message Key ID Code
Answer Supervision for Voice Mail
Description
This feature allows the System to send an answer signal to third-party Voice Mail systems.
Without this feature a third-party Voice Mail cannot receive a signal indicating that a System
extension has answered. In other words, to determine that the extension has answered, the Voice Mail
system would have to wait until the extension stops receiving ringback tone. As a result, waiting for
the ringback to stop often delays connection times for calls from Voice Mail to extensions. By sending
an answer signal, this feature provides quicker response time between the DBS 576 and the Voice
Mail system.
Hardware Requirements
•
AEC Port
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-0 23: Voice Mail Answer Supervision ID Code
FF3-0: SLT Voice Mail Connection
FF1-101: DTMF ON/OFF Pattern 2
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
3-60
The digits used for the answer signal code are determined by the requirements of the Voice Mail
system.
The answer code may be up to 4 characters and consist of the characters 0 - 9, *, #, and pause.
If the called extension does not answer and is forwarded to Voice Mail, the System sends a Call
Forward ID code back to the Voice Mail system.
During transmission of the answer signal code, other DTMF digits and functions from the DBS
576 extension are ignored.
The Voice Mail port must be assigned as a Voice Mail port connection.
The DTMF pattern is set as pattern 2.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail
Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail allows you to call forward to a third-party Voice Mail system.
The ID Code sends the digits that are required by the Voice Mail to identify the System extension.
Operation
To set a Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail:
Action
Result
1. Go offhook or press ON/OFF key.
2. Dial the Call Forward ID Code (default = 715).
Enter V.M. ID displays
3. Enter the ID code required by voice mail (see your voice
mail manual). Usually this is the extension number.
Stored V.M. ID displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Go onhook or press ON/OFF key.
To clear the ID Code:
Action
Result
1. Go offhook or press ON/OFF key.
2. Dial the Call Forward ID Code (default = 715)
Enter V.M. ID displays
3. Press the HOLD key.
Cleared V.M. ID displays
4. Go onhook or press ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
DID/DNIS/DDI Voice Mail ID Code
DID/DNIS/DDI calls may be sent directly to voice mail through the used of the DID Voice Mail ID
Code. A prefix and suffix may be specified to be sent to the voice mail as well as a chosen number of
DID digits.
Either no digits (default), the last two digits of the DID, the last three digits of the DID or the entire
DID number may be sent.
The prefix may be up to eight digits including 0-9, *, # and pause (REDIAL).
The suffix may be up to eight digits including 0-9, *, # and pause (REDIAL).
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-61
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-4-06: DID Number Automatic Send to VM
FF1-4-06: VM ID Code Prefix
FF1-4-06: VM ID Code: Suffix
Considerations
•
•
•
Each pause is a fixed 1 second delay.
If you do not assign a Voice Mail ID Code, the DID digits will be sent to voice mail.
Only one Voice Mail ID Code is available for the system.
Disconnect Signal
Beginning with CPC Version 2.0, either busy tone or silence can be sent to a third-party voice mail
system when the caller hangs up.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
For more information on setting and retrieving message waiting, see the telephone operation
sections that follow in this document.
High Priority Message Waiting
Message waiting displays and LEDs may be utilized by the Voice Mail system to indicate that a Voice
Mail message has been left in your mail box. When you retrieve the message, the message waiting
indications are cleared.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
For more information on setting and retrieving message waiting, see the telephone operation
sections that follow in this document.
Message Key ID Code
On a large-display phone you can use a Message key (labeled MSG) to either retrieve Voice Mail
messages or respond to telephone messages. When responding to Voice Mail messages from a 3rd
party Voice Mail system, the Message key needs to have an ID code set to identify the caller to the
Voice Mail system. You can also use the Message key to program a Voice Mail password.
3-62
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 3. System Features
You must program the Message key using the User Maintenance feature “Set Message Key ID Code”
on page 4-14.
Operation
To retrieve a message at Voice Mail:
Action
1. Press the MSG key.
Result
Voice mail instructions
2. Follow the Voice Mail instructions for retrieving messages.
3. When finished retrieving messages, replace the handset or
press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Voice Mail Transfer Key
Description
The Voice Mail Transfer (VM/TRF) key allows you to transfer calls to voice mailboxes without
waiting for voice mail to answer. You can assign a Voice Mail Transfer key from a phone or through
system programing.
Two Voice Mail Transfer keys are available. VM Transfer Key 1 will transfer to a voice mail
extension number. Voice Mail Transfer Key 2 will transfer to the voice mail pilot number.
Prior to Version 3.6, the VM/TRF key could not be used to transfer a call into Voice Mail on another
networked DBS 576 or DBS 576HD system. Beginning with Version 3.6, the user can press the VM/
TRF key to send a call across a node to another networked DBS 576 or DBS 576HD system.
Operation
To assign a Voice Mail Transfer key from a phone:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the FF key to be assigned as the Voice Mail Transfer
key.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-63
Chapter 3. System Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
4. Press REDIAL and 74nnnn (VM Transfer Key 1) where
nnnn is the voice mail extension number
or
Press REDIAL and 75nnnn (VM Transfer Key 2) where
nnnn is the voice mail extension number
8. Press the HOLD key.
9. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To use a Voice Mail Transfer key:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key to answer the
incoming call.
Connected to caller
2. Press the VM/TRF (1 or 2) key.
System places caller on hold
3. Press the DSS/BLF key, dial an extension number or select
the extension from the extension directory on the large display telephone.
4. Replace the handset or press the RELEASE, ON/OFF, or
PROG key.
Once a call is sent to the voice mail, after the voice mail answers, the system sends the VM Transfer
ID 1 or 2 + the extension number (BLF/DSS, Directory or dialed number).
Hardware RequirementsN/A
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF4 (FF Key Programming): FF Key Assignments
FF1-0-24: Voice Mail Transfer ID Code
Considerations
•
•
•
•
3-64
The VM/TRF key can be assigned to any key phone, DSS/72 or EM/24. The VM/TRF key
cannot be assigned to a one-touch key.
The VM/TRF key can be used to transfer intercom as well as CO calls to a voice mailbox.
The Voice Mail Transfer ID codes are assigned in the Maintenance Programming section. Up to
ten digits can be stored.
The system responds to key operations during the transfer in the following ways:
• Pressing the FLASH key cancels the VM/TRF and returns intercom dial tone to the
user. When the VM/TRF is cancelled, the incoming call is still connected but is on
hold.
• If a valid key (CO key or second DSS key, for example) is pressed, the VM/TRF is
cancelled and the operation invoked by the key is performed.
• If an invalid key (REDIAL, for example) is pressed, the VM/TRF is cancelled, and the
user receives busy tone.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
•
Chapter 3. System Features
• Once VM/TRF is pressed, the user can dial up to 10 digits before completing the transfer.
If a user begins to perform the voice mail transfer and the extension cannot hold a call (one call is
already on non-appearance hold, for example), the system will keep the call in the talk state and
will not allow the voice mail transfer to be initiated.
If the VM/TRF key stores a number other than a voice mail extension number, the system does
not send DSS/BLF information or the extension number that is dialed after pressing VM/TRF.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-65
Chapter 3. System Features
3-66
Section 700 - Operation
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
This chapter contains detailed descriptions of the following System maintenance topics and features:
Topic
Page
Introduction
4-2
About User Programming
4-2
Set Absence Messages
4-3
Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension
4-5
Set Call Forward ID Codes for Voice Mail
4-6
Set Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension
4-7
Set Caller ID Logging Extensions
4-8
Set Day of Week Mode
4-9
Set Exception Day Mode
4-11
Set Extension Names
4-13
Set Message Key ID Code
4-14
Set Mode Schedule
4-15
Set Personal Speed Dial Names
4-17
Set Personal Speed Dial Numbers
4-22
Set Send Text Messages
4-23
Set Special Day Mode
4-24
Set System Date/Time/Day
4-31
Set System Speed Dial Index
4-32
Set System Speed Dial Names
4-34
Set System Speed Dial Numbers
4-35
Set Text Message Replies
4-37
Set Verified Account Codes
4-38
Set Walking TRS Codes
4-40
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
4-1
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Introduction
User Maintenance provides several items that can be adjusted by the end user of the telephone system.
The telephone system dealer is not required to make these changes. These items include settings for:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Date and Time - including date, time, and day of week
Personal Speed Dial (PSD) Assignment - including PSD number and name
System Speed Dial (SSD) Assignment - including SSD number and name
Extension name
Verified Account code
Call Forward ID code
Message Key ID code
Walking Toll Restriction Service (TRS) Code
TRF of CFID
CID Logging Ext
Send Text Messages
Text Message Replies
Absence Messages
System mode. You can set the System to handle incoming calls, outbound call routing, and
built-in voice mail call messages differently depending upon whether the system is in Day
mode, Day 2 mode, or Night mode. With User Maintenance, you can program the System for
mode schedule, mode schedule for special day, mode schedule for exception days, and day of
the month patterns.
About User Programming
User Maintenance requires a Digital Display Key Telephone assigned to a Class of Service (COS)
that allows User Maintenance.
The procedures in the following sections describe the basic steps used for modifying parameters.
However, there are many alternative ways to view and modify the parameters using special keys and
procedures. Some of the more advanced keys include:
REDIAL
FLASH
ON/OFF
HOLD
PROG
CONF
AUTO
Menu
PREV
NEXT
VOLUME (t)
VOLUME (s)
FF1
FF2
4-2
(At menu level) clears an entry
(At data entry) retrieves the last entry setting
(At menu level) ignored
(At data entry) clears setting
Begins programming log-in or exits programming
(At menu level) moves to date and time
(At data entry) saves the displayed setting and moves to the next setting
Moves to the 81 User Maintenance Menu
Moves to the first data setting
Backs out of the address menu levels
Ignored
(At menu level) moves to the previous screen
(At data entry) ignored
(At menu level) moves to the next screen
(At data entry) ignored
Scrolls through the same address level (ascending)
Scrolls through the same address level (descending)
Moves to Personal Speed Dial (PSD) Assignment menu
Moves to System Speed Dial (SSD) Assignment menu
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
FF3
FF4
FF5
FF6
FF7
FF8
FF9
FF10
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Moves to Extension Name menu
Moves to Verified ID Code menu
Moves to Call Forward ID Code menu
Moves to Message Key ID Code menu
Moves to System Mode menu
Moves to Walking /Station Lock TRS
Moves to TRF of CWRD
Moves to CID Logging Ext.
Note: Once in a data entry level, you must either enter an acceptable value or restore the previous
value before proceeding. For instance, if you change an entry to an unacceptable value and then press
FF1 to move to the PSD Assignment menu, you will not be able to proceed. You must first enter an
acceptable value.
Operation
To enter User Maintenance mode:
Action
Result
1. At a telephone with a COS that allows user login, press the
ON/OFF key.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the * key twice (* *).
81-
4. Press the CONF key.
User MAINT displays
Note: Your extension’s Class of Service must be properly set to allow User Maintenance access.
Also, only one user may enter User Maintenance or System Programming at a time.
Set Absence Messages
Description
This menu item specifies absence messages.
Operation
To set Absence Messages using either a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 4-3.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 12.
3. Press the HOLD key.
8112Absence Message displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
576-36-700
Enter Msg # displays
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
4-3
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
5. Enter the Message number (0-9).
ABCDEF
6. Press the HOLD key.
X
displays (where X = Absence Message
number)
7. Enter the Absence Message (up to 15 characters):
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
4-19.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 4-20.)
Note: Press the FLASH key to clear any existing data.
8. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See Example 1. Large-display phone on page 4-19.
• See Example 2. Small-display phone on page 4-20.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
9. Repeat steps 7-8 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired Absence Message.
Note: Press the FLASH key to clear the entire entry.
10. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next message number displays
11. To set additional Absence Messages, press the volume up
or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
Absence Message.
Desired Absence Message displays
12. Repeat steps 7-11 until all Absence Messages are entered.
13. Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode.
14. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
Enter Msg # displays
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
4-4
N/A
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension
Description
You can assign a Call Forward Busy Destination Extension for each extension. This is typically used
for forwarding calls to voice mail.
Operation
To set a Call Forward Busy Destination Extension using either a large-display or
small-display phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 4-3.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 09.
8109-
3. Press the HOLD key.
TRF of CFWD displays
4. Enter 0.
CFWD-Busy EXT # displays
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Dial the extension number.
Enter CODE displays
7. Press the HOLD key.
8. Enter the destination extension.
9. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next extension number displays
10. To set Call Forward Busy destinations for additional
extensions, press the volume up and down key or press the
HOLD key to move to the desired Extension.
11. Repeat steps 9-11 until all extension are entered.
12. Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode.
13. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
4-5
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Set Call Forward ID Codes for Voice Mail
Description
(For a description of Call Forward ID codes for Voice Mail, see “Call Forward ID Code for Voice
Mail” on page 3-61.)
Voice Mail Call Forward ID codes are used by voice mail systems to identify the correct mail box for
storing messages. The actual entry needed will vary by voice mail systems and configuration. Often
the entry is the extension number.
Operation
To set the Call Forward ID code:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 4-3.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 05.
8105-
3. Press the HOLD key.
C.FWD ID Code displays
CF ID-EXT Number displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Dial the extension number.
CF-ID EXT XXX displays (where
XXX = extension number)
6. Press the HOLD key.
7. Enter the Call Forward ID code.
Notes: The ID code may contain up to 16 digits and contain
0, 1-9, *, #, pause (REDIAL key).
To clear an entry or any existing data, press the FLASH
key.
8. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next extension number displays
9. To set additional Call Forward ID codes, press the volume
up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the
desired extension.
Desired extension displays
10. Repeat steps 7-9 until all Call Forward ID codes are set.
11. Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode.
CF ID-EXT Number displays
12. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
4-6
N/A
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension
Description
You can assign a Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension for each extension. This is typically
used for forwarding calls to voice mail.
Operation
To set a Call Forward Busy Destination Extension using either a large-display or
small-display phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 4-3.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 09.
8109-
3. Press the HOLD key.
TRF of CFWD displays
4. Enter 1.
CFWD-NoANS Ext displays
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Dial the extension number.
Enter CODE displays
7. Press the HOLD key.
8. Enter the destination extension.
9. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next extension number displays
10. To set Call Forward No Answer destinations for additional
extensions, press the volume up and down key or press the
HOLD key to move to the desired Extension.
11. Repeat steps 9-11 until all extension are entered.
12. Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode.
13. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
576-36-700
ON/OFF LED goes off
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
4-7
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Caller ID Logging Extensions
Description
You can assign Caller ID Call Logging to extensions. The system is limited to 20 call logging
extensions per cabinet as follows:1
Number of Cabinets
Total Number of
Call Log Extensions
1
20
2
40
3
60
4
80
5
100
6
120
Operation
To set a Caller ID Logging Extensions using either a large-display or small-display
phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 4-3.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 10.
8110-
3. Press the HOLD key.
CID Logging EXT displays
CID Logging # displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Enter log control number.
6. Press the HOLD key.
7. Dial the extension number.
8. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
4-8
Next log control # displays
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Action
Result
9. To set CID Log for additional extensions, press the volume
up and down key or press the HOLD key to move to the
desired Extension.
10. Repeat steps 6-8 until all extension are entered.
11. Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode.
12. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Day of Week Mode
Description
(For a description of Automatic Day/Night System Mode, see “Automatic Day/Night Mode” on page
3-27.)
The System allows you to specify up to 3 mode patterns. This menu item determines which pattern to
follow for a given week day in the month (i.e., first Monday, second Monday, etc.).
Some bushiness may have special operating hours based on the day of the month. For instance, a
company may work half-days on the second Saturday of each month.
Operation
To set the Day of Week Mode:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 4-3.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 07.
3. Press the HOLD key.
8107System Mode displays
4. Enter 3.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
4-9
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
3-
5. Press the HOLD key.
D of Week PTN displays
300
6. Press the HOLD key.
:
1st SUN Pattern displays
7. Enter pattern (0 - no pattern, 1 - pattern 1, 2 - pattern 2, 3 pattern 3) for the first Sunday.
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FLASH
key.
8. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next Day of Week mode displays
9. To set additional Day of Week modes, press the volume up
or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
mode.
Desired Day of Week mode displays
10. Repeat steps 7-9 until the remaining days in the month are
set.
Note: The entry positions are listed in Table 1 on page 410.
3-
11. Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode.
D of Week PTN displays
12. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Table 4-1. Day of the Week - addresses
ADDRESSES
FOR THESE
DAYS OF THE
WEEK:
-- DAY OCCURRENCE -(e.g., 1st Sunday=address 300; 2nd Sunday=address 307)
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
Sunday
300
307
314
321
328
Monday
301
308
315
322
329
Tuesday
302
309
316
323
330
Wednesday
303
310
317
324
331
Thursday
304
311
318
325
332
Friday
305
312
319
326
333
Saturday
306
313
320
327
334
Hardware Requirements
•
4-10
N/A
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Exception Day Mode
Description
(For a description of Automatic Day/Night System Mode, see “Automatic Day/Night Mode” on page
3-27.)
You can specify exception days which allow for a range of days for the System to operate in the Night
mode. This is intended for extended holidays for business shut down periods that last for multiple
days. You can specify up to 6 exception day periods.
Operation
To set the Exception Day Modes:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 4-3.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 07.
8107-
3. Press the HOLD key.
System Mode displays
4. Enter 2.
2-
5. Press the HOLD key.
Mode Except Day displays
200
6. Press the HOLD key.
:MMDD
PTN 1 Start Day displays
7. Enter the start date by month (two characters) and day (two
characters) for Exception Period 1.
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FLASH
key.
201
8. Press the HOLD key.
:MMDD
PTN 1 Stop Day displays
9. Enter the stop date by month (two characters) and day (two
characters) for Exception Period 1.
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FLASH
key.
10. Press the HOLD key.
576-36-700
Next Exception Day mode displays
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
4-11
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
11. To set additional Exception Day modes, press the volume
up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the
desired mode.
Desired Exception Day mode displays
12. Repeat steps 7-11 until all Exception Day modes are set.
(Up to 6 exception periods may be specified.)
Note: The entry positions are listed in Table 2 on page 412.
2-
13. Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode.
Mode Except Day displays
14. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Table 4-2. Exception Days
8107-2
(200-211)
EXCEPTION DAYS:
200=Start - Exception Day 1
201=End - “
202=Start - Exception Day 2
203=End - “
204=Start - Exception Day 3
205=End - “
206=Start - Exception Day 4
207=End - “
208=Start - Exception Day 5
209=End - “
210=Start - Exception Day 6
211=End - “
“
Hold
(MMDD)
Hold
Month/Day of Exception Days
(Start or End)
“
“
“
“
“
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
4-12
N/A
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Set Extension Names
Description
You can assign names to each extension, even if the extension is not a display telephone. When the
extension is called, the name appears on the display. For more information on the digital key
telephone display, see “Display Information” on page 5-43.
Operation
To set extension names using either a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 4-3.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 03.
8103-
3. Press the HOLD key.
Extension Name displays
0
4. Press the HOLD key.
:
EXT Number/Name displays
Enter EXT # displays
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Dial the extension number.
A B C D E F XXX displays (where
XXX = extension number)
7. Press the HOLD key.
8. Enter the extension name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
4-19.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 4-20.)
Note: Press the FLASH key to clear any existing data.
9. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See Example 1. Large-display phone on page 4-19.
• See Example 2. Small-display phone on page 4-20.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
10. Repeat steps 8-9 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired speed dial name.
Note: Press the FLASH key to clear the entire entry.
11. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next extension number displays
12. To set additional extension names, press the volume up
and down key or press the HOLD key to move to the
desired SSD.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
4-13
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
13. Repeat steps 8-12 until all extension names are entered.
14. Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode.
Enter EXT # displays
15. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Message Key ID Code
Description
(For a description of the Message Key ID Code Feature, see “Message Key ID Code” on page 3-62.)
On a large display phone you can use a Message key to either retrieve voice mail messages or respond
to telephone messages. To respond to voice mail messages from a 3rd party voice mail system, you
need to set the Message Key ID code to identify the caller to the voice mail system. You can also use
the Message key to program a voice mail password.
Operation
To set the Message Key ID code:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 4-3.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 06.
8106-
3. Press the HOLD key.
MSG Key ID Code displays
MSGID-EXT Number displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Dial the extension number of the phone being programmed.
6. Press the HOLD key.
4-14
MSG-ID EXT XXX displays (where
XXX = extension number)
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Action
Result
7. Enter the Message Key ID code.
Notes: The ID code may contain up to 16 digits and contain
0, 1-9, *, #, pause (REDIAL key).
To clear an entry or existing data, press the FLASH key.
8. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next extension number displays
9. To set additional Message Key ID codes, press the volume
up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the
desired extension.
Desired extension number displays
10. Repeat steps 7-9 until all Message Key ID codes are set.
11. Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode.
12. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
MSGID - EXT Number displays
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Mode Schedule
Description
(For a description of Automatic Day/Night System Mode, see “Automatic Day/Night Mode” on page
3-27.)
You can set the System to automatically enter None, Day 1, Day 2, Night, Night (1), or Night (2)
modes based upon mode patterns. You can define up to 3 patterns with up to 5 modes for each day.
(This menu allows the setting of the patterns.)
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
4-15
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To set the Mode Schedule:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 4-3.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 07.
8107-
3. Press the HOLD key.
System Mode displays
0-
4. Press the HOLD key.
Mode Schedule displays
000
5. Press the HOLD key.
:HHMM
PTN 1-1 Start T displays
6. Enter the start time in hours (two characters) and minutes
(two characters) for the Pattern 1 - first mode.
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FLASH
key.
001
7. Press the HOLD key.
:
PTN 1-1 Mode displays
8. Enter the desired mode for Pattern 1 - first (0 - None, 1 Day 1, 2 - Day 2, 3 - Night, 4 - Night (1), 5 - Night (2)).
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FLASH
key.
9. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next pattern mode displays
10. To set additional mode schedules, press the volume up or
down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
mode.
Desired pattern mode displays
11. Repeat steps 6-10 until all patterns and modes are set.
(There are 3 total patterns with 5 start time/modes each.)
Note: Entry Positions are listed in Table 3 on page 4-17.
12. Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode.
0Mode Schedule displays
13. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
4-16
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Table 4-3. Mode Schedule Patterns - addresses & values
FF8 1 07 0 (00-29) Hold
(MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold
-- ADDRESS NOs. (00-29) --
-- VALUES --
MODES
(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Pattern 3
1st MODE
2nd MODE
3rd MODE
4th MODE
5th MODE
Start Time
(HHMM)
00
02
04
06
08
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
01
03
05
07
09
Start Time
(HHMM)
10
12
14
16
18
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
11
13
15
17
19
Start Time
(HHMM)
20
22
24
26
28
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
21
23
25
27
29
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Personal Speed Dial Names
Description
For a description of Personal Speed Dial (PSD), see “Personal Speed Dial” on page 5-81 for a Digital
Key Telephone, “Personal Speed Dial” on page 6-42 for a Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT), and
“Personal Speed Dial” on page 7-36 for a Single Line Telephone (SLT).
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
4-17
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To set PSD names using either a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 4-3.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 01.
8101-
3. Press the HOLD key.
PSD Assignment displays
4. Enter 1.
1
5. Press the HOLD key.
:
PSD Name displays
EXT Number displays
6. Press the HOLD key.
7. Dial the extension number.
Enter PSD # XXX displays (where
XXX = dialed extension number)
8. Press the HOLD key.
9. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
A B C D E F PXX displays (where
PXX = PSD number)
10. Press the HOLD key.
11. Enter the PSD name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
4-19.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 4-20.)
Note: Press the FLASH key to clear any existing data.
12. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See Example 1. Large-display phone on page 4-19.
• See Example 2. Small-display phone on page 4-20.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
13. Repeat steps 11-12 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired speed dial name.
Note: Press the FLASH key to clear the entire entry.
14. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next PSD bin number displays
15. To set additional PSD names, press the volume up and
down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
PSD.
Desired PSD bin number displays
16. Repeat steps 11-15 until all PSD names are entered.
4-18
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Action
Result
17. Press the AUTO key to exit the PSD name entry mode.
Enter PSD # XXX displays (where
XXX = extension number)
18. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Example 1. Large-Display Phone
To enter D:
a. Press the first soft key on the top left.
b. Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row.
To enter o:
a. Press the third soft key from the top right.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
4-19
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
b. Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row.
Example 2. Small-Display Phone
Refer to the following diagram to determine which one-touch key to press.
abcdef
ghijkl
mnopqr
stuvwx
y z : & / sp
ABCDEF
GHIJKL
MNOPQR
STUVWX
YZ.,’-
To enter D:
a. Press the first one-touch key from the left on the bottom row.
4-20
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
b. Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row.
To enter o:
a. Press the third one-touch key from the left on the top row.
b. Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
4-21
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Set Personal Speed Dial Numbers
Description
For a description of Personal Speed Dial (PSD), see “Personal Speed Dial” on page 5-81 for a Digital
Key Telephone, “Personal Speed Dial” on page 6-42 for a Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT), and
“Personal Speed Dial” on page 7-36 for a Single Line Telephone (SLT).
Operation
To set PSD numbers:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 4-3.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 01.
8101-
3. Press the HOLD key.
PSD Assignment displays
0
4. Press the HOLD key.
:
PSD Number displays
EXT Number displays
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Dial the extension number.
Enter PSD # XXX displays (where
XXX = dialed extension number)
7. Press the HOLD key.
8. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
YYY
ZZ displays (where XXX
= extension number, YYY = assigned
name, and ZZ = PSD bin number)
9. Press the HOLD key.
10. Enter the PSD digits to be dialed.
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FLASH
key.
11. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next PSD bin number displays
12. To set additional PSD numbers, press the volume up and
down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
PSD bin number.
Desired PSD bin number displays
13. Repeat steps 10-12 until all PSD numbers are entered.
14. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
4-22
N/A
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Send Text Messages
Description
You can send a text message to a key telephone with a display when you are sending call waiting
signal (Auto camp-on or manual camp-on). This menu item specifies the text messages that may be
sent.
Operation
To set Send Text Messages using either a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 4-3.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 11.
8111-
3. Press the HOLD key.
Text Message displays
4. Enter 0.
8111-0:
5. Press the HOLD key.
Send Message displays
Enter Msg # displays
6. Press the HOLD key.
7. Enter the Message number (0-9).
ABCDEF
8. Press the HOLD key.
X
displays (where X = Send Text Message
number)
9. Enter the Text Message (up to 15 characters):
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
4-19.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 4-20.)
Note: Press the FLASH key to clear any existing data.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
4-23
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
10. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See Example 1. Large-display phone on page 4-19.
• See Example 2. Small-display phone on page 4-20.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
11. Repeat steps 9-10 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired Text Message.
Note: Press the FLASH key to clear the entire entry.
12. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next message number displays
13. To set additional text Messages, press the volume up or
down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
Send Text Message.
Desired text message displays
14. Repeat steps 9-13 until all Send Text Messages are
entered.
15. Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode.
Enter Msg # displays
16. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Special Day Mode
Description
(For a description of Automatic Day/Night System Mode, see “Automatic Day/Night Mode” on page
3-27.)
You can specify up to 20 special days for the System. For each special day, you can specify up to 5
modes settings.
4-24
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Operation
To set the Special Day Modes:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 4-3.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 07.
8107-
3. Press the HOLD key.
System Mode displays
4. Enter 1.
1-
5. Press the HOLD key.
Mode Special Day displays
1000
6. Press the HOLD key.
:MMDD
Special Day 01 displays
7. Enter the date by month (two characters) and day (two characters) for the Special Day 1.
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FLASH
key.
1001
8. Press the HOLD key.
:HHMM
S Day 01-1 Start displays
9. Enter the start time in hours (two characters) and minutes
(two characters) for mode 1.
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FLASH
key.
1002
10. Press the HOLD key.
:
S Day 01-1 Mode displays
11. Enter the desired mode for Special Day ( (0 - None, 1 Day 1, 2 - Day 2, 3 - Night, 4 - Night(1), 5 - Night (2)).
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FLASH
key.
12. Press the HOLD key.
Next Special Day mode displays
13. To set additional Special Day modes, press the volume up
or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
mode.
14. Repeat steps 7-13 until all Special Day modes are set. (Up
to 20 special days may be entered.)
Note: The entry positions are listed in Table 4.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
4-25
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
1-
15. Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode.
Mode Special Day displays
16. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Table 4-4. Special Day Start Time/Mode - addresses & values
FF8 1 07 1 (1000-1219) Hold (MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold
-- ADDRESS NOs. (1000-1219) --
-- VALUES --
MODES
(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)
1st MODE
Special Day 1
Special Day 2
Special Day 3
4-26
2nd MODE
3rd MODE
4th MODE
5th MODE
Date
(MMDD)
1000
Start Time
(HHMM)
1001
1003
1005
1007
1009
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1002
1004
1006
1008
1010
Date
(MMDD)
1011
Start Time
(HHMM)
1012
1014
1016
1018
1020
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1013
1015
1017
1019
1021
Date
(MMDD)
1022
Start Time
(HHMM)
1023
1025
1027
1029
1031
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1024
1026
1028
1030
1032
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
FF8 1 07 1 (1000-1219) Hold (MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold
-- ADDRESS NOs. (1000-1219) --
-- VALUES --
MODES
(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)
1st MODE
Special Day 4
Special Day 5
Special Day 6
Special Day 7
576-36-700
2nd MODE
3rd MODE
4th MODE
5th MODE
Date
(MMDD)
1033
Start Time
(HHMM)
1034
1036
1038
1040
1042
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1035
1037
1039
1041
1043
Date
(MMDD)
1044
Start Time
(HHMM)
1045
1047
1049
1051
1053
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1046
1048
1050
1052
1054
Date
(MMDD)
1055
Start Time
(HHMM)
1056
1058
1060
1062
1064
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1057
1059
1061
1063
1065
Date
(MMDD)
1066
Start Time
(HHMM)
1067
1069
1071
1073
1075
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1068
1070
1072
1074
1076
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
4-27
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
FF8 1 07 1 (1000-1219) Hold (MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold
-- ADDRESS NOs. (1000-1219) --
-- VALUES --
MODES
(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)
1st MODE
Special Day 8
Special Day 9
Special Day 10
Special Day 11
4-28
2nd MODE
3rd MODE
4th MODE
5th MODE
Date
(MMDD)
1077
Start Time
(HHMM)
1078
1080
1082
1084
1086
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1079
1081
1083
1085
1087
Date
(MMDD)
1088
Start Time
(HHMM)
1089
1091
1093
1095
1097
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1090
1092
1094
1096
1098
Date
(MMDD)
1099
Start Time
(HHMM)
1100
1102
1104
1106
1108
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1101
1103
1105
1107
1109
Date
(MMDD)
1110
Start Time
(HHMM)
1111
1113
1115
1117
1119
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1112
1114
1116
1118
1120
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
FF8 1 07 1 (1000-1219) Hold (MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold
-- ADDRESS NOs. (1000-1219) --
-- VALUES --
MODES
(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)
1st MODE
Special Day 12
Special Day 13
Special Day 14
Special Day 15
576-36-700
2nd MODE
3rd MODE
4th MODE
5th MODE
Date
(MMDD)
1121
Start Time
(HHMM)
1122
1124
1126
1128
1130
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1123
1125
1127
1129
1131
Date
(MMDD)
1132
Start Time
(HHMM)
1133
1135
1137
1139
1141
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1134
1136
1138
1140
1142
Date
(MMDD)
1143
Start Time
(HHMM)
1144
1146
1148
1150
1152
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1145
1147
1149
1151
1153
Date
(MMDD)
1154
Start Time
(HHMM)
1155
1157
1159
1161
1163
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1156
1158
1162
1162
1164
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
4-29
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
FF8 1 07 1 (1000-1219) Hold (MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold
-- ADDRESS NOs. (1000-1219) --
-- VALUES --
MODES
(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)
1st MODE
Special Day 16
Special Day 17
Special Day 18
Special Day 19
4-30
2nd MODE
3rd MODE
4th MODE
5th MODE
Date
(MMDD)
1165
Start Time
(HHMM)
1166
1168
1170
1172
1174
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1167
1169
1171
1173
1175
Date
(MMDD)
1176
Start Time
(HHMM)
1177
1179
1181
1183
1185
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1178
1180
1182
1184
1186
Date
(MMDD)
1187
Start Time
(HHMM)
1188
1190
1192
1194
1196
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1189
1191
1193
1195
1197
Date
(MMDD)
1198
Start Time
(HHMM)
1199
1201
1203
1205
1207
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1200
1202
1204
1206
1208
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
FF8 1 07 1 (1000-1219) Hold (MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold
-- ADDRESS NOs. (1000-1219) --
-- VALUES --
MODES
(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)
1st MODE
Special Day 20
2nd MODE
3rd MODE
4th MODE
5th MODE
Date
(MMDD)
1209
Start Time
(HHMM)
1210
1212
1214
1216
1218
Mode (0-5):
0=None
1=Day 1
2=Day 2
3=Night
4=Night (1)
5=Night (2)
1211
1213
1215
1217
1219
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set System Date/Time/Day
Description
The System allows you to change the date, time, and day of week. When setting the time, you can
specify 12 or 24 hour format.
Operation
To change the system date, time, and day of week:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 4-3.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 000.
0
3. Press the HOLD key.
:YYMMDD
Date displays
4. Enter the year (two characters), month (two characters), and
day (two characters).
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FLASH
key.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
4-31
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
1
5. Press the HOLD key.
:HHMM
Time displays
6. Enter the hour (two characters) and minute (two characters).
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FLASH
key.
2
7. Press the HOLD key.
:
Day of the Week displays
8. Enter the day of week where:
1 = Mon, 2 = Tues., 3 = Wed., 4 = Thurs., 5 = Fri., 6 = Sat.,
0 = Sun.
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FLASH
key.
9. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
10. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
OR...
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
81User MAINT displays
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set System Speed Dial Index
Description
For a description of System Speed Dial (SSD), see “System Speed Dial” on page 5-83 for a Digital
Key Telephone, “System Speed Dial” on page 6-44 for a Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT), and
“System Speed Dial” on page 7-37 for a Single Line Telephone (SLT).
4-32
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Operation
To set SSD index using either a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 4-3.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 02.
8102-
3. Press the HOLD key.
SSD Assignment displays
4. Enter 2.
2
5. Press the HOLD key.
:
SSD Index displays
Enter Index # displays
6. Press the HOLD key.
7. Enter the SSD Index number (1 - 2).
A B C D E F XXX displays (where
XXX = SSD bin number)
8. Press the HOLD key.
9. Enter the SSD Index name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
4-19.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 4-20.)
Note: Press the FLASH key to clear any existing data.
10. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See Example 1. Large-display phone on page 4-19.
• See Example 2. Small-display phone on page 4-20.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
11. Repeat steps 9-10 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired SSD name.
Note: Press the FLASH key to clear the entire entry.
12. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next SSD index number displays
13. To set additional SSD index names, press the volume up or
down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
SSD.
Desired SSD index number displays
14. Repeat steps 9-13 until all SSD indexes are entered.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
4-33
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
15. Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode.
Enter SSD # displays
16. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set System Speed Dial Names
Description
For a description of System Speed Dial (SSD), see “System Speed Dial” on page 5-83 for a Digital
Key Telephone, “System Speed Dial” on page 6-44 for a Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT), and
“System Speed Dial” on page 7-37 for a Single Line Telephone (SLT).
Operation
To set SSD names using either a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 4-3.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 02.
8102-
3. Press the HOLD key.
SSD Assignment displays
4. Enter 1.
1
5. Press the HOLD key.
:
SSD Name displays
Enter SSD # displays
6. Press the HOLD key.
7. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
8. Press the HOLD key.
4-34
A B C D E F XXX displays (where
XXX = SSD bin number)
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Action
Result
9. Enter the SSD name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
4-19.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 4-20.)
Note: Press the FLASH key to clear any existing data.
10. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See Example 1. Large-display phone on page 4-19.
• See Example 2. Small-display phone on page 4-20.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
11. Repeat steps 9-10 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired SSD name.
Note: Press the FLASH key to clear the entire entry.
12. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next SSD bin number displays
13. To set additional SSD names, press the volume up or down
key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired SSD.
Desired SSD bin number displays
14. Repeat steps 9-13 until all SSD names are entered.
15. Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode.
Enter SSD # displays
16. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set System Speed Dial Numbers
Description
For a description of System Speed Dial (SSD), see “System Speed Dial” on page 5-83 for a Digital
Key Telephone, “System Speed Dial” on page 6-44 for a Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT), and
“System Speed Dial” on page 7-37 for a Single Line Telephone (SLT).
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
4-35
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To set SSD numbers:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 4-3.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 02.
8102-
3. Press the HOLD key.
SSD Assignment displays
0
4. Press the HOLD key.
:
SSD Number displays
Enter SSD # displays
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
-SSDXXX
XXX displays (where
XXX = SSD bin number)
7. Press the HOLD key.
8. Enter the SSD digits to be dialed.
Note: Press the FLASH key to clear an entry or any existing data.
9. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next SSD bin number displays
10. To set additional SSD numbers, press the volume up or
down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
SSD.
Desired SSD bin number displays
11. Repeat steps 8-10 until all SSDs are entered.
12. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
4-36
N/A
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Set Text Message Replies
Description
This menu item specifies reply text messages.
Operation
To set Text Message Replies using either a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 4-3.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 11.
8111-
3. Press the HOLD key.
Text Message displays
4. Enter 1.
8111-1:
5. Press the HOLD key.
Reply Message displays
Enter Msg # displays
6. Press the HOLD key.
7. Enter the Message number (0-9).
ABCDEF
8. Press the HOLD key.
X
displays (where X = Reply Text Message
number)
9. Enter the Text Message (up to 15 characters):
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
4-19.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 4-20.)
Note: Press the FLASH key to clear any existing data.
10. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See Example 1. Large-display phone on page 4-19.
• See Example 2. Small-display phone on page 4-20.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
11. Repeat steps 9-10 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired Text Message.
Note: Press the FLASH key to clear the entire entry.
12. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
576-36-700
Next message number displays
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
4-37
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Action
13. To set additional text Messages, press the volume up or
down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired
Send Text Message.
Result
Desired text message displays
14. Repeat steps 9-13 until all Text Message Replies are
entered.
15. Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode.
16. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
Enter Msg # displays
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Set Verified Account Codes
Description
(For a description of Verified Account Codes, see “Verified Account Codes” on page 5-7.)
You can enter up to 500 Verified Account codes. The System will store them in memory as valid
codes. Once the codes are entered here, a Toll Restriction Service (TRS) Class of Service (COS) can
be used with each code. You can then enter your code on someone else’s phone to bypass the TRS
restrictions on that phone. (The TRS assigned to the Verified Account code will override the phone’s
TRS.)
Operation
To set the Verified Account code:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 4-3.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 04.
3. Press the HOLD key.
8104Verified ACCD displays
4-38
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Action
Result
Table Number displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Enter the Verified Account table number (001-500).
XXX-
6. Press the HOLD key.
Verified ACCD displays (where XXX
= account code table number)
0001 : AAAAAAAAAAA
7. Press the HOLD key.
XXX:Account Cod displays (where
AAAAAAAAAAA = current account
code and XXX = account code table
number)
8. Enter up to ten-digit Verified Account Code. (All Verified
Account Codes must be unique. If there is a matching entry
entered, the System will not accept the entry and will double
beep.)
Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FLASH
key.
0002 :X
9. Press the HOLD key.
XXX:TRS Class displays (where X =
TRS Class)
10. Enter the TRS Class to be associated with the Verified
Account Code entry.
11. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
0001 :YYY displays (where YYY = the
next account code table number)
12. To add additional Verified Account numbers, press the volume up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the
desired Verified Account table number.
Desired Verified Account table number
displays
13. Repeat steps 8-12 until all Verified Account numbers are
entered.
14. Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode
15. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
Table Number
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
4-39
Chapter 4. User Maintenance
Section 700 - Operation
Set Walking TRS Codes
Description
You can assign Walking Toll Restriction Service (TRS) Codes for each extension.
Operation
To set Walking TRS Codes using either a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Maintenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on
page 4-3.)
Result
81User MAINT displays
2. At the 81 level, enter 08.
8108-
3. Press the HOLD key.
Walking TRS Cod displays
Walking ID-Ext displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Dial the extension number.
Walking ID XXX displays
6. Press the HOLD key.
7. Enter the 4-digit Walking TRS Code.
8. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.
Next extension number displays
9. To set additional extension Walking TRS Codes, press the
volume up and down key or press the HOLD key to move
to the desired Extension.
10. Repeat steps 8-10 until all extension are entered.
11. Press the AUTO key to exit the entry mode.
12. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.
81-
OR...
User MAINT displays
To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF
key.
OR...
ON/OFF LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
4-40
N/A
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
This chapter describes Key telephone features. Key telephones are proprietary digital phones that
provide feature access through a combination of feature keys and access codes.
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic
Page
Key Telephone
5-4
Absence Message
5-4
Account Codes
Non-Verified Account Codes
Verified Account Codes
5-6
Attendant Group Calls
5-7
5-7
5-9
Auto Repeat Dial
5-9
Background Music
5-10
Busy Override
5-11
Callback Request
5-12
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding-All Calls
Call Forwarding - Busy
Call Forwarding - No Answer
Call Forwarding-All Calls and Do-Not-Disturb
5-14
Call Hold
System Hold
Floating Hold
Exclusive Hold
Broker’s Hold
Call Park
5-14
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-18
5-18
5-19
5-20
5-21
5-21
5-23
Call Pickup
Extension Group Pickup
Extension Direct Pickup
Trunk Group Pickup
Trunk Direct Pickup
Call Transfer
Supervised Transfer
Unsupervised Transfer
Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension
5-24
5-25
5-26
5-26
5-27
Caller ID Call Log
5-27
5-28
5-29
5-30
Camp-on (Call Waiting)
5-34
Conference Calls
5-37
Directory Numbers
5-39
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-1
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Topic
Display Information
Caller ID Display Information
Large-Display Phone
Small-Display Phone
Changing the Display Contrast
5-2
Page
5-43
Do-Not-Disturb
5-43
5-44
5-45
5-45
5-46
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion
5-47
DSS/72 Console
5-48
EM/24 Console
5-48
Flash
5-49
Flexible Function Keys
5-49
Handsfree Answerback
5-56
Handsfree Operation
5-57
Headset Operation
5-57
Hot Dial Pad
5-58
Hot Line
5-59
Intercom Calling
5-59
Last Number Redial
5-60
Line Appearances
DSS/BLF Appearances
Direct Line Appearances
Multi-CO (MCO) Appearances
5-61
Message Key
5-61
5-63
5-63
5-65
Message Waiting/Callback
5-65
Mute Function
5-67
Offhook Monitor
5-68
Offhook Signaling
5-68
Offhook Voice Announce
5-69
One-Touch Keys
5-72
Onhook Dialing
5-74
Paging
Meet-Me Answer
5-74
Reset Call
5-75
5-76
Ringing Line Preference
5-76
Room Monitoring
5-77
Silent Monitor
5-79
Speed Dialing
Personal Speed Dial
5-81
5-81
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Topic
System Speed Dial
Speed Dial Linking
Speed Dial Name Assignments
Page
Station Lockout
5-83
5-85
5-87
5-91
Timed Reminder Call
5-93
Trunk Access
CO Line Key Trunk Access
Direct Trunk Access
MCO Line Preference
MCO Trunk Access
5-94
Trunk Queuing
5-95
5-96
5-96
5-96
5-97
Universal Night Answer to Page
5-98
MCO Trunk Access
5-99
Voice Recognition
5-101
Volume Control
5-102
Walking TRS Class of Service
5-103
Zip Mode
5-104
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-3
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Key Telephone
As an example of a key telephone, Figure 5-1 illustrates the Panasonic model VB-44225. This model
provides a large display that includes one-touch access to speed dial numbers, telephone features, and
Help screens.
Figure 5-1. VB-44225 Large-Display Key Telephone
Absence Message
Description
Extension users can leave text messages on their phones when they are away. When the unattended
extension is dialed, the text message displays on the caller’s phone. Any one of the following
messages can be selected. Messages 5 to 9 have no default message text. All the messages can be
changed through system programming.
Beginning with Version 3.6, an LED lamp on the Absence Message key will light red when this
feature is active.
5-4
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Table 5-1. Absence Messages
Message No.
Message Text
Message No.
Message Text
0
In Meeting
5
Absence_No_5
1
At Lunch
6
Absence_No_6
2
Out of Office
7
Absence_No_7
3
Vacation
8
Absence_No_8
4
Another Office
9
Absence_No_9
Optionally, a return time can be input. Example Return Times for Absence Messages include:
Input
Display
No input
Return
9
Return 9:00
11
Return 11:00
615
Return 6:15
1035
Return 10:35
Operation
To set an Absence Message
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Absence Message code (default = 729).
Enter Msg Code # displays
3. Enter the Absence Message number. (See Table 5-1 above.)
Enter XXXX Hold
In Meeting displays
4. If desired, enter the 4-digit returning time.
Absence message displays
5. Press HOLD key.
ABS MSG Accepted displays; LED
lamp lights red on Absence Message key
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel an Absence Message
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Absence Message code (default = 729).
Enter Msg Code # displays
3. Press HOLD key.
ABS MSG Cleared displays
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Related Programming
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-5
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
•
•
•
Section 700 - Operation
FF1 (System): Extension Class of Service Setting
FF3 (Extension): Extension Class of Service Assignment
FF8 (Maintenance): Absence Messages
Considerations
•
•
•
•
Calling parties without a display get a ring back tone, rather than the Absence Message.
If a message code number that has not been programmed is selected, “Absence No.n,” appears
on the display (n = message number).
Regardless of setting an Absence Message on a DID/DIL extension, DID/DIL calls are routed
according to the trunk ringing setting.
An absence message may also be cancelled by dialing 7**. This cancels Do Not Disturb and Call
Forwarding-All Calls as well.
Account Codes
Description
You can assign account codes to clients to facilitate billing and to track call dates and times, numbers
called, and outside line numbers used. This information is printed for each account on the System
Message Detail Recording (SMDR) record. In addition verified account codes may be used to change
the TRS level to allow calls to numbers otherwise restricted.
Account codes may be either forced or unforced (voluntary) and either verified or unverified.
This feature works with Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR). During a phone call, a station
user can silently enter an accounting or client billing code. The entered Code will display on the
phone’s LCD as it’s dialed, so the user can tell it’s being registered. Then later, the SMDR reports will
show the Code dialed for each call, and even sort the report by these Codes.
There are two different types of account codes: Non-Verified and Verified Account Codes. Prior to
Version 3.6, the maximum amount of account code numbers for both types could range from 1-10
digits. Beginning with Version 3.6, a second mode has been added that allows the user to set the
maximum amount of account code numbers from 1-4 digits. An account code error will occur when
more than the maximum number of digits are entered.
Non-Verified Account Codes
Non-Verified Codes are not checked by the system for validity. Depending on the setting, the user can
enter anything from 1-4 digits or 1-10 digits. Individual phones can be programmed to accept forced
Account Codes (the user must enter a code for every call) or voluntary Account Codes (the user can
enter a code, but doesn’t have to, for each call).
Non-Verified Account Codes can be assigned to incoming and/or outgoing calls. For incoming calls,
the user can enter the Code anytime during the call. For outgoing calls, the user either enters the Code
before accessing an outside line (for forced Codes), or anytime during the call (for voluntary Codes).
Verified Account Codes
Verified Account Codes entered by phone users must match a code that has been preprogrammed into
an Account Code Table. Depending on the setting, the user can enter anything from 1-4 digits or 1-10
digits. These codes can also be either forced or voluntary. You can program these codes with their own
Toll Restriction Service (TRS) Class assignment so that, when entered, they will override the
5-6
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
extension’s TRS Class. Thus, Verified Account Code users can “float” from phone to phone, placing
calls that would normally be restricted on that phone.
Non-Verified Account Codes
Non-verified Account codes are voluntary codes. (i.e., You do not have to enter an account code
before making a call.)
You can assign Non-verified Account codes to both incoming and outgoing calls. To assign an
account code to an outgoing call, you enter the account code before making the call or during the call.
To assign an account code to an incoming call, you enter the account code during the call.
Operation
To enter an account code before making a call:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Account Code feature code (default = 8#).
Enter Account # displays
3. Enter the Account Code (up to 10 digits).
Specified account code displays
4. Press the # key.
Specified account code # displays
5. Press a vacant CO key or enter a trunk access code.
CO Key LED lights
6. Dial the phone number.
Dialed phone number displays
To enter an account code during an outside call:
Action
Result
1. During a call, press the AUTO key.
2. Press the # key.
Enter Account # displays
3. Enter the Account Code (up to 10 digits).
Specified account code displays
4. Press the # key.
Display returns to call state.
Verified Account Codes
Stations restricted from outside call origination by Toll Restriction Service (TRS) can be allowed to
make outgoing calls by entering a Verified Account code that changes the TRS. After a call is made,
the SMDR record for the call will show the verified account code.
Operation
To make an outside call that requires an account code:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Verified Account ID code (default = 8#).
Enter Account # displays
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-7
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
3. Enter the Account Code (10 digits max.).
Specified account code displays
4. Press the # key.
Specified account code # displays
5. Press a vacant CO key or enter a trunk access code.
CO Key LED lights
6. Dial the phone number.
Dialed phone number displays
Hardware Requirements
•
An SMDR printer or external call accounting system is required to collect account code records.
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-19: TRS Class for Forced Account Code
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3: Forced Account
FF3: Verified Account
FF8-1-04: Verified Account Codes with TRS Class
Considerations
•
•
•
Account codes are not available during conversation recording mode for the Built-In Voice Mail.
Account codes will be cancelled after using CO queuing.
Account Codes interact with TRS as shown in the following table:
Forced or Not Forced
Verified or
Non-Verified
Not Forced
Non-Verified
TRS Class
No Account Entry
Account Entry
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Verified
Forced
Non-Verified
Verified
5-8
Account Code Based TRS
Class
TRS Class for Forced
Account Code
(FF1 0 19 0001)
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Account Code Based TRS
Class
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Attendant Group Calls
Description
You can call the attendant group from any extension by dialing the designated attendant number.
Operation
To call an attendant group:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the attendant pilot number (default = 0).
Call Attendant displays
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3: Extension Number
FF5-0: Attendant Hunt Groups
Considerations
•
•
•
Up to 20 extensions can be included in an attendant group.
The attendant pilot number is flexible.
If a member of an attendant group is for a virtual extension, multiple extensions in the attendant
group can be made to ring at once when the virtual number is dialed.
Auto Repeat Dial
Description
If you press the REDIAL key while receiving busy tone on an outside call, the System automatically
redials the number. The System continues to redial the number at set intervals until the called number
answers, the caller hangs up, or the maximum of 15 redial attempts is made.
Operation
To use Auto Repeat Dial:
Action
Result
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press a vacant CO key or enter a trunk access code
CO Key LED lights
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-9
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
3. Dial the phone number.
Result
• Dialed phone number displays
• Busy tone
4. Press the REDIAL key.
System automatically redials number
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Auto Repeat Dial)
FF3: Extension COS Assignment
Considerations
•
N/A
Background Music
Description
If your System is set up to provide Background Music, music can be played from the speakers of idle
telephones. If a call is made to an extension receiving Background Music, the music stops and the
phone rings. Background Music is also interrupted when the phone goes offhook.
The System can also provide Music-on-Hold (MOH) using a separate music source (except with
CPC-HS). If MOH is provided, callers automatically hear music when they are placed on hold. (For
more information on MOH, see page 3-39.)
Operation
To turn Background Music on:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Background Music code (default = *30).
BGM ON displays
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To turn Background Music off:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Background Music code (default = *30).
BGM OFF displays
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
5-10
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Hardware Requirements
•
The music source must be purchased separately. It is not provided with the System.
Important: A license may be required from the American Society of Composers, Authors, and Publishers (ASCAP) or similar organizations to transmit radio
or recorded music through the MOH and/or Background Music feature. Panasonic Telecommunication Systems Company, its distributors, and affiliates
assume no liability should users of Panasonic equipment fail to obtain such a
license.
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (BGM)
Considerations
•
N/A
Busy Override
Description
Busy Override allows you to break into another user’s outside or intercom calls to relay urgent
information or to create three-party conference calls.
Operation
To break into a call with a line appearance on your phone (CO Key Busy Override):
Action
1. Press the lit direct CO key.
Result
• Alert tone sounds to both phones (System programming required)
• Connected to both parties
To use Extension Busy Override:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
576-36-700
Result
Intercom dial tone
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-11
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
2. Dial the extension number.
Result
• Dialed extension number displays
• Busy tone
3. Enter the Busy Override code (default = 9).
• Alert tone sounds to both extensions
(System programming required)
• Connection to both parties
• OVR1: (name of overriding extension) and OVR2: (extension name
for current talk path) displays on
both extensions
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-01: Splash Tone (Busy Override)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Manual DND Override Send)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Forced DND Override)
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3: Extension COS
FF3: Data Security
Considerations
•
•
•
You cannot break in on three-party conference calls.
The default for the Override Alert Tone is off. If the Override Alert Tone is enabled, the tone will
be sent to both parties when a call is overridden.
Beginning with Version 3.0 and higher, certain extensions can be excluded from busy override
based on Class of Service.
Callback Request
Description
If you dial a busy extension, Callback Request enables the System to call you back when that
extension becomes free. When you answer, the System automatically rings the called party again.
5-12
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Operation
To set a Callback Request:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
• Dialed extension number displays
• Busy tone
3. Enter the Callback Request code (default = 3).
Ringback tone
4. Replace the handset after you hear the ringback tone.
System calls back when called extension
becomes free
To respond to a Callback Request:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
System automatically redials extension
To cancel a Callback Request:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the Callback cancellation code (default = 769).
3. Replace the handset .
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Callback Request Send)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Callback Request Receive)
FF3: Extension COS
FF1-2-03: Dial Plan (Callback Cancel)
Considerations
•
N/A
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-13
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Call Forwarding
Description
Call Forwarding allows you to send your calls to another extension, to an outside line, or to Voice
Mail. Call Forwarding can be set or canceled under the following conditions from either your own
extension or from an alternate extension:
•
•
•
Call Forwarding - All Calls
Call Forwarding - Busy
Call Forwarding - No Answer
Call Forwarding-All Calls
When Call Forwarding - All Calls is set, all incoming calls to an extension are immediately
forwarded. Beginning with Version 3.6, a Flexible Function key can be programmed so that the LED
indicates when this feature is active. The LED will light red when Call Forwarding-All Calls is set.
To set Call Forwarding-All Calls:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 721.
• For another extension, enter 741.
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward.
4. Enter the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programed into speed dialing. (For information,
see “Speed Dialing” on page 5-81.)
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
5-14
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To cancel Call Forwarding-All Calls:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 731.
• For another extension, enter 751.
3. If canceling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
extension number.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Call Forwarding - Busy
When Call Forwarding - Busy is set, all incoming calls to a busy extension are forwarded.
To set Call Forwarding - Busy:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 722.
• For another extension, enter 742.
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you want to forward.
4. Enter the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programed into speed dialing. (For information,
see “Speed Dialing” on page 5-81.)
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-15
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To cancel Call Forwarding - Busy:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 732.
• For another extension, enter 752.
3. If canceling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
extension number.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Call Forwarding - No Answer
When Call Forwarding - No Answer is set, a call will ring until the Call Forward - No Answer timer
expires. When the timer expires, the unanswered call is forwarded.
Operation
To set Call Forwarding - No Answer:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 723.
• For another extension, enter 743.
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward.
4. Dial the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programed into speed dialing. (For information,
see “Speed Dialing” on page 5-81.)
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
5-16
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To cancel Call Forwarding - No Answer:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 733.
• For another extension, enter 753.
3. If canceling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
extension number.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Call Forwarding-All Calls and Do-Not-Disturb
The System allows you to cancel both Call Forwarding-All Calls and Do-Not-Disturb (DND) for your
own extension in one step.
Operation
To cancel Call Forwarding-All Calls and DND:.
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the CF-All/DND Clear code (default = 7**).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward All/Busy/No-Answer/DND Cancel)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/All Calls)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/Busy)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/No Answer)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/Other)
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF1-0-03: NPDN and PNPDN Call Forwarding Programming Address
Considerations
•
•
•
Calls cannot be forwarded to an extension that already has Call Forwarding or DND activated.
(For example, extension 220 can only forward to extension 225 if 225 is not forwarded.
If forwarding to an outside number, the destination number must be pre-programmed into a
System Speed Dial (SSD) code.
Call Forwarding - Busy and Call Forwarding - No Answer can both be set at the same time.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-17
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
•
You can set Call Forwarding - All Calls while Call Forwarding - No Answer and/or Call
Forwarding - Busy are set. Canceling one mode only affects that mode; however, the other
modes will remain set until canceled individually.
•
An auto camp-on to a busy extension will forward to the Call Forward No Answer destination. A
manual camp-on to a busy extension will not forward.
•
If Call Forwarding No Answer and DND are both set, calls immediately forward to the Call
Forward No Answer destination.
•
You can cancel both Call Forwarding and DND by entering 7 * *.
•
Beginning with Version 3.0 and higher, calls can be forwarded by an extension with an NPDN or
PNPDN if the COS gives permission. See “Directory Numbers” on page 5-39 for more
information.
Call Hold
Description
The System provides the following types of Call Hold or Call Park:
•
System Hold
•
Floating Hold
•
Exclusive Hold
•
Broker’s Hold
•
Station Call Park
System Hold
You can place either an outside or intercom call on System Hold. You can retrieve a call placed on
System Hold from any extension that has a line appearance for the held call.
Operation
To place a call on System Hold:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
• Intercom dial tone
• Hold CO XXX displays (where XXX
= outside line number)
To retrieve a call placed on System Hold from the extension that placed it there:
5-18
Action
Result
1. Press the line key that is flashing green or press the HOLD
key if a non-appearing CO call.
CO XXX displays (where XXX = outside
line number)
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To retrieve a call placed on System Hold from an extension other than the one that put
it there:
Action
1. Press the line key that is flashing red.
Result
CO XXX displays (where XXX = outside
line number)
To retrieve a held call on a specific trunk:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Specified Trunk Answer code (default = *0).
Enter TRK # displays
3. Enter the trunk number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-0-01: Floating Hold on HOLD Key
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Hold Key Operation)
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
N/A
Floating Hold
Floating Hold is a type of System Hold that allows you to retrieve a held call from any extension that
has an FF key assigned to the same Floating Hold orbit where the call is held. You can also retrieve a
call by dialing the Floating Hold orbit number for the held call.
Floating Hold is useful when the intended recipient of a call must be located via a page. The call can
be placed in a Floating Hold “orbit” and that orbit number announced during the page. The paged
party can then pick up the call by dialing the orbit number or by pressing an FF key assigned to that
orbit number.
Note: To place a call on Floating Hold, you should have at least one FF key assigned to a Floating
Hold orbit number (001-576).
Operation
To place a call on Floating Hold:
Action
1. While on a call, press the Floating FF key (system programming required) or press the HOLD key.
576-36-700
Result
• Intercom dial tone
• Hold CO XXX displays (where XXX
= outside line number)
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-19
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To retrieve a call from Floating Hold:
Action
Result
1. (A) Press the FF key assigned to the Floating Hold orbit
number where the call is held.
CO XXX displays if line released (where
XXX = outside line number)
OR...
(A) Enter the Floating Hold Pickup feature access code
(default = *9).
(B) Enter the Floating Hold orbit number 001-576 (CPC288/576), 001-099 or (CPC-288/576)
(See considerations below.)
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-01: Floating Hold on HOLD Key
•
FF1-0-02: Dial Control for Floating Hold Answer.
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF4: FF-Key Feature Assignment
Considerations
•
The number of floating hold orbits available may very depending on the Station Park/Floating
Hold Pickup setting (FF1-0-02-0025). The floating hold pickup access code can be set to *9
(default). The “*9” access code operates as follows:
System Size
Virtual Line Number and Operation
01-09 Floating Hold pick up
10-96: For Station Park Hold pick up purpose
001-099 Floating Hold pick up
100-576: Station Park Hold pick up purpose
96,
Above 96
Exclusive Hold
With Exclusive Hold, only the extension that held the call can retrieve it. Exclusive Hold can be used
to hold CO calls and extension calls.
Operation
To place a call on Exclusive Hold:
Action
1. While on a call, press the CO key used for the call or press
the HOLD key.
5-20
Result
• Intercom dial tone
• Hold CO XXX displays (where XXX
= outside line number)
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To retrieve a call from Exclusive Hold:
Action
1. Press the CO key on which the call is held.
Result
• CO LED stops flashing, remains green
• CO XXX displays if call released
(where XXX = outside line number)
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-01: Exclusive Hold (CO Key)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Hold Key Operation - System vs. Exclusive)
Considerations
•
Intercom calls will be held as Exclusive when placed on hold by pressing the HOLD key.
Broker’s Hold
Broker’s Hold allows you to toggle between the current call and the last held call by pressing the
HOLD key.
Operation
To place a call on Broker’s Hold:
Action
Result
1. Pick up the first call.
2. Press the HOLD key.
First call on hold
3. Pick up the second call.
4. Press the HOLD key.
Second call on hold, first call retrieved
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF3: Broker’s Hold
Considerations
•
In order to use Broker’s Hold with CO calls, the first call must have a possible appearance and
non-appearance, but in the case of appearance, the first call must be one of CO key.
Call Park
You can use the Call Park function to transfer a call, even if you cannot locate the intended recipient
of the call. CO, Extension, and Network calls may be parked.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-21
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
There are two ways for an extension to park a call. One way is to park the call at the receiving
extension and to retrieve the parked call at another extension by dialing the park answer code plus the
parking extension number. The other way is to park the call at another extension and dial the park
transfer answer code at the other extension to retrieve the call. Beginning with Version 3.6, the user
may park the call at another extension by pressing the BLF key. In addition, an Extension Group
Pickup code allows the user to pick up a Transfer Recall (only on non-appearing calls), a Hold Recall,
and a Station Park Recall.
To park a call on this extension:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
• Current call on hold
• CO HOLD #XX displays (where XX =
trunk number)
2. Enter the Call Park Hold access code (default =771) or press
the PARK HOLD key.
Accepted ST-Park displays
3. If necessary, page the party that needs to retrieve the call.
To retrieve a call parked at the originating extension from another extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Call Park Answer/Other Ext. access code
(default 773).
Enter Park EXT # displays
OR...
Enter the Station Call Park/Floating Hold Answer feature
access code (default = *9) (Version 2.0 or higher).
3. Dial the number of the extension that parked the call.
• CO TALK TRK #XX displays (where
XX = line number)
• Connected to parked call
To park a call at another extension:
Action
1. Press the HOLD key.
Result
• Current call on hold
• CO HOLD #XX displays (where XX =
trunk number)
2. Enter the Call Park Transfer access code (default = 774).
Enter TRNS EXT # displays
3. Dial the extension number to receive the parked call,
Park (EXT#) displays on lower display
OR
Press the BLF key
4. If necessary, page the party that needs to retrieve the call.
5-22
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To retrieve a transferred call park:
Action
Result
1. At the extension with the transferred park call, lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter Call Park Answer/Self access code (default = 772).
• CO TALK TRK #XX displays (where
XX = line number)
• Connected to parked call
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1 (System): Extension Park Hold Recall Timer
FF1-0-02: Dial Control for Floating Hold Answer
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
You cannot park more than one call at a time.
Call Park functions can be assigned to FF keys (see “Flexible Function Keys” on page 5-49).
No more than one Call Park Answer key may be assigned to a single telephone.
A Call Park Answer key may not be assigned to the EM/24 or DSS/72 console.
If a call is parked by Call Park key, the LED flashes.
LCD softkeys are also available for Call Park.
Once a call is parked, it cannot be accessed by the CO line key or direct CO access (similar to
exclusive hold).
If two calls are on hold and the last call is parked, the other call is then considered the last held
call. If a transfer is performed, the remaining held call would be the call transferred, not the
parked call.
Depending on the Station Park/Floating Hold Pickup setting (FF1-0-02-0025), the station park/
floating hold pickup code can set to *9 (default), 773. The floating hold pickup code (*9)
operates as follows:
System Size
96
Above 96
Virtual Line Number and Operation
01-09 Floating Hold pick up
10-96: For Station Park Hold pick up purpose
001-099 Floating Hold pick up
100-576: Station Park Hold pick up purpose
Call Pickup
Description
The System allows the following types of call pickup:
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-23
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
•
Extension Group Pickup
•
Extension Direct Pickup
•
Trunk Group Pickup
•
Trunk Direct Pickup
Extension Group Pickup
Extension Group Pickup allows you to pick up a direct ringing call (within your extension pickup
group or in a different pickup group) without having to dial the number of the ringing extension.
Three types of Extension Group Pickup are available:
•
Call Pickup - All Calls: You can pick up a call ringing anywhere within your own extension
group.
•
Call Pickup - External Calls: You can pick up only external calls ringing within your own
extension group.
•
Specified Group Pickup: You can pick up a call ringing to an extension in another extension
group.
Operation
To use Extension Group Pickup - All Calls:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Group Pickup - All Calls code (default
= 701).
Extension number or outside phone number displays
3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
To use Extension Group Pickup - External Calls:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Group Pickup - External Calls code
(default = 702).
Extension number or outside phone number displays
3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
To use Specified Group Pickup:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Specified Group Pickup code (default = 703).
5-24
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Action
Result
3. Enter the number of the call pickup group (01-72) where the
call is ringing.
Extension number or outside phone number displays
4. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-0-02: Intercom Voice Call Pickup
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF5-6: Call Pickup Group Assignment
Considerations
•
•
Extension Group Pickup - 12 / cabinet - maximum 72 group / 6 cabinet configuration
The Call Pickup Group assignments determine the order calls are picked up (i.e. if two calls are
ringing in the call pickup group, the call ringing the first member will be picked up first).
Extension Direct Pickup
Extension Direct Pickup allows you to answer a call to another extension by dialing the number of the
ringing extension.
Operation
To use Extension Direct Pickup:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Direct Call Pickup code (default = 704).
3. Dial the number of the ringing extension.
Extension number or outside phone number displays
4. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-02: Intercom Voice Call Pickup
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
N/A
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-25
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Trunk Group Pickup
Trunk Group Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing to any extension within your own MCO
incoming trunk group.
Operation
To use Trunk Group Pickup:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Trunk Group Pickup code (default = 709).
Extension number or outside phone number displays
3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF5-3: MCO-Inbound Trunk Group
Considerations
•
N/A
Trunk Direct Pickup
Trunk Direct Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing on a specific trunk number.
Operation
To use Trunk Direct Pickup:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Trunk Direct Pickup code (default = *0).
3. Dial the number of the ringing or holding (system) trunk.
Outside number displays
4. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
5-26
FF1-2: Dial Plan
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Considerations
•
Calls in Exclusive Hold cannot be picked up.
Call Transfer
Description
The System allows you to transfer calls to either another extension or to an outside number. The
transferred calls can be either supervised or unsupervised. (You can also use the Camp-on feature to
transfer a call to a busy extension.)
Supervised Transfer
When completing a supervised transfer, the transferring party remains on the line until the third party
answers, then he/she announces the call.
Operation
To supervise the transfer of a call to another extension:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. When the call is answered, inform the third party of the
transfer.
Talk-EXT Name or Number displays
4. Complete the transfer:
• If On-Hook Transfer is enabled for your Extension COS,
replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
• If On-Hook Transfer is disabled, press the PROG key (or
RELEASE key if using DSS/72).
To supervise the transfer of a call to an outside number:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Seize a trunk line and dial the number to which the call is to
be transferred.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-27
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
3. When the call is answered, inform the third party of the
transfer.
Talk-EXT XXX displays (where XXX =
extension)
4. Complete the transfer:
Original call LED light turns red
• If On-Hook Transfer is enabled for your Extension COS,
complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing
the ON/OFF key.
• If On-Hook Transfer is disabled, press the PROG key (or
RELEASE key is using DSS/72).
Unsupervised Transfer
When completing an unsupervised transfer, the transferring party hangs up before the third party
answers.
Operation
To transfer a call to another extension without supervising the transfer:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. Complete the transfer:
• If On-Hook transfer is enabled for your Extension COS,
replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
• If On-Hook is disabled, press the PROG key (or
RELEASE key if using DSS/72).
To transfer a call to an outside number without supervising the transfer:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Press a vacant CO key or enter a trunk access code.
3. Dial the number to which the call is to be transferred.
4. Complete the transfer:
• If On-Hook Transfer is enabled for your Extension COS,
complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing
the ON/OFF key.
• If On-Hook Transfer is disabled, press the PROG key (or
RELEASE key is using DSS/72).
5-28
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension
Operation
To camp a call onto a busy extension:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. If your extension does not have Auto Camp-on activated,
enter the Camp-on (Call Waiting) code (default = 2).
Camp-on tone heard at the called extension
4. Complete the transfer:
• If On-Hook Transfer is enabled for your Extension COS,
complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing
the ON/OFF key
• If On-Hook Transfer is disabled, press the PROG key (or
RELEASE key is using DSS/72).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Onhook Transfer at Ringback)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Onhook Transfer at Talk)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Onhook Transfer at Camp-on)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Trunk-to-trunk On-hook Transfer Restriction)
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
If On-Hook Transfer is not enabled for the transferring party’s Extension Class of Service (COS),
he/she must press the PROG or RELEASE key before hanging up to complete the transfer.
If the call is not answered by the third party before the Transfer Recall Timer expires, the call
will recall to the transferring extension.
Beginning with Version 3.6, a Transfer Recall (only on non-appearing calls) may be answered on
another extension using the Call Pickup feature. However, an incoming Transfer Recall cannot
be picked up during conversation.
If a Transfer Recall is not answered before the Recall Duration Timer expires, the call will revert
to the Attendant group.
If the called party does not exist, the call recalls to the transferring extension.
You cannot transfer a call to an extension that has Do-Not-Disturb (DND) activated.
You can transfer a call to an extension that has Call Forwarding activated. The transferred call
will follow the call forwarding path of the extension it is transferred to. For example, if extension
221 is forwarded to extension 225, calls that are transferred to extension 221 will be forwarded to
extension 225.
Calls can be transferred from paging using supervised transfer.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-29
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
•
If a call is unsupervised transferred to a busy extension, the call will camp on to the busy
extension.
•
To transfer to a outside party, it is best to use supervised transfer. If the trunk-to-trunk on-hook
transfer restriction is enabled, a blind transfer will result in the loss of the second call but the
second call will be kept on hold. If not enabled and the second outside party is busy, the
transferred party will receive busy.
Caller ID Call Log
Description
The Call Log keeps a record of Caller ID calls to individual phones. The Call Log allows you to view
Caller ID calls that have been sent to your phone and, if desired, return a call.
The following table shows maximum number of extensions that may have call logs and the number of
entries.
Table 5-2. Call log maximums
Call Log Maximums
Maximum
Maximum number of extensions with Call Log
20 per cabinet
Number of log entries that can be stored for an extension. (After the call
log fills with 10 entries, each additional entry overwrites the oldest log
entry.)
10
The Call Log stores information for Caller ID calls that ring a phone. If the phone does not ring (for
instance when Call Forward - All Calls is active), there is no entry in the Call Log for that call.
Each Call Log entry includes the following call information:
•
Calling number
•
•
Time and date
Whether the call was answered
•
How the call was routed.
The most recent entries are stored first in the Call Log.
Call Log Operation on a Small Display Key Telephone
Operation
To view the Call Log:
Action
5-30
Result
1. Go off-hook or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Call Log feature code (default = CONF 96).
Phone enters call log mode.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Action
Result
3. Press the following keys to view the call log:
# - Move forward in call log
* - Move back in call log
4. Exit the Call Log by going on hook or by pressing the ON/
OFF key.
Example Caller ID Call Log (Small Display Telephone):
Call Result
08:30 Fri Oct 24
(blank) - Answered
- Calling Party
Hung Up
Time and Date of Call
Calling Number
01:2015553678
- Answered by
Someone Else
Call Log Entry Number (01 - 10)
To outdial from the Call Log:
Action
Result
1. Go off-hook or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Call Log feature code (default = CONF 96).
Phone enters call log mode.
3. Press the following keys to view the call log:
# - Move forward in call log
* - Move back in call log
4. To return a call, (and exit the Call Log)
Press the left EXEC key to access Access MCO 1 (dial 9),
dial add digits (usually “1” - in USA only), and dial the displayed caller ID number.
OR...
Press the right EXEC key to access MCO 1 (dial 9), and
dial the caller ID number.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-31
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To store the Call Log number in a personal speed dial:
Action
Result
1. Go off-hook or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Call Log feature code (default = CONF 96).
Phone enters call log mode.
3. Press the following keys to view the call log:
# - Move forward in call log
* - Move back in call log
4. To store the call log number in a personal speed dial:
Press the PROG key, the speed dial bin number (80-99) and
press the left EXEC key (to dial the add digits, usually an
area code) and press the HOLD key.
OR...
Press the PROG key, the speed dial bin number (80-99) and
press the right EXEC key and press the HOLD key.
Call Log Operation on a Large Display Key Telephone
Operation
To view the Call Log:
Action
Result
1. Go off-hook or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the Call Log feature code (default = CONF 96).
Phone enters call log mode.
3. Press the following keys to view the call log:
# - Move forward in call log
* - Move back in call log
NEXT - View the next 5 calls
PREV - View the previous 5 calls
4. Exit the Call Log by going on hook or by pressing the ON/
OFF key.
5-32
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Example Caller ID Call Log (Large Display Telephone):
Call Log Entry Number (01 - 10)
Call Result
(blank) - Answered
- Calling Party
Hung Up
- Answered by
Someone Else
Time and Date
of Call
08:30 Fri Oct 24
01:2015553678
Calling Number
01:2015553678
02:2015554444
03:2015553456
04:4045554321
05:4045557654
To outdial from the Call Log:
Action
Result
1. Go off-hook or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the Call Log feature code (default = CONF 96).
Phone enters call log mode.
3. Press the following keys to view the call log:
# - Move forward in call log
* - Move back in call log
NEXT - View the next 5 calls
PREV - View the previous 5 calls
4. To return a call, (and exit the Call Log)
Press the Soft key to the left of the desired number to access
MCO 1 (dial 9), dial add digits (usually “1” - in USA only),
and dial the displayed caller ID #.
OR...
Press the Soft key to the right of the desired number to
access MCO 1 (dial 9), and dial the caller ID #.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-33
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To store the Call Log number in a personal speed dial:
Action
Result
1. Go off-hook or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the Call Log feature code (default = CONF 96).
Phone enters call log mode.
3. Press the following keys to view the call log:
# - Move forward in call log
* - Move back in call log
NEXT - View the next 5 calls
PREV - View the previous 5 calls
4. To store the call log number in a personal speed dial:
Press the PROG key, the speed dial bin number (80-99) and
press the left Soft key (to dial the add digits, usually an area
code) and press the HOLD key.
OR...
Press the PROG key, the speed dial bin number (80-99) and
press the right Soft key and press the HOLD key.
Hardware Requirements
•
•
•
Caller ID daughter circuit card on the Loop Start Trunk Card if a Loop Start Trunk receives the
call.
ISDN (PRI-T Point) if ISDN card receives the call.
Large Display Telephone or 44-Series Small Display Telephone.
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-0-01-0021: Caller ID Log Outgoing
FF1-0-01-0022: Caller ID Log Control for Private or Out of Area
FF8-1-10: Set Caller ID Logging Extensions
Considerations
•
•
•
Caller ID is available ISDN PRI.
Caller ID circuit card must be installed and enabled. (See “Caller ID” on page 3-10).
Caller ID is typically 10 digits. If the local calling area requires 7-digit dialing, the call log
outdialing will not operate properly.
Camp-on (Call Waiting)
Description
If you dial a busy extension, you can camp onto that extension and send a Call Waiting signal to the
called party. The called party then needs only to replace the handset and pick it up again to be
automatically connected to the new call. The called party can also press the HOLD key to place the
first call on hold and then answer the waiting call.
5-34
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
The System provides two types of call waiting:
•
Automatic Call Waiting: You do not need to enter a code to send the Call Waiting signal to
the busy extension. You need only to remain on the line.
•
Manual Call Waiting: You must enter a code to send a Call Waiting signal to the busy
extension.
Beginning with CPC version 2.0, you can leave a text message that displays on the busy phone. Any
one of the following messages can be selected. Messages 6 to 9 and 0 have no default message text.
All the messages can be changed through system programming. (See “Set Send Text Messages” on
page 4-23 for more information on setting Send Text Messages).
Table 5-3. Send Text Messages
Message No.
Message Text
Message No.
Message Text
1
Visitor Here
6
User Defined
2
Need Help
7
User Defined
3
Important
8
User Defined
4
Urgent
9
User Defined
5
Emergency
0
User Defined
Also, beginning with CPC version 2.0, the busy party can reply with a text message that displays on
the camping on phone. Any one of the following messages can be selected. Messages 6 to 9 and 0
have no default message text. All the messages can be changed through system programming. (See
“Set Text Message Replies” on page 4-37 for more information on setting Text Message Replies).
Table 5-4. Text Message Replies
Message No.
Message Text
Message No.
Message Text
1
Take A Message
6
User Defined
2
Please Hold
7
User Defined
3
Will Call Back
8
User Defined
4
Transfer
9
User Defined
5
Unavailable
0
User Defined
Operation
To use Automatic Camp-on:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
• Wait XXX displays (where XXX =
extension number/name)
• Called party hears alert tone from the
speaker.
• Calling party hears ringback tone
3. Remain on the line until the called party answers.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-35
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To use Manual Camp-on:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy tone
3. Enter the Camp-on (Call Waiting) code (default = 2).
• Wait XXX displays (where XXX =
extension number/name)
• Called party hears alert tone from the
speaker
• Calling party hears ringback tone
4. Remain on the line until the called party answers.
To leave a text message while camped-on:
Action
Result
1. Press the MSG key.
2. Enter the Send Text Message number (1-9, 0). (See Table 3
on page 5-35 for the send text messages.)
The send text message appears on the
busy telephone display.
To reply to a text message:
Action
Result
1. Press the MSG key.
2. Enter the Reply Text Message number (1-9, 0). See Table 4
on page 5-35 for the text message replies.)
The text message reply appears on the
camped on telephone display.
To answer a Camp-on (Call Waiting) signal:
Action
Result
1. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key again to be connected to the waiting call.
• Current call placed on hold
• Connected to waiting call
OR...
Press the HOLD key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
5-36
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Manual Camp-on Send)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Manual Camp-on Receive)
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
•
•
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3: Extension COS
FF3-0: Auto Camp-on
Considerations
•
You can transfer an outside call to a busy extension using Camp-on. See “Camping a Call Onto a
Busy Extension” on page 5-29.
Manual camp-on to a busy extension will not Call Forward/No Answer.
Automatic camp-on to a busy extension will Call Forward/No Answer.
Calls transferred to a busy extension will Call Forward.
Text message send and text message reply requires display Key Telephones. Also, Text Message
Send and Text Message Reply keys must be programmed on the telephones.
•
•
•
•
Conference Calls
Description
Conference Calls allow you to add another party to an existing conversation. With the standard
system configuration, up to 3 parties can be included in a conference call at any one time. If the
optional Conference Card is installed, additional parties up to a total of 8 can participate in a
conference call.
Any combination of extensions and CO lines can be in the conference as long as the original
extension is in the conference and the total number of parties does not exceed 8. Only one operation is
used to establish and add to a conference. You simply have to place the current call on hold, dial the
next party and press the CONF key. No different operation or access code is required to add
additional parties to the call.
When no optional conference card is installed, the system supports the following types of three-party
conference calls:
•
•
•
3 extensions
2 extensions and 1 CO line
1 extension and 2 CO lines
When the optional 8-party conference card is installed, the system supports any combination of
conference calls, except all outside lines.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-37
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To establish a conference call:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key or the line key of your
current call.
Extension number, outside line number,
or name of held party displays
2. If adding an outside party, press a vacant CO key, or dial a
trunk access code.
• Outside dial tone
3. Dial the number of the party you wish to add to the call.
Dialed number displays
4. Press the CONF key when your call is answered.
CNF1:CO XXX or EXT XXX and
CNF2:CO YYY or EXT YYY displays
(where XXX = first party and YYY = second party)
• CO #XXX displays (where XXX = line
number)
5. To add additional parties, repeat steps 1-4
6. For 3-party Conference Call Only:
To release a conference member, press PROG + 1 to
release conference member 1 or press PROG + 2 to release
conference member 2, etc.
(Available up to 3-party conference. Not
available for 4-party or more conferencing)
Note: The conference member numbers are shown on the
display.
7. To drop out of the conference call, hang up.
(See **Considerations below)
To establish a two-party private conversation from a 3-party conference:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the CONF + 1 (2) to have a private
conversation with the CNF 1 (2) party as shown on the display.
You and the selected party are in a separate conversation from the other conference parties.
2. To reestablish the conference, press the CONF key.
CNF1:CO XXX or EXT XXX and
CNF2:CO YYY or EXT YYY displays
(where XXX = first party and YYY = second party)
To remove a Busy Tone (Hang up) from an 8-party conference:
Action
1. During an conference with more than 3 parties, press
CONF + (n) (where n is the number 1-7 for the conference
parties) to individually select a conference party.
5-38
Result
The other party is placed on hold.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Action
Result
2. If you did not select the conference party that is giving busy
tone, reenter the conference by pressing the CONF key.
CONF Members: X (where X = 4-7
party conference) displays
3. If you selected the conference party that is giving busy tone,
hang up and then go off-hook again and press the CONF
key to reenter the conference call.
CONF Members: Y (where Y = 4-6
party conference) displays
Hardware Requirements
•
A Conference Card (VB-44120) must be installed in the System in order to conference more than
three parties.
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (8-Party Conference)
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
**If all the internal parties hang up, the conference call will be disconnected. If the internal party
remains in the conversation, the conference call remains in progress.
When three parties are conferenced, a built-in 3-party conference circuit is used. If no 3-party
conference circuit is available, a conference cannot be established.
When a fourth party is added, the conference is moved to a conference circuit on the 8-party
conference card. If an 8-party conference circuit is not available, a fourth party cannot be added
to a conference.
Once an 8-party conference circuit is used, it continues to be used as long as the conference
continues.
An 8-party conference card supports up to four 8-party conference circuits. However, the card
must be placed in cabinet slots 1, 5, or 9 to support more than one 8-party conference circuit (and
jumpered accordingly).
Directory Numbers
Description
A Directory Number (DN) allows extension numbers to be used on a key basis. The same DN may be
assigned to multiple keys on the same telephone and to keys on other telephones.
When a telephone’s extension number is assigned to a key on the same telephone, it is considered a
Primary Directory Number (PDN). Up to three appearances of the PDN may be assigned to keys on a
key telephone. This allows for multiple calls on the same DN.
When a DN is assigned to an FF key on another telephone, it is considered a Non-Primary Directory
Number (NPDN). Up to three NPDN appearances of the same DN may be assigned to keys on a
telephone. This allows calls to the DN to appear on multiple telephones. The calls ring in on a
specified basis - immediate, delayed, or no-ring.
A telephone may only have one PDN (on up to three keys) but may have multiple NPDNs with up to
three appearances of any one NPDN.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-39
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
In Version 3.0 and higher, directory numbers may be assigned to stations that are not installed,
provided the cabinet is installed. However, once the directory numbers have been assigned to a
particular slot, that slot is no longer available.
Figure 5-2. Example Directory Number assignments for Extension 200
When a caller originates a call, the call appears on the first available PDN key. If all PDNs are
unavailable, the call will select the EXT LED.
When calls come in to a DN, the call appears on the first available DN key. If the call is to your PDN
and no PDN key is available, the caller hears a busy tone.
Directory numbers may be assigned to FF keys 25-32. These are non-appearing keys.
Intercom voice calls only go to the PDN extension but light the corresponding NPDN keys red. A tone
call follows the appropriate ring status (immediate ring, delayed ring, etc.) for any extension.
5-40
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Operation
To originate a call using a Primary Directory Number:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
The first available PDN key lights.
2. If dialing an outside call, dial the outside line group access
code (9, 81-84).
• Outside dial tone
3. Dial the phone number or extension number.
Dialed number displays
• CO XXX displays (where XXX = line
number)
To receive a call to a Directory Number (PDN or NPDN):
Action
1. If ringing, go off-hook or press the green blinking PDN or
NPDN key.
Result
The PDN or NPDN key lights.
If not ringing, press the red blinking PDN or NPDN key.
To originate a call using a Non-Primary Directory Number:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
The first available PDN key lights.
2. Press the desired NPDN key.
Intercom dial tone
The NPDN key lights.
3. If dialing an outside call, dial the outside line group access
code (9, 81-84).
• Outside dial tone
4. Dial the phone number or extension number.
Dialed number displays
• CO XXX displays (where XXX = line
number)
To receive a call using a Non-Primary Directory Number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the desired NPDN key.
The NPDN key lights.
The call is received.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-41
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To call a Primary Directory Number extension (NPDNs not called):
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
The first available PDN key lights.
2. Dial the Direct Call to PDN access code (default = 766).
3. Dial the extension number.
To transfer a call to the Primary Directory Number extension (NPDNs not called):
Action
1. Place the current call on hold.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the Direct Call to PDN access code (default = 766).
3. Dial the extension number.
Dialed number displays
4. If desired, wait until the PDN Extension answers and introduce the call.
5. Hang up.
To set Call Forwarding All, Busy, or No Answer for a PDN from an NPDN or PNPDN:
Action
1. Press an NPDN (or PNPDN) key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the access code for Call Forwarding (Direct = 721),
(Busy = 722), (No Answer = 723).
3. Dial the Call Forward Destination extension number.
Dialed number displays
Note: FF1-0-03: NPDN and PNPDN Call Forwarding Programming Address
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF4-0-: FF Keys (PDN and NPDN Assignment)
FF1-2-01: Dial Plan (PDN/Extension Numbers)
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
5-42
A DN can be assigned as a member of a hunt group.
DNs are not available for ISDN S-Point, pilot numbers of hunting groups, Voice Mail, ACD, API
and for the Attendant group.
A PDN must be assigned to a telephone before a corresponding NPDN can be used.
TRS Class and ARS Routing is determined on an extension port basis regardless of the DN
accessed.
Busy Override is available to the PDN conversation, but not available to the NPDN conversation.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
•
•
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Do Not Disturb can only be set through the PDN, but cannot be set through the NPDN.
Timed Reminder (Alarm Setting) is set through the PDN, but cannot be set through the NPDN.
Offhook Voice Announce is available to PDN conversation, but not available to the NPDN
conversation.
The appearance of incoming CO calls have the following priority if the keys are set to the same
extension:
• CO/Floating Hold Key
• MCO Key
• DN Key
• Non-Appearance
•
Display Information
Description
Key telephones with a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) reflect the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Day and time (in 12 or 24 hour format)
Callback requests from other extensions
Caller ID information
Extension number
Extension calling party name
Extension called party status
Trunk call duration
Trunk number
Trunk name
Display telephones can also display Personal Speed Dial (PSD) Directories, System Speed Dial (SSD)
Directories, and Extension Directories, along with various other information such as the Set/Cancel
status of different features and callback messages from other extensions.
Caller ID Display Information
Prior to Version 3.0, the telephone would not display Caller ID information for an extension that was
in use when a call was received. In Version 3.0 or higher, Caller ID information is displayed on the
second line of an LCD display when an incoming call is received during conversation. If a second
incoming call is from another extension, the LCD displays the extension name or number. If the
second incoming call is from a CO, the LCD displays the CID information transmitted from the caller.
Caller ID displays the second incoming call as follows:
Figure 5-3. Normal Incoming Caller ID Message (CO Line/Extension)
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-43
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Large-Display Phone
Figure 5-4. Large-Display Main Menu (shown in default idle condition)
You can easily access and use many telephone features by pressing the soft key next to the desired
Main Menu item. These items include:
Personal Dial
Contains PSD numbers. To scroll through the PSD Directory, press the NEXT or PREV buttons
located beneath the display.
•
PSD speed dial numbers must be programmed before they will appear in the speed dial
directory. For information on programming speed dial numbers, see “Speed Dialing” on page
5-81.
System Dial
Contains SSD numbers. To scroll through the SSD Directory, press the NEXT or PREV button
located beneath the display.
•
SSD numbers must be programmed before they will appear in the speed dial directory. For
information on programming speed dial numbers, see “Speed Dialing” on page 5-81.
Extension
Contains the Extension Directory (grouped alphabetically). To scroll through the Extension Directory,
press the NEXT or PREV button located beneath the display.
Function System
Provides easy access to most key telephone features, such as Call Forwarding, Do-Not-Disturb
(DND), Microphone Mute, Background Music, Call Pickup, Account Codes, Message Waiting /
Callback, Headset On/Off, Extension Port confirmation, etc.
To scroll through the list of items, press the NEXT or PREV button located beneath the display.
Function Ext
Allows you to assign frequently used telephone features for easy access. Most items found under
Function System can be assigned to the Function Ext area, in any order you desire. (For additional
information, see Section 400 - Programming.)
5-44
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Large-LCD Display During Idle
The large display telephone may optionally be set to return to a selected idle screen after the user goes
on-hook. If the Large-LCD Display During Idle setting (FF3-0-BSSC-04-11-HOLD) is set to 1
(allow), after moving to the desired menu is displayed, the user may enter ON/OFF PROG ## ON/
OFF to select the menu as the idle menu.
Small-Display Phone
Figure 5-5. Small-Display Menu (shown in default idle condition)
The Mode key and End key on a small-display phone allow you to change the software mode of the
display from Default (i.e., time and date) mode to Directory mode. While in Directory mode, you can
view SSD and PSD Directories and Extension Directories. You can dial a speed dial number or
extension by pressing the soft key next to the desired number. You can also use the soft keys to
execute programmed system features while in the Variable mode.
Notes:
•
The MODE key allows you to switch the display from Default to Directory mode. The END
key allows you to return the display to Default mode.
•
The soft keys allow you to view speed dial and extension directories and to dial a speed dial
number or extension while in the Directory mode.
•
Speed dial numbers must be programmed before they will appear in the speed dial directory.
For information on programming speed dial numbers, see “Speed Dialing” on page 5-81.
•
The “*” and “#” keys are used to scroll through system speed dials, personal speed dials, and
extensions.
Variable Mode
Variable Mode allows you to use the soft keys to access programmed features while your phone is in
the following states:
•
During an intercom call
•
During CO dial tone
•
During a trunk call
•
After dialing a busy extension
Note: Variable Mode features required system programming.
Changing the Display Contrast
You can adjust the display contrast by pressing the # + VOLUME up or down arrow key while the
phone is idle.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-45
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Do-Not-Disturb
Description
You can make an extension unavailable by activating the Do-Not-Disturb (DND) feature. When DND
is activated, calls to that extension receive busy tone.
You can set or cancel DND from either your extension or from an alternate extension.
Operation
To set DND for your own extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Set/Cancel code (default = 720).
DND Accepted
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel DND for your own extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Set/Cancel code (default = 720).
• DND/CD LED light goes off
• DND Cleared displays
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To set DND for another extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Set by Other Phone code (default = 740).
Enter DND EXT # displays
3. Dial the extension number.
DND Set displays on affected extension
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel DND for another extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Cancel by Other Phone code (default = 750).
Enter DND EXT # displays
3. Dial the extension number.
DND Cleared displays
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
5-46
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Manual DND Override Send)
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Forced DND Override)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (DND Set/Clear)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (DND Set/Clear Other)
•
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
Forced DND override is available.
•
DND override function is available by Busy Override code.
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion
Description
Dial Pulse (DP) to Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Signal Conversion allows you to switch from
DP to DTMF signaling when using a DP trunk. For instance, if you dial into a Voice Mail system
using a DP trunk, you can switch to DTMF signaling to communicate with the Voice Mail system.
The System can automatically change DP to DTMF tones based on the incoming and outgoing timers.
Operation
To switch from DP to DTMF dialing:
Action
Result
1. Press the * key or the # key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1: DTMF
FF2: DP to DTMF (Outgoing)
•
FF2: DP to DTMF (Incoming)
Considerations
•
N/A
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-47
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
DSS/72 Console
Description
The DSS/72 console is a 72-key console that can be attached to a key telephone. The 72 keys on the
DSS/72 can be programmed as Direct Station Select (DSS) keys for internal lines.
In addition to providing direct station selection, the DSS keys also provide Busy Lamp Fields (BLFs)
that allow you to monitor the status of other extensions. The LED lights red when the assigned
extension is busy, and lights green when Call Forwarding or Do-Not-Disturb (DND) are activated.
For additional information, see “Flexible Function Keys” on page 5-49.
Hardware Requirements
•
VB-44320
Related Programming
•
FF4: FF Key Assignment
Considerations
•
Pressing a DSS key while connected to an outside line places the line on hold.
•
A maximum of 12 DSS/72 consoles can be connected to a 96-port system.
EM/24 Console
Description
The EM/24 is a 24-key console that can be attached to a key telephone. The 24 keys on the EM/24 can
be programmed as Direct Station Select (DSS) keys for internal lines.
In addition to providing direct station selection, the DSS keys also provide Busy Lamp Fields (BLFs)
that allow you to monitor the status of other extensions. The LED lights red when the assigned
extension is busy and lights green when Call Forwarding or Do-Not-Disturb (DND) are activated.
For additional information, see “Flexible Function Keys” on page 5-49.
Hardware Requirements
•
VB-44310
Related Programming
•
FF4: FF Key Assignment
Considerations
•
5-48
N/A
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Flash
Description
You can send a flash signal on your telephone to release an outside line and then either automatically
reseize the same outside line or switch to extension dial tone status by pressing the FLASH or PROG
key.
Trunk programming determines whether your phone reseizes the outside line or switches to extension
dial tone status.
Note: The following is available for future use only: Alternatively, a extension setting determines
if pressing a CO key will place the call on exclusive hold or send a flash to the trunk.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-1: Flash Timer
•
FF2: Flash Pattern
•
FF2: Flash Key Operation
•
FF3: Flash on PROG (Recall)
•
FF3: Flash on CO key (For Future Use)
Considerations
•
You can send a longer or shorter flash signal, depending on whether you use the FLASH or
PROG key (flash tone lengths are set for the FLASH and PROG keys through system
programming).
Flexible Function Keys
Description
You can assign frequently used functions to programmable keys on key phones, DSS/72 consoles, and
EM/24 consoles. All keys not already assigned as line or speed dialing keys are available for
programming.
You can store either Fixed Feature codes or Flexible Feature codes in an FF key. (The LED of the
Flexible Function [FF] key will not light when digits are stored in the key.) Fixed Feature codes are
hard-coded and cannot be changed. Most features; however, can also be assigned flexible codes
according to the System Dial Plan. This allows the flexible codes to be changed in the dial plan
without having to re-program extensions.
When a flexible code is programmed into an FF key or soft key, the System translates the flexible
code into the fixed code. You can use either the Fixed Feature code or your System’s Flexible Feature
code when programming FF keys. Table 5 on page 5-52 reflects both Fixed Feature codes and the
System defaults for Flexible Feature codes.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-49
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To assign Fixed Feature codes to an FF key:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
F displays
3. Press the FF key to be programmed.
Enter Function# displays
4. Press the REDIAL key.
5. Enter the code to be programmed. (See Table 5 on page 552.)
Programmed code displays
6. Press the HOLD key.
Programmed function name displays
7. Repeat steps 2-6 to program additional keys.
8. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To assign Flexible Feature Codes to an FF key:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
F displays
3. Press the FF key to be programmed.
Enter Function# displays
4. Enter the code to be programmed. (See Table 5 on page 552.)
Programmed code displays
5. Press the HOLD key.
Programmed function name displays
6. Repeat steps 2-5 to program additional keys.
7. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To erase a code stored on an FF key:
Note: You cannot use the following procedure to clear FF keys that have been assigned as CO lines.
CO line keys can only be cleared through system programming.
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
5-50
3. Press the FF key that was programmed.
Programmed code displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
Cleared Function displays
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To check a programmed FF key (Display Phone Only):
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the CONF key.
C displays
3. Press the FF key to be checked.
Programmed data displays
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3: Extension Numbers
FF4: FF Key Assignment
Considerations
•
•
•
•
If a new code is programmed into a key, the previously programmed code is erased.
FF keys assigned as CO lines must be cleared using system programming before new FF
assignments can be made.
The System can be programmed so that MCO 1 Trunk Access calls automatically use Automatic
Route Selection (ARS).
The ANSWER key functions as listed in the table below.
Status
Condition
Operation when ANSWER key is pressed
Idle
No incoming ring
Ignore.
Incoming ring
Monitor ON (speaker) - Auto Answer for incoming ring.
Off-hook signaling
Answer for off-hook signaling. Current conversation will be put on hold automatically.
No off-hook signaling
Ignore.
Off-Hook
Note: When the extension has 1 non-appearing CO on hold and 1 non-appearing CO at talk,
ANSWER key operation is ignored and you can’t put the 2nd non-appearing CO on hold.
•
The RELEASE key functions as listed in the table below.
576-36-700
Status
Condition
Operation when RELEASE key is pressed
Idle
--
Ignore.
Monitor ON
(speaker) or Headset
Mode
Several held calls
Latest held call will be transferred; phone returns
to idle status (Monitor OFF).
No held calls
Current call (talk) will be released; phone returns
to idle status (Monitor OFF).
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-51
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Status
Condition
Operation when RELEASE key is pressed
Handset Off-Hook
Several held calls
Latest held call will be transferred; phone gets
internal dial tone.
No held calls
Current call (talk) will be released; phone gets
internal dial tone.
Table 5-5. Feature access codes for FF key assignments
Default Flexible
Feature Code
+ (additional digits to program into
Fixed Feature Code
Feature Description
key)
5-52
CO Trunk Key
# + (Trunk 1-576)
MCO Key
1 + (Auto-Select Pattern 1-5;
MCO-Incoming Trk Grp 00-99)
Virtual Port Key
Γ9 + (Virtual Port 001-576)
BLF/DSS Outgoing
9 + (Extension 0-9999)
BLF/DSS Immediate Ring
81 + (Extension 0-9999)
BLF Delayed Ring
82 + (Extension 0-9999)
BLF/DSS-No Ring
83+ (Extension 0-9999)
2-Way Box for Cabinet 1
61 + (box no.)
2-Way Box for Cabinet 2
62 + (box no.)
2-Way Box for Cabinet 3
63 + (box no.)
2-Way Box for Cabinet 4
64 + (box no.)
2-Way Box for Cabinet 5
65 + (box no.)
2-Way Box for Cabinet 6
66 + (box no.)
2-Way Retrieve Messages
5 + (box no.)
2-Way Access
Γ#50
2-Way End
Γ#51
2-Way Re-Record
Γ#52
2-Way Pause
Γ#53
2-Way Store
Γ#54
2-Way Add
Γ#55
2-Way Cancel
Γ#56
2-Way Notify
Γ#57
2-Way Copy
Γ#58
2-Way MF Send
Γ#59
ACD-1 Log-In/Out Button
Γ#80
ACD-1 Work Unit
Γ#81 + (Work Unit 00-99)
ACD-1 Unavailable Button
Γ#82
ACD-2 Log-In/Out Button
Γ#85
ACD-2 Work Unit
Γ#86 + (Work Unit 00-99)
ACD-2 Unavailable Button
Γ#87
Speed-Dial Send Button
Γ01 + (SSD or PSD)
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
(if not listed, must use
Fixed Feature Code)
80
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Default Flexible
Feature Code
+ (additional digits to program into
Fixed Feature Code
Feature Description
key)
(if not listed, must use
Fixed Feature Code)
Designated CO Access Button (for
outgoing calls)
Γ02
88
Verified ID Code Send
Γ03
89
Floating Hold Answer
Call Park Pickup (Ver. 2.0 or higher)
Γ04
Γ9
Priority Message-Waiting: Send
Γ05
Γ41
Priority Message-Waiting: Cancel
Γ06
Γ49
Message-Waiting: Cancel
Γ07
Γ5
Message-Waiting: Callback
Γ08
Γ6
Call Forward (All): Set
70 + (Extension 0-9999)
721 + (Extension 0-9999)
Call Forward (All): Clear
Γ09
731 + (Extension 0-9999)
Call Forward (All): Set from
another extension
Γ10
741
Call Forward (All): Clear from
another extension
Γ11
751
Call Forward (No Answer): Set
71 + (Extension 0-9999)
723 + (Extension 0-9999)
Call Forward (No Answer): Clear
Γ12
733 + (Extension 0-9999)
Call Forward (No Answer): Set
from another extension
Γ13
743
Call Forward (No Answer): Clear
from another extension
Γ14
753
Call Forward (Busy): Set
72 + (Extension 0-9999)
722 + (Extension 0-9999)
Call Forward (Busy): Clear
Γ15
732 + (Extension 0-9999)
Call Forward (Busy): Set from
another extension
Γ16
742
Call Forward (Busy): Clear from
another extension
Γ17
752
DND Set/Clear
Γ18
720
DND Set from Attendant
Γ19
740
DND Clear from Attendant
Γ20
750
Γ21
7ΓΓ
Call Forward (All/Busy/No-Answer/
DND): Clear (Prior to Version 2.0)
Call Forward (All/Busy/No-Answer/
DND and Absence Message: Clear
(Version 2.0 or higher)
576-36-700
Alarm Set
Γ22
Γ31
Alarm Clear
Γ23
Γ39
BGM On/Off
Γ24
Γ30
Day 1/Night Toggle (Prior to Ver 2.0)
Day 1/Day 2/ Night Toggle (Ver 2.0 or Γ25
higher)
760
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-53
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Default Flexible
Feature Code
+ (additional digits to program into
Fixed Feature Code
Feature Description
key)
(if not listed, must use
Fixed Feature Code)
Day 2
Γ26
761
Night 1
Γ27
762
Night 2 (for 2-Way VM)
Γ28
763
Paging
Γ29 + (Page Group No.)
# + (Zone No.)
Meet-Me Answer
Γ30
##
Call Pickup Group-All Calls
Γ31
701
Call Pickup Group-CO Calls Only
Γ32
702
Call Pickup Group-designated
(pick up a call in another Pickup
Group)
Γ33 + (Call Pickup Grp 1-99)
703
Direct Call Pickup
73 + (Extension 0-9999)
704
Ext. Directory Name Assignment
Γ34
Γ35
Γ36
Γ37
Γ38
Γ39
Γ40
Γ41
Speed-Dial Directory Name
Assignment
Γ42
CO Trunk Call Pickup
Headset Mode On/Off
Conference Key
Transfer Key
Program Key
Recall - Flash Key
PSD Name Assignment
Message-Waiting Set at Busy Tone
Γ43
Γ44
Γ45
Γ46
Γ47
Γ49
Γ50
Γ51
Message-Waiting Priority Set at Busy
Tone
Γ52
MCO-1 Access (initial setting: 9)
MCO-2 Access (initial setting: 81)
MCO-3 Access (initial setting: 82)
MCO-4 Access (initial setting: 83)
MCO-5 Access (initial setting: 84)
Callback at Busy Tone
Camp-on at Busy Tone
Voice Call/Tone Call Toggle
Γ53
Γ54
Message-Waiting Set at Ringback
Tone
Γ55
Message-Waiting Priority Set at
Ringback Tone
Γ56
Busy Override Set
Trunk Port Confirm
Γ57
Γ59
Γ60
VM Transfer Key 1
74 + (Ext.No. 0-9999)
Account Code Entry
Extension Port Confirm
5-54
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
*0
9
81
82
83
84
8#
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Default Flexible
Feature Code
+ (additional digits to program into
Fixed Feature Code
Feature Description
key)
VM Transfer Key 2
75 + (Ext.No. 0-9999)
Variable Mode
*61
Call Logging Confirmation Mode
Start
*62
(if not listed, must use
Fixed Feature Code)
Station Call Park Hold/Answer
*63
Station Call Park Hold
*64
771
Station Call Park Answer (Own Ext.) *65
772
Station Call Park Answer (Other Ext.) *66
773
Station Call Park Transfer
*67
774
Release Key
*68
Answer Key
*69
OHVA Key
*70
Split Key
*71
Walking TRS Key
*72
ANY Key
*8 + (Up to 4 digits 0 - 9, #, or *)
*72
Note: The following feature keys were added with Version 2.0
Station Lockout Set (Own Ext.)
*#01
746
Station Lockout Set (Other Ext.)
*#02
747
Station Lockout Cancel (Other Ext.)
*#03
748
Walking TRS/Station Lockout
Security Code Change
*#04
749
Callback Cancellatiion
*58
769
Zip Mode On/Off (toggle)
*73
(Version 2.5 or higher)
Direct Call to a PDN Ext.
*74
766
UNA Pickup
*77
705
Absence Message Code
*78
729
Network Flash during Talk on FF-Key *79
576-36-700
PDN #1 Key
01
PDN #2 Key
02
767 (Version 2.5 or
higher)
PDN #3 Key
03
NPDN #1 Key
01 + (Ext No. 0-9999)
NPDN #2 Key
02 + (Ext. No. 0-9999)
NPDN #3 Key
03 + (Ext. No. 0-9999)
ACD-1 Wrap Key
* # 83
(Version 2.5 or higher)
ACD-2 Wrap Key
* # 88
(Version 2.5 or higher)
Text Message Send
* 75 + (Message code no. 0-9)
Text Message Reply
* 76 + (Message code no. 0-9)
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-55
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Default Flexible
Feature Code
+ (additional digits to program into
Fixed Feature Code
Feature Description
Login Key for CTAPI
key)
(if not listed, must use
Fixed Feature Code)
* # 90
(Version 2.5 or higher)
Note: The following feature keys were added with Version 3.0
Message and Voice Mail Key
76 + (Ext. No. 0-9999)
Silent Monitor Key
77 + (Ext. No. 0-9999)
Call Record Key
78 + (Ext. No. 0-9999)
Room Monitoring Set Key
Γ#05
775
Room Monitoring Initiate Key
Γ#06
776
768
Handsfree Answerback
Description
Handsfree Answerback allows you to answer an intercom call without lifting the handset.
The System must be programmed for Voice Calling for you to use this feature. You must press 1
during a call to switch from Tone Calling to Voice Calling.
Operation
To answer calls using Handsfree Answerback:
Action
Result
1. When the intercom call arrives, confirm that the MUTE
LED is off.
(If it is lit, press the MUTE key to turn it off.)
2. Speak into the microphone to answer.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Intercom Calling Type)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Voice Call Send)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Voice Call Receive)
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
5-56
Handsfree Answerback can be used to respond to only voice calls from other extensions - not
tone calls.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Both the called and calling parties must belong to an Extension Class of Service (COS) that
allows Voice Calling.
Handsfree Operation
Description
Handsfree Operation allows you to use all available System features without lifting the handset. Any
speakerphone can be operated handsfree.
Operation
To initiate Handsfree Operation:
Action
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Phone is offhook with access to full range
of calling features
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Headset Operation
Description
Headset Operation allows you to handle calls with a headset instead of with the handset or
speakerphone.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-57
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To answer calls using the Headset Operation:
Note: If Headset mode is already on, the following procedure turns it off. If Headset mode is off,
this procedure turns it on.
Action
1. Pick up the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Enter 90 for Headset mode.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
A headset must be installed.
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-3: Extension COS (Dial Tone Stop)
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
Intercom Dial Tone is enabled/disabled regardless of Headset mode (per programming for the
Extension Class of Service [COS])
Hot Dial Pad
Description
The dial pad on digital key phones can be designated as “hot” on an extension-by-extension basis.
The Hot Dial Pad allows the user to initiate a call without going offhook. Extensions with the Hot
Dial Pad enabled can initiate calls by pressing any of the numeric keys (0-9). The “*” and “#” keys
are not hot.
The Dial Pad can be hot under these conditions:
•
When the extension is idle
•
When the extension is holding a call
•
When the extension is receiving a page.
The Dial Pad cannot be hot under these conditions:
5-58
•
When a call is ringing at the extension (intercom or CO)
•
When the extension is on a call.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Related Programming
•
FF3 0: Hot Dial Pad
Considerations
Paging: The Hot Dial Pad cannot be used to initiate a page.
Hot Line
Description
Hot Line enables you to immediately connect to another preassigned extension or speed dial number
simply by lifting the handset. You do not have to dial any digits.
Operation
To immediately connect to a pre-assigned extension or speed dial number:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Automatically connected to pre-assigned
extension or speed dial number
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF5-5: Hot Line
Considerations
•
N/A
Intercom Calling
Description
The System provides two methods of intercom calling:
•
•
Voice Calling: Extension calls are connected immediately, without a ringing tone.
Tone Calling: A ringing tone is sent to the called extension.
Extension Class of Service (COS) programming determines whether the default for the originating
extension is voice or tone calling. Regardless of the default, you can toggle between voice or tone
calling by entering the Tone-Voice Call feature code. For example, if the extension default is tone
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-59
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
calling, you can make a voice call to another extension by entering the Tone-Voice Call feature access
code.
Operation
To make a call using Intercom Calling:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
3. If your extension is set for tone calling and you want to
make a voice call, enter 1.
• Dialed number displays
• EXT LED lights
OR...
If your extension is set for voice call and you want to make
a tone call, enter 1.
4. Speak when your call is answered.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
EXT LED goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Intercom Calling Type)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Voice Call Send)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Voice Call Receive)
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
The Handsfree Answerback feature can be used to respond to only voice calls from other
extensions - not tone calls.
•
Both the called and calling parties must belong to an Extension COS that allows Voice Calling.
Last Number Redial
Description
Last Number Redial allows you to automatically redial the last number dialed by pressing the
REDIAL key.
5-60
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Operation
To automatically redial the last number dialed:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
OR...
Press a vacant CO key or enter a trunk access code.
Result
• Outside dial tone
• CO XXX displays (where XXX = trunk
number)
2. Press the REDIAL key.
Last number dialed displays
3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Line key LED turns red, then goes off.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Intercom Redialing)
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
Extension Class of Service (COS) determines whether Last Number Redial can be used for both
intercom and CO calls or CO calls only.
Line Appearances
Description
The System provides three types of line appearances
•
Direct Station Select (DSS) / Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Appearances
•
Direct Line (DL) Appearances
•
MCO Line Appearance
DSS/BLF Appearances
When a DSS/BLF key is programmed, it automatically provides one-touch dialing and DSS and BLF
for the assigned extension numbers. If desired, the DSS/BLF key can also provide ring or delayed ring
monitor. For example, you can set extension A as a DSS/BLF ringing key on extension B. When
extension A rings, the LED of the DSS/BLF key on extension B flashes and the phone rings.
Ringing or delayed ringing can be set on extensions which have a BLF key. The LED of the DSS/BLF
key flashes green during ringing and the display shows the BLF extension number.
When extension A is in use, the LED of the DSS/BLF key on extension B lights red. If one extension
has the Call Forwarding or Do-Not-Disturb (DND) feature activated, the DSS/BLF key lights green.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-61
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Four DSS/BLF modes are available as follows:
BLF LED Extension
Indication
Call
Call
Pickup
Ring
Ring
(Immed.) (Delayed)
Voice
Mail
Transfer
DSS/BLF Type
FF Key
Entry
DSS Only (No
Pick Up/No Ring)
(9 + Ext #)
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
DSS/BLF
Immediate Ring
(81 + Ext #)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
DSS/BLF Delayed (82 + Ext #)
Ring
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
DSS/BLF No Ring (83 + Ext #)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Operation
To assign a DSS/BLF key:
Action
Result
1. Press the PROG key.
2. Press the FF key to be assigned the DSS/BLF appearance.
3. Press the Redial key.
4. Enter the code for the desired DSS/BLF mode as follows:
9+ Ext # ---- DSS Mode Only
81+ Ext # --- DSS/BLF Immediate Ring
82 + Ext # -- DSS/BLF Delayed Ring
83 + Ext # -- DSS/BLF No Ring
5. Press the HOLD key.
To make an intercom call using the DSS/BLF key:
Action
Result
1. Press the flashing DSS/BLF key.
To pick up a call on a DSS/BLF key:
Action
Result
1. Go off-hook or press the flashing DSS/BLF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
5-62
N/A
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-02: BLF Call Pickup
•
FF4-0-04: FF Key Assignment
Considerations
•
If several calls arrive at a DSS/BLF key, the calls are queued and ring on a first-in, first-out basis.
•
If a BLF key has a second call while busy and off- hook signaling is enabled, the BLF key starts
blinking. The call can be answered by pressing the BLF key or going on hook and then off hook.
Direct Line Appearances
Direct Line (DL) keys are used to originate and receive calls over specific trunk numbers (DL keys
can be assigned to any trunk number).
The LED for a DL key will flash red on an incoming call even if the CO line is set to ring. If another
extension answers the call, the LED on the telephone will light solid red.
Operation
Operation
To originate a trunk call...
Action
1. Press an idle DL key.
2. The key blinks green as the call is made.
To place a call on Exclusive Trunk Hold (page 133)...
1. Press the DL key.
To place a call on System Trunk Hold (page 133)...
1. Press the HOLD key.
To transfer a call...
1. Press the HOLD key.
2. Dial the destination extension.
3. Press the PROG key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF4: Key Assignment
Considerations
•
N/A
Multi-CO (MCO) Appearances
Description
You can make and receive CO line calls using a Multi-CO (MCO) key. Each extension can have up to
5 MCO keys.
An MCO key can be assigned to any of the pooled trunk groups. Pressing the MCO key is the same as
dialing the MCO Access Code (usually 9, 81-84).
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-63
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
Operation
Action
To originate a trunk call
1. Press an idle MCO key.
The key blinks (green) as the call is made.
To receive a call on an MCO key.
1. If ringing line preference is enabled, go offhook.
If ringing line preference is not enabled, go
off-hook and press the MCO key with the
green flashing LED.
The LED lights solid green.
To place a call on Exclusive Trunk Hold
1. Press the MCO key.
The key flashes green while the call is held.
To place a call on System Trunk Hold
1. Press the HOLD key.
The key flashes green while the call is held.
To transfer a call
1. Press the HOLD key.
2. Dial the destination extension.
3. Press the PROG key (if on-hook transfer is
off) or go on-hook.
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-02: ARS for MCO Access Code 1/Route Advance for MCO Access Code
FF1-3: MCO Group
FF5-2: MCO Outgoing Trunk Assignments
FF5-3: MCO Incoming Trunk Assignments
FF4: FF Key Assignments
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-64
Press the MCO key that flashes red to answer an outside call.
If you are already on a call appearing on an MCO key and you press another MCO key, a line on
the other MCO key is selected and the first call is dropped.
If a CO key is assigned, the CO Key LED will light when that specific trunk is used instead of
the MCO key LED.
There are five groups of outside lines: 9 and 81-84 (default).
MCO keys cannot be assigned on the DSS/72 or the EM/24.
An MCO key must be assigned in programming mode. The MCO key cannot be assigned by the
end user with FF key assignments.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Message Key
Description
The System supports the MSG key on the VB-44225 large-display phone. This key provides the
following functionality:
•
Message Wait Callback: If a callback message has been left by another extension, you can
press the MSG key to place an automatic callback to that extension. If more than one callback
message has been received, pressing the MSG key performs auto-callback in the order
received.
Priority Message Wait Callback (One-Touch Voice Mail Access): You can press the MSG
key to automatically access your voice mailbox. The phone will dial your voice mailbox and
send access codes (if programmed) for retrieving new messages.
•
Operation
To automatically call back an extension that left a message or to access Voice Mail:
Action
1. Press the MSG key.
Result
Automatically call back to extension
OR...
Automatic access to Voice Mail
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF8-1: Voice Mail ID Code
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
The Message lamp lights when a message has been received.
If more than one callback message has been received, pressing the MSG key performs autocallback in the order received.
The MSG key works only when the phone is idle or receiving internal dial tone.
Auto-callback is always enabled for large display phones.
Messages are accessed in a first-in, first-out order for Message Wait, except Priority Message
Wait, which is typically sent by Voice Mail.
Message Waiting/Callback
Description
If you try to call an extension that is busy or does not answer, you can leave a message wait indication
at that extension, requesting a return call.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-65
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To leave a message waiting indication:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
3. While the phone is still ringing, or when you hear the busy
tone, enter the Message Wait Set code (default = 4).
MSG Accepted displays
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
• Message lamp flashes at called extension
• MSG EXT XXX displays (where XXX
= calling extension number) or name
of calling extension displays at called
extension
To answer a message waiting indication (callback):
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Message Wait Callback code (default = *6) or
press the MSG key if using a large-display phone.
OR...
Press the Flexible Function (FF) Key assigned as a Message
Callback Key.
• Telephone automatically dials extension that sent the message waiting indication
• Message lamp goes off when your call
is answered
To cancel a callback message:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Callback Request Cancel code (default = *5) or
press the MSG key if using a large-display phone.
MSG Cleared displays
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Message lamp goes off
Note: Message waiting/callback messages may also be cancelled by either the originator or the
receiver by calling the other party.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
5-66
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Message Wait set/cancel)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Priority Message Wait set/cancel)
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF3: Extension COS
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Considerations
•
The System has priority message waiting for 3rd-party Voice Mail. See “Voice Mail Integration
(Third Party)” on page 3-60.
Mute Function
Description
Mute Function allows you to block outgoing audio to the other party while on a call.
With 44-Series phones, audio can be blocked through both the microphone and the handset. (For
handset mute, an FF key must first be assigned as a MUTE key.)
Operation
To block outgoing audio using the Handset Mute (44-Series phones only):
Action
1. During a handset call, press the MUTE key.
Result
Outgoing audio is blocked through
phone’s handset
2. To turn Mute off, press the MUTE key again.
To block outgoing audio using the Microphone Mute:
Action
1. During a handset call, press the MUTE FF key
Result
Outgoing audio is blocked through
phone’s microphone
2. To turn Mute off, press the MUTE FF key again.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF4: Key Assignment
Considerations
The fixed MUTE key works both for handset mute and microphone mute. But only 44-Series phones
have the fixed MUTE key, so others must assign an FF key as a MUTE key.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-67
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Offhook Monitor
Description
Offhook Monitor lets you put a call on speaker while the handset is offhook. You can still
communicate with the other party via the handset, but you will also be able to hear the other party on
the phone’s speaker. The other party can only hear what is transmitted through your handset however,
because audio is not transmitted through your microphone.
Operation
To put a call on speaker using the Offhook Monitor:
Action
1. During a handset call, press the ON/OFF key.
Result
• Other party is audible through speaker
and handset
• Phone’s microphone is mute
2. To take a caller off speaker (disable Offhook Monitor) but
continue the call via the handset, press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-01: Offhook Monitor
Considerations
•
•
Offhook Monitor is available on 44-Series phones only.
Offhook Monitor can be disabled system-wide.
Offhook Signaling
Description
Offhook Signaling sends a tone to a busy extension to indicate that another CO call has arrived or a
call is camped-on.
5-68
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Operation
After receiving an offhook signal during a call:
Action
1. Press the HOLD key.
Result
First call on hold
2. Press the flashing FF key for the CO line of the incoming
call.
Note: For details about handling multiple calls, see “Call Hold” on page 5-18.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF3: CO Off-Hook Signal.
Considerations
•
The CO call type may be multiple ring, direct, BLF Ring, or camp-on.
•
The System does not send the offhook signal under the following conditions:
•
•
•
•
During a conference call
During an OHVA or Busy override
Data Privacy is enabled
the receiving telephone is a 3rd party voice mail.
Offhook Voice Announce
Description
You can interrupt a busy extension when making an Intercom Call, and then use the Off-Hook Voice
Announce (OHVA) feature to make an announcement that only the called party can hear. You can also
transfer a held call to a busy extension after making the announcement using this feature. The called
party may optionally reply to (answer) an OHVA call.
Beginning with CPC Version 2.0, the busy party can reply to an offhook announcement with a text
message that displays on the announcing phone. Any one of the following messages can be selected.
Messages 6 to 9 and 0 have no default message text. All the messages can be changed through system
programming. (See “Set Text Message Replies” on page 4-37 for more information on setting Text
Message Replies).
Beginning with Version 3.5, the calling party can activate the OHVA feature even when the second
and/or third DN key is available. Depending on how this feature has been programmed, the calling
party hears one of three different tones. Ring-Back Tone or Special Tone is heard when a call is placed
to a “non-Voice Mail assigned” extension. When a call is placed to a “Voice Mail assigned” number,
Ring-Back Tone or Busy Tone may be heard.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-69
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Table 5-6. Text Message Replies
Message No.
Message Text
Message No.
Message Text
1
Take A Message
6
User Defined
2
Please Hold
7
User Defined
3
Will Call Back
8
User Defined
4
Transfer
9
User Defined
5
Unavailable
0
User Defined
Operation
To make an OHVA :
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy signal
3. Enter the OHVA feature access code (default = 8).
• OHVA EXT XXX displays if busy
extension called (where XXX = calling
extension.
• EXT LED flashes
4. Make your announcement
To answer an OHVA:
Action
1. Press the OHVA Split key.
Result
Split key flashes red
Note: You must program an FF key as a split key (default =
*71) to use this feature.
2. To return to the previous call, press the Split key again.
The OHVA originating party receives
Busy signal.
To transfer a call using OHVA:
Action
5-70
Result
1. Press the HOLD key to put the current call on hold.
Current call on hold
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is being transferred.
Busy signal
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Action
Result
3. Enter OHVA feature access code (default = 8) and
announce the call to be transferred.
4. If transfer is:
• Not accepted, retrieve the call by pressing the associated flashing MCO key (if an appearing call) or by
pressing the HOLD key (if a non appearing call).
• Accepted, and On-hook Transfer is enabled for your
extension, replace the handset or press the ON/OFF
key.
If On-hook Transfer is not enabled for your extension,
press the PROG key (or RELEASE key if using DSS/
72).
To reply to off-hook voice announcement with a text message:
Action
Result
1. Press the MSG key.
2. Enter the Reply Text Message number (1-9, 0). See Table 6
on page 5-70 for the text message replies.)
The text message reply appears on the
camped on telephone display.
To answer a call after it has been announced using the OHVA:
Action
1. Replace the handset.
Result
Your extension rings
2. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1 0 03: Extension COS OHVA Originate
•
FF1 0 03: Extension COS OHVA Receive
•
FF3: Extension COS Assignments
•
FF4: FF Key Assignments
Considerations
•
The held call is transferred as soon as the extension sending the OHVA hangs up.
•
If the transferred call is not answered immediately, it will queue for a set time limit, then return to
the extension sending the OHVA by transfer recall timer.
•
You cannot receive a Call Waiting message during an OHVA.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-71
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
•
If a Split key is assigned to the extension that receives an OHVA call, when an OHVA is being
received, the Split key blinks green. If the split key is pressed during an OHVA call to answer,
the Split key lights red. If the split key is pressed again to terminate the OHVA conversation, the
Split key extinguishes.
•
If you make an OHVA to an SLT, the SLT user and the other party will hear the announcement.
•
Text message reply requires Display Key Telephones. Also, a Text Message Reply key must be
programmed on the replying telephone.
One-Touch Keys
Description
You can use one-touch keys to store telephone numbers, speed dial numbers, or feature access codes.
To dial the stored number, you go offhook and press the desired key.
Operation
To program a one-touch key for outside telephone numbers:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the one-touch key to be programmed.
4. Dial the phone number to be stored.
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To assign an System Speed Dial (SSD) numbers to a one-touch key:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the one-touch key to be programmed.
4. Press the AUTO key.
5. Enter the SSD bin number to be programmed.
6. Press the HOLD key.
7. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
5-72
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To chain 2 to 6 SSD numbers to a single one-touch key:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the one-touch key to be programmed.
4. Press the AUTO key.
5. Enter the SSD bin number that contains the first part of the
number to be dialed.
6. If a pause is required, press the REDIAL key
• Pause occurs between access code and
telephone number
• R displays
7. Repeat steps 4-5 (up to 5 more times) for each additional
speed dial number to be chained.
8. Press the HOLD key.
9. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To assign a feature code or extension number to a one-touch key:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the one-touch key to be programmed.
4. If the System is set for MCO Code level, press the following
keys AUTO * #. Otherwise, proceed to step 5.
5. Enter the desired feature code or extension number.
6. Press the HOLD key.
7. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To check a programmed one-touch key:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the CONF key.
C displays
3. Press the one-touch key to be checked.
Programmed data displays
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-73
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Related Programming
•
FF8-1: PSD Numbers
•
FF8-1: PSD Names
Considerations
•
One-touch keys 1-10 are the same as Personal Speed Dial (PSDs) numbers 80-89.
Onhook Dialing
Description
Onhook Dialing is a standard feature for key telephones where you can dial onhook using the dialpad,
one-touch keys, or FF keys.
Operation
To dial onhook:
Action
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Paging
Description
The System allows you to make both internal and external pages and announcements. Internal pages
are made via the System’s key telephone speakers. External pages are made through the speakers of
an external paging system connected to the System.
Paging calls can be answered from any extension using the Meet-Me Answer feature.
5-74
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Operation
To make a page:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Group Paging code (default = #).
3. Enter the number of the desired paging group (0-9).
4. Make your announcement.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Meet-Me Answer
To answer a page using Meet-Me Answer:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Meet Me Answer code (default = ##).
Connected to specified party
Hardware Requirements
•
External relays, amplifier, and speakers are required for external paging.
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-02: Paging Override
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Paging)
FF1-0-04: Trunk COS (Paging)
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF2: Trunk COS
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
You can assign the paging access code to a one-touch or FF key. Beginning with Version 3.5 and
higher, the assigned FF key LED indicates whether the paging system is in use. If the paging
system is not in use when a page is originated, the FF key LED lights solid green on the
originator’s telephone. If someone in the paging group initiates a page, assigned FF key LEDs on
all other telephones will light solid red until the page has been terminated.
If an external paging system has been connected, pages can be made to paging groups 0-9
through the external speakers. Voice paging can also be heard over the extensions in groups 0-9.
An extension can belong to more than one paging group.
Only one page may be performed at a time. If you attempt to make a page while another
extension is paging, you will receive a busy signal unless your system allows Paging Override.
Beginning with Version 3.5 and higher, the paging system can be set to “timeout” if a page is
longer than a specified length of time (0 to 255 seconds). If this feature is set and the timeout
period has elapsed, the page originator’s handset will emit a Fast Busy Tone and the words
“Paging Time Out” will be displayed on the originating telephone’s display.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-75
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Reset Call
Description
If you dial a busy extension, the System allows you to quickly dial another extension by simply
pressing the last digit of the new extension number.
Operation
To use Reset Call to dial another extension (after a busy extension):
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial an extension number.
Busy tone
3. Dial the last digit of the next extension number.
Example: You dial extension 213, but it is busy. To dial extension 214, enter 4.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
The second extension called using the Reset Call feature must have the same number of digits as
the first extension.
Ringing Line Preference
Description
Ringing Line Preference enables an extension to answer a ringing call by simply picking up the
handset or pressing the ON/OFF key.
Operation
To answer a call using Ringing Line Preference:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
5-76
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF3 (Extensions): Ringing Line Preference by Handset.
•
FF3: Ringing Line Preference (ON/OFF)
Considerations
•
If disabled in Extension Programming, you must press the line key or enter the feature code for
incoming pick-up in order to answer a call.
Room Monitoring
Description
This feature allows the user to monitor the sounds in a room from another extension or room. The
transmitter in the telephone handset is used as a remote “microphone” for monitoring these sounds.
To activate this feature, the monitored extension must enable the Room Monitor feature before the
monitoring extension can listen to the sounds in the room. The monitored extension can be enabled
using a SLT, DSLT, or Key Telephone. No special programming is required to allow an extension to
enable the monitored mode.
Operation
To set up the monitored extension:
Action
1. Dial the monitored extension access code (default 775),
OR...
Note: The handset must be off-hook to activate the
Room Monitor feature.
Result
You will hear a confirmation tone after
the monitored extension has enabled the
Room Monitor feature. (If the monitored
extension has an LCD display, a confirmation message will also be shown.)
Press an FF key assigned with the monitored access code
Additional operations may be performed from the monitored extension when it is in monitored mode:
Action
Result
1. Placing the handset back on-hook or pressing ON/OFF
Monitored mode is cancelled. Extension
returns to idle.
2. Pressing digits 0-9, *, #, HOLD, PROG, CONF, AUTO,
MSG, FF Key
No response is given. Extension remains
in monitored mode.
3. Flash
Monitored mode is cancelled. Dial tone is
returned to handset.
Note: When a monitored extension receives a call, the caller hears a busy tone.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-77
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To set up the monitoring extension:
Action
Result
1. Dial the monitoring extension access code (default 776)
and the extension number of the monitored extension, OR...
The monitoring extension enters the monitoring mode. (If the monitored extension
has an LCD display, a confirmation message will also be shown.)
Press an FF key assigned the monitored access code and the
extension number of the monitored extension, OR...
While the handset is on-hook, press an FF key assigned to
the Room Monitor followed by the monitored extension
number.
The monitoring extension will automatically enter the monitoring mode.
The monitoring operation can be allowed or denied by extension COS and is controlled by the Busy
Override feature. If Busy Override is denied and the user attempts to monitor an extension, the user
will hear a fast busy tone.
Additional operations may be performed from the monitoring extension when it is in monitoring
mode:
Action
Result
1. Placing the handset back On Hook or pressing ON/OFF
Monitoring mode is cancelled. Extension
returns to idle.
2. Pressing digits 0-9, *, #, HOLD, PROG, CONF, AUTO,
REDIAL, MSG, FF Key,
No response is given. Extension remains
in monitoring mode.
3. Flash
Monitoring mode is cancelled. Dial tone
is returned to handset.
Services available on the monitoring extension while the Room Monitoring feature is active:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Camp On
Call Back
Message displayed on LCD when extension is busy
Message Waiting On/Off
Cancellation of DND and Call Forwarding by another extension
Busy Transfer
DIL Incoming Call (Queuing)
Services NOT available to either the monitored or monitoring extension when this feature is active:
•
•
•
•
Busy Override
On-Hook VA
The ability to receive a text message
Silent Monitor
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
5-78
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Allow/deny Busy Override Send—Monitoring extension)
FF1-2-02: Dial Plan at DT Pattern 1
FF1-2-03: Dial Plan at DT Pattern 2
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
If the monitored extension is placed on-hook while Room Monitoring is activated, the
monitoring extension will hear a fast busy tone.
If the monitoring extension goes on-hook while Room Monitoring is activated, the monitored
extension will remain in the monitored mode, and can be accessed by any other extension
allowed to access the room monitoring mode.
A room cannot be monitored from more than one extension at a time. If an attempt is made to
monitor an extension while the extension is being monitored, the user will hear a fast busy tone.
ISDN (s-point) extensions cannot access the Room Monitor feature in either the monitor or
monitored modes.
A monitoring extension cannot forward a call on hold to a monitored extension.
A monitored extension cannot receive a transferred call.
If DND is enabled on either the monitoring or monitored extension, DND status is displayed on
the calling extension’s telephone.
If the monitoring or monitored extension has an absence message set, the absence message will
be displayed on the calling extension’s telephone.
Silent Monitor
CAUTION – When using the ACD “Silent Monitor” feature, in some states it is
illegal (or civilly actionable) to monitor telephone communications without
giving prior warning to all participants. These laws do not make the Silent
Monitor feature on a telephone system illegal. Before activating this feature,
please check applicable state and federal laws.
Description
The Silent Monitor feature allows an ACD supervisor to monitor a call between an ACD agent and a
caller without the knowledge of either party. (See CAUTION, above.) If necessary, the ACD
supervisor can initiate a three-way call by barging into the call.
Operation
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-79
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To initiate Silent Monitor:
Action
Result
1. Press ON/OFF + 768 + Extension number you want
to monitor
OR...
Press the FF key assigned as a Silent Monitor Key + Extension number you want to monitor*
OR...
The Silent Monitor feature is active, and
the extension is being monitored. (The
Silent Monitor key flashes green when
Silent Monitor is active.)
Press only the Silent Monitor Key if the FF key has been
preprogrammed to monitor a specific extension number.
You do not need to enter the extension number.
Note: The Silent Monitor key is disabled when the extension assigned to that key is idle, dialing, or
ringing.
Silent Monitor Key Color Definitions
FF Key Color
Definition
Possible Operation
Clear
Cannot monitor
None
Solid Red
Able to monitor
Press Silent Monitor key
Flashing Green
Not monitoring
On-Hook or CONF
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-03: Silent Monitor Initiate (0 = allow, 1 = deny, default = 1)
FF1-0-03: Silent Monitor Receive (0 = allow, 1 = deny, default = 1)
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-80
Be sure all phones that should NOT be allowed to monitor have a COS that restricts monitoring.
Silent Monitor is allowed or denied by setting the appropriate extension COS.
Only one supervisor can initiate Silent Monitor on an individual extension at any
given time.
Display telephones can initiate Silent Monitoring. SLTs cannot initiate Silent Monitoring.
Display telephones and SLTs can be monitored.
A supervisor cannot initiate Silent Monitoring on an extension when that extension is on a
conference call.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Speed Dialing
Description
The System supports the following speed dial features:
•
Personal Speed Dial (PSD)
•
System Speed Dial (SSD)
•
Speed Dial Linking
•
Speed Dial Name Assignment
Personal Speed Dial
You can store frequently called numbers using the PSD feature. Up to 20 PSD numbers can be stored
in PSD bins numbered 80-99.
You can assign up to 10 PSD numbers to the one-touch keys on a non-display or small-display phone,
and up to 20 PSD numbers to the soft keys on a large-display phone. Once the PSD numbers have
been assigned, you dial them by pressing the appropriate key. (For additional information, see “OneTouch Keys” on page 5-72.)
You can also enter a name up to 7 characters for each of the PSD numbers. This allows PSD numbers
to be confirmed by name rather than by number.
Operation
To assign PSD numbers:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. (A) Press the PROG key.
(B) Press the AUTO key.
OR...
(A) Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710).
3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
Enter Spd Dial displays
4. Dial the phone number.
Stored Spd Dial displays
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To dial a PSD number by entering the speed dial bin number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. If necessary, access an outside line.
Outside dial tone
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-81
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
3. Press the AUTO key.
OR...
Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).
4. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
5. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
To check a PSD number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the CONF key.
C displays
3. Press the AUTO key.
4. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
Programmed data displays
5. If you want to check the next PSD number, press the HOLD
key.
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To delete a PSD number:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. (A) Press the PROG key.
(B) Press the AUTO key.
OR...
(A) Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710).
3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
Cleared Spd Dial displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF8-1: PSD Numbers
FF8-1: PSD Names
Considerations
•
5-82
PSD number can be dialed from One-Touch keys. (For additional information, see “One-Touch
Keys” on page 5-72.)
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
•
•
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Storing a new number erases any previously stored data.
If the called party’s number and name are stored in the PSD code, that information appears on the
display when you use the speed dial code.
Speed dial numbers can contain up to 24 characters. The following table reflects which keys to
use.
To indicate. . .
Enter/Press
Shown on Display?
Digit or character
0, 1 - 9, *, #
yes (unless preceded by AUTO * 2 - see ***
below)
Intercom Level *
AUTO * #
no
MCO Code **
AUTO * 0
no
Pause
REDIAL
no
DP - DTMF Code
AUTO * *
no
SSD Code
AUTO
NN(N)
no
Hyphen (-)
PROG
yes
Display Number (Start / Stop) ***
AUTO * 2
DTMF Conversion After the
Other Party Answers
AUTO * 3
(Version 2.5
or higher)
*
Indicates that the digits that follow are either a feature access code or an extension
number. (Not needed if your System is set for Intercom Level.) See Note below.
** Indicates that the digits that follow are for an outside number and the System should
seize the next available trunk when dialing. (Not needed if your System is set for CO
Level.) See Note below.
*** Indicates that the enclosed digits should not be displayed during dialing. Must precede
and follow the digits that you do not want displayed. Example: AUTO *2 555-4143
AUTO *2.
Note: The System has two levels - CO Level and Intercom Level. If set at CO Level (default),
you must enter the code for Intercom Level when programming a feature access code or
extension number for speed dialing. If the System is set at Intercom Level, you must enter the
MCO Code when programming an outside number for speed dialing.
System Speed Dial
You can store frequently called numbers using the SSD feature. Either 80 or 800 SSD numbers can be
programmed, depending on how the System is configured. In an 80 SSD-number system, the SSD
numbers are stored in bins 00-79. In 800 SSD-number systems, the SSD numbers are stored in bins
000-799.
Operation
To assign SSD numbers:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
576-36-700
Result
Intercom dial tone
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-83
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
2. (A) Press the PROG key.
(B) Press the AUTO key.
OR...
(A) Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710).
3. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
Enter Spd Dial displays
4. Dial the phone number.
Stored Spd Dial displays
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To dial an SSD number by entering the speed dial bin number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. If necessary, access an outside line.
Outside dial tone
3. Press the AUTO key.
A displays
OR...
Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).
4. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
5. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
To check an SSD number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the CONF key.
C displays
3. Press the AUTO key.
4. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
Programmed data displays
5. If you want to check the next SSD number, press the HOLD
key.
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
5-84
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To delete an SSD number:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. (A) Press the PROG key.
(B) Press the AUTO key.
OR...
(A) Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710).
3. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
Cleared Spd Dial displays
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-15, 16, & 17: SSD Blocks
•
FF1-0-02: SSD Digits
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (SSD Assignment)
•
FF8-1-02: SSD Number
•
FF8-1-02: SSD Name
Considerations
•
If numbers do not appear on the display when you use SSD codes (00-79 or 000-799), your
extension is not programmed to display that data.
•
The System can be programmed to allow SSD numbers to override toll restrictions.
Speed Dial Linking
You can automatically link together up to 6 SSD numbers in 1 PSD bin to handle telephone numbers
longer than 24 characters. You can then dial the entire number by pressing the programmed PSD key
or by entering the speed dial bin number.
Alternatively, any combination of PSDs and SSDs can be manually linked together by pressing the
keys in the desired sequence. This can be useful for prepending account codes or long distance carrier
access codes, etc.
Note: Before linking multiple SSD numbers to a PSD bin, the SSD bins must already have been
programmed with the appropriate speed dial information.
Operation
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-85
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
To link multiple SSD numbers to a PSD bin:
Action
Result
1. Determine the SSD bin numbers to be linked
2. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
3. (A) Press the PROG key.
(B) Press the AUTO key.
OR...
(A) Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710).
4. Enter the PSD bin number (80-90).
Enter Spd Dial displays
5. Press the AUTO key.
6. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799) that contains
the first part of the number to be dialed.
7. Repeat steps 5-6 up to 5 more times for all additional SSDs
to be dialed.
8. Press the HOLD key when finished.
Stored PSDXXX displays
To use a PSD Key that links multiple SSDs:
Action
Result
1. If necessary, select the trunk group (9, 81-84). (Normally
the trunk is selected by the speed dial numbers.)
2. Press the PSD key.
To manually link speed dial keys together:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. If necessary, access an outside line.
3. If you are using a PSD number, press the one-touch key for
the first part of the number.
If you are using an SSD number, press the AUTO key, then
enter the SSD bin number.
4. Use the one-touch keys or press the AUTO key and enter
the SSD codes to dial the parts of the phone number until it
is completed.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
5-86
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Speed Dial Name Assignments
You can assign names to PSD numbers from a key telephone without entering the programming
mode. If allowed in the Extension Class of Service (COS), you can also assign names to SSD
numbers.
(PSD names can contain a maximum of 7 characters. SSD names can contain a maximum of 16
characters.)
Operation
PSD Names:
To set PSD names using a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the * key.
4. Enter 0 for the PSD Name Assignment mode.
A B C D E F P80 displays (where P80 =
PSD bin 80)
5. Press the VOLUME up or down arrow key to display the
desired PSD bin number.
A B C D E F PXX displays (where PXX
= desired PSD bin number)
6. Enter the extension name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
5-88.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 5-90.)
Note: Press the FLASH key to clear any existing data
7. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See “Example 1. Large-display phone” on page 5-88.
• See “Example 2. Small-display phone” on page 5-90.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
8. Repeat steps 6-7 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired PSD name.
Note: Press the FLASH key to clear the entire entry.
9. Press the HOLD key when finished.
Next PSD bin number displays
10. To enter another speed dial name repeat steps 5-9.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-87
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
SSD Names:
To set SSD names using a large-display or small-display phone:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Press the * key.
4. Enter 1 for the SSD Name Assignment mode.
SSD
NO.=>
SSD
NAME displays
5. Enter the speed dial bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
-SSDXXX
6. Press the HOLD key.
A B C D E F XXX displays (where XXX
= specified SSD bin number)
7. Press the FLASH key to clear the current data.
A B C D E F XXX displays (where XXX
= specified SSD bin number)
8. Enter the speed dial name:
• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next
to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page
5-88.)
• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate
one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 5-90.)
9. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.
• See “Example 1. Large-display phone” on page 5-88.
• See “Example 2. Small-display phone” on page 5-90.
Notes:
• Press the * key to erase a single entry.
• Press the # key to enter a space.
10. Repeat steps 8-9 as many times as necessary to enter the
desired SSD name.
Note: Press the FLASH key to clear the entire entry.
11. Press the HOLD key when finished.
Next SSD bin number displays
12. To enter another speed dial name, press the CONF key
and repeat steps 5-11.
SSD
NO.=>
SSD
NAME displays
Example 1. Large-display phone
To enter D:
a. Press the first soft key on the top left.
5-88
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
b. Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row.
To enter o:
a. Press the third soft key from the top right.
b. Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-89
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Example 2. Small-display phone
Refer to the following diagram to determine which one-touch key to press. (See step 7-8 above.)
abcdef
ghijkl
mnopqr
stuvwx
y z : & / sp
ABCDEF
GHIJKL
MNOPQR
STUVWX
YZ.,’-
To enter D:
a. Press the first one-touch key from the left on the bottom row.
b. Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row.
To enter o:
a. Press the third one-touch key from the left on the top row.
5-90
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
b. Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (User Log-in)
•
FF3: Extension COS
•
FF8-1: SSD & PSD
Considerations
•
The ability to assign SSD names is allowed/restricted to anyone with a COS that allows access to
User Maintenance features. (See Chapter 4 “User Maintenance” of this document.)
Station Lockout
Version 2.0 and higher
Description
Use the Station Lockout feature to limit use of your phone by others when you are away from your
telephone. When the Station Lockout feature is in use, the TRS Class of your telephone is changed.
Anyone using your telephone is limited to the calling abilities defined by this Lockout TRS Class.
In addition, with the appropriate COS, you can set or cancel Station Lockout for other telephones.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-91
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To activate Station Lockout feature:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Lockout feature code (default = 746).
St. Lock Set displays
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Lock displays
To cancel Station Lockout feature:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Lockout feature code (default = 746) .
Enter ID Code displays
3. Enter the Walking TRS/Station Lockout security code.
Cleared St. Lock displays
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
The telephone display returns to the normal display.
To activate Station Lockout feature for another extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Lockout for another extension feature code
(default = 747).
Enter Lock EXT # displays
3. Dial the extension number to activate station lockout.
St. Lock Set displays
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel Station Lockout feature for another extension:
Action
5-92
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Lockout feature code (default = 748).
Enter Lock EXT #displays
3. Enter the extension number to activate station lockout.
Enter ID Code displays
4. Enter the Walking TRS/Station Lockout security code.
Cleared St. Lock displays
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
The telephone display returns to the normal display.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To change the Walking TRS/Station Lockout security code:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Lockout security code change code
(default = 749).
Enter Old ID displays
3. Enter the current Walking TRS/Station Lockout security
code.
Enter New ID displays
4. Enter the new Walking TRS/Station Lockout security code.
Stored ID Code displays
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
The telephone display returns to the normal display.
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Station Lockout Enable/Disable)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Station Lockout for another Extension Enable/Disable)
•
FF1-2-02: Feature Codes (Station Lockout Code)
•
FF1-2-02: Feature Codes (Station Lockout other Extensions Code)
•
FF1-2-02: Feature Codes (Station Lockout Cancel other Extensions Code)
•
FF1-2-02: Feature Codes (Walking TRS/Station Lockout Security Code Changing Code)
•
FF1-0-19: TRS Class Under Station Lockout
•
FF8-1-08: Walking TRS/Station Lockout Security Code
Considerations
•
Walking TRS and Station Lockout use the same security code.
•
You cannot override station lockout using Walking TRS feature.
•
If you enter an incorrect key code and then try to dial, the phone will issue a busy tone.
•
If station lockout is set, the phone is limited to the Station Lockout TRS Class outside calling
abilities. This TRS Class should be carefully selected to only allow the desired call types.
•
Without Walking TRS/Station Lockout Security Code, you cannot set the Station Lockout
feature.
Timed Reminder Call
Description
Your telephone can act as an alarm clock with the Timed Reminder Call feature.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-93
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To set the Timed Reminder Call feature:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Timed Reminder Set code (default = *31).
Enter Alarm hhmm displays
3. Enter the time you want the Timed Reminder Call to sound.
(Enter the time in 24-hour format. For example, 0100 for 1
AM, 1300 for 1 PM).
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Alarm HH:MM displays (where HH =
hour and MM = minutes)
To cancel the Timed Reminder Call feature:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Timed Reminder Cancel code (default = *39).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Time display disappears
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
•
•
An alarm tone (default = 16 seconds) will be issued at the specified time.
An extension can have only one Reminder Call set at a time.
To change the Reminder Call, simply enter a new time.
If the extension is in use when the reminder call is scheduled, the reminder call is issued 3
minutes later.
Trunk Access
Description
The System supports the following ways to seize an idle trunk to make an outside code:
•
•
•
5-94
CO Line Trunk Access
Direct Trunk Access
MCO Line Preference
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
MCO Trunk Access
CO Line Key Trunk Access
You can access an outside line by pressing a CO line key.
Operation
To access an outside line:
Action
1. Press a vacant CO key.
Result
• Outside dial tone
• CO XXX displays (where XXX = line
number)
2. Dial the phone number
Dialed phone number displays
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF4: FF Key Assignment
Considerations
•
N/A
Direct Trunk Access
Extensions can seize a specific trunk for outgoing calls. Extensions can also use Direct Trunk Access
to test trunks or to access data trunks.
Operation
To use Direct Trunk Access:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Enter the Direct Trunk Access code (default = 88).
Dialed number displays
3. Enter the desired trunk number.
• Outside dial tone
• CO XXX displays (where XXX = line
number)
4. Dial the phone number.
Dialed phone number displays
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-95
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Direct Trunk Access)
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
N/A
MCO Line Preference
MCO Line Preference allows you to place an outside call by simply picking up the handset. When you
go offhook, the MCO 1 trunk group is automatically accessed.
Operation
To place a call using MCO Line Preference:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
• Outside dial tone
• CO XXX displays (where XXX = trunk
number)
2. Dial the phone number.
Dialed phone number displays
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1: MCO Trunk Access
•
FF3: MCO
•
FF5-2: MCO Trunk Groups (Outbound)
Considerations
•
You can press the ON/OFF key to get intercom dial tone.
MCO Trunk Access
The System supports up to 5 MCO groups for each MCO tenant group. You can seize an idle trunk
from the MCO trunk group by entering the MCO access code.
Operation
To seize an idle trunk:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
5-96
Result
Intercom dial tone
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Action
Result
2. Enter the trunk access number (9 or 81-84). (See Table 5-7.)
• Outside dial tone
• CO XXX displays (where XXX = trunk
number)
3. Dial the phone number.
Dialed phone number displays
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-3: MCO Access
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF5-2: MCO Trunk Group (Outbound)
•
FF7: ARS/TRS
Considerations
•
The System supports up to 576 outside lines in a six-cabinet configuration. These lines can be
divided into 99 different trunk groups.
•
Each trunk group can support up to 50 outside lines.
•
Each MCO Tenant Group can have up to 5 MCO trunk access codes. System defaults for MCO
trunk access codes are displayed in the following table.
•
MCO1 can have up to 5 trunk groups assigned by the Advanced Trunk Group feature.
•
MCO1 access code is used for Automatic Route Selection (ARS) access code.
Table 5-7. MCO Trunk Access Codes
MCO Group
Trunk Access Code
MCO1
MCO2
MCO3
MCO4
MCO5
9
81
82
83
84
Trunk Queuing
Description
When you try to originate a call by MCO (enter 9) and all outside lines in a trunk group are busy, the
System can call you when a line becomes free. Simply pick up the handset and dial the telephone
number when the Trunk Callback alert tone rings.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-97
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To set Trunk Queuing:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the CO line key or enter a trunk access code.
Busy tone
3. Enter the Callback Request code (default = 3.)
Wait CBK-TRK displays
4. Press the ON/OFF key.
5. Wait for the Trunk Callback alert tone.
To respond to the Trunk Callback alert tone:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
• Outside dial tone
• CO XXX displays (where XXX = line
number
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Trunk Queuing)
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
Response to the Trunk Callback must be within 15 seconds or Trunk Queuing will be canceled.
•
The Trunk Queuing feature may also be used if you hear a busy tone when trying to make a call
using the MCO Trunk Access feature.
Universal Night Answer to Page
Description
During night mode, Universal Night Answer (UNA) sends incoming calls for selected trunks to ring
external paging speakers. UNA calls can be picked up from any extension, provided the extension’s
Class of Service allows UNA answer. Beginning with Version 3.5 and higher, this feature can be
programmed so that incoming calls ring on both external paging speakers and at extensions with CO/
MCO appearances on FF keys (Key Telephones only).
5-98
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To answer a UNA call using the UNA to Page Pickup code:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the UNA to Page Pickup code (default = 705).
Call is received.
To answer a UNA call using the assigned FF key:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Press the assigned FF (UNA) key
Call is received.
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
FF2-0: Trunk Ring Assignments
FF1-2: Dial Plan (UNA Pickup Code)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (UNA Pickup)
FF3: Extension COS
FF3: Extension (External Ring Extension Number)
FF1-0-27: System (UNA Ringing Port by Tenant Group)
FF4-0: FF Keys on Digital Key Telephones
Hardware Requirements
• External paging speakers and associated equipment are not provided; they must be purchased
separately.
Considerations
•
The UNA ringing port can be specified by caller’s tenant group or by the trunk ring assignment.
Variable Mode
Description
Variable Mode allows you to use the soft keys on a display phone to access selected features when
your phone is in the following state:
•
•
•
•
While receiving intercom Dial Tone or during dialing - up to 10 functions
While receiving intercom ringback tone - up to 5 functions
While receiving intercom busy tone - up to 10 functions
While talking in intercom mode, during CO seizure, or during CO talk - up to 5 functions
Each extension may have customized soft key features available. The customization must be
programmed by the dealer.
To access the feature beside the soft key, simply press the associated soft key.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-99
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To enable Variable Mode:
Action
Result
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the Variable Mode FF key
AUTO FNC Mode displays
3. Press the ON/OFF key.
Programmed features display
To Execute a Variable Mode Function:
Action
Result
1. Press the NEXT or PREV keys on the large display telephone or the up or down arrow keys on the small display
telephones until the desired function appears
2. Press the soft key next to the desired function
The variable mode function executes
To cancel Variable Mode:
Action
Result
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the Variable Mode FF key.
AUTO FNC Mode displays
3. Press the ON/OFF key again.
To assign Variable Mode Functions to a Small Display Telephone
Action
Result
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press PROG + 95 + (XX) + Fixed Feature Code (see
Table 5 on page 5-52).
The variable mode function executes
OR...
Press PROG + 95 + (XX) + REDIAL + Flexible Feature
Code (see Table 5 on page 5-52).
Note: Where XX is the Flexible Screen position as listed
below.
3. Press the ON/OFF key.
5-100
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
To assign Variable Mode Functions to a Large Display Telephone
Action
Result
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
2. Using the FUNCTION EXT menu, display the desired
extension function location (see Flexible Screen Positions
below).
3. Press PROG + soft key + Fixed Feature Code (see Table 5
on page 5-52).
OR...
Press PROG + 95 + (XX) + REDIAL + Flexible Feature
Code (see Table 5 on page 5-52).
Note: Where XX is the Flexible Screen position as listed
below.
4. Press the ON/OFF key.
Flexible Screen Positions
Variable Mode Display
Position
Displays at
Position 1 to 10
Intercom Dial Tone/Intercom Dial
Position 11 to 15
Intercom Ringback Tone
Position 16 to 25
Intercom Busy Tone
Position 26 to 30
Talk
Hardware Requirements
•
A 44-Series Display Telephone or or the VB-43225 Large Display Telephone
Related Programming
•
•
FF4-2: Flexible Screens
FF3-0: Variable Modes
Considerations
•
•
The small display telephone will exit variable mode after a variable mode function is executed.
The large display telephone will stay in variable mode after a function is executed.
Voice Recognition
Description
Voice Recognition allows you to dial another extension or a speed dial number using verbal
commands. You can also quickly access various telephone features by voice.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-101
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
Need VB-44224, VB-44101
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
The VB-44224 24-key telephone is required.
You must pre-program the desired calling information into the telephone’s Voice Recognition
Unit in order for the System to recognize the verbal commands.
Volume Control
Description
The System allows you to set different receiving volumes for the handset, speaker, intercom ring tone,
and incoming ring tone.
Operation
To adjust the volume while your phone is in use:
Action
1. Press the VOLUME up or down arrow key:
Result
Intercom dial tone
• During ringing to adjust intercom or incoming ring tone
• During a call to adjust handset or speaker volume
To adjust ringer volume while your phone is idle:
Action
Result
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the PROG key.
3. Enter 9, then 1 to adjust the incoming ring tone.
Pseudo ring tone
OR...
Enter 9, then 2 to adjust the intercom ring tone.
4. Press the VOLUME up or down arrow key to adjust the
loudness of the tone.
5. Press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
5-102
N/A
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Related Programming
•
FF3-0: Ring Volume Control
Considerations
•
Extension programming determines whether or not you can set separate volume levels for CO
incoming ring tone and intercom ring tone.
Walking TRS Class of Service
Walking Toll Restriction Service (TRS) Class of Service (COS) allows an extension user to “carry”
his or her toll restrictions to another phone.
Before the Walking TRS COS feature can be used, a Walking TRS COS code must be entered at your
extension before using dialing privileges at another extension.
Operation
To use a Walking TRS COS code:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key of an extension
other than your own.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Walking TRS COS Access code (default = 87).
3. Dial your extension number.
4. Enter your Walking TRS COS code (0001-9999)
5. Enter a trunk access code (9 or 81-84)
6. Dial the phone number.
Walking TRS COS remains in effect until
you replace the handset.
7. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF8-1-08: Walking TRS COS Code
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
The same Walking TRS COS code can be used on more than one extension.
Walking TRS COS mode is kept until the user goes on-hook.
ARS and TRS dialing privileges follow the Walking TRS COS.
Before entering a new Walking TRS COS code, you must first clear the existing code.
When Walking TRS COS is used, Wxxxx (where xxxx is the user’s extension number) appears
in SMDR.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
5-103
Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features
Section 700 - Operation
Zip Mode
Zip mode automatically answers calls when operating a Key Telephone in headset mode.
Operation
To enter or cancel Zip Mode:
Action
Result
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
2. Press the PROG key and enter 80.
OR...
When entering Zip mode, ZIP Mode On
displays
When cancelling Zip mode, ZIP Mode
Off displays
Press the ZIP key.
3. Press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF4: FF Key Programming
Considerations
•
5-104
Call forward takes precedence over zip mode.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
This chapter describes features that are available with the Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT).
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic
Page
Digital Single Line Telephone
6-3
Absence Message
6-3
Account Codes
Non-Verified Account Codes
6-5
Verified Account Codes
6-6
6-6
Attendant Group Calls
6-7
Auto Repeat Dial
6-8
Background Music
6-9
Busy Override
6-10
Callback Request
6-11
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding-All Calls
6-12
Call Forwarding - Busy
6-13
Call Forwarding - No Answer
6-14
Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb
6-15
6-12
Call Hold
System Hold
6-15
6-16
Floating Hold
6-16
Exclusive Hold
6-17
Broker’s Hold
6-18
Call Park
6-20
Call Pickup
Extension Group Pickup
6-20
Extension Direct Pickup
6-22
Trunk Group Pickup
6-22
Trunk Direct Pickup
6-23
Call Transfer
Supervised Transfer
6-23
6-20
6-23
Unsupervised Transfer
6-24
Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension
6-25
Camp-On (Call Waiting)
6-26
Conference Calls
6-27
Do-Not-Disturb
6-29
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-1
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Topic
6-2
Page
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion
6-30
Flash
6-31
Hot Line
6-32
Intercom Calling
6-32
Last Number Redial
6-33
Message Waiting/Callback
6-34
Offhook Signaling
6-35
Offhook Voice Announce
6-36
Onhook Dialing
6-37
Paging
Meet-Me Answer
6-38
6-38
Reset Call
6-39
Room Monitoring
6-40
Speed Dialing
Personal Speed Dial
6-42
6-42
System Speed Dial
6-44
Speed Dial Linking
6-45
Station Lockout
6-47
Timed Reminder Call
6-49
Trunk Access
Direct Trunk Access
6-50
6-50
MCO Trunk Access
6-50
Trunk Queuing
6-51
Universal Night Answer to Page
6-52
Walking TRS Class of Service
6-53
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Digital Single Line Telephone
Figure 6-1 illustrates the Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT). For more information on DLST, see
Section 751: Key Telephone/DSLT Quick Reference.
Figure 6-1. DSLT
DIGITAL BUSINESS SYSTEM
No.
NAME
No.
NAME
1
1
2 ABC
3 DEF
4 GHI
5 JKL
6 MNO
7 PRS
8 TUV
9WXY
*
0OPER
#
Absence Message
Description
Extension users can leave text messages related to their phones when they are away. When the
unattended extension is dialed, the text message displays on the caller’s phone. Any one of the
following messages can be selected. Messages 5 to 9 have no default message text. All the messages
can be changed through system programming.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-3
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Table 6-1. Absence Messages
Message No.
Message Text Displayed on
Called Party’s Key Telephone
Message No.
Message Text Displayed on
Called Party’s Key Telephone
0
In Meeting
5
Absence_No_5
1
At Lunch
6
Absence_No_6
2
Out of Office
7
Absence_No_7
3
Vacation
8
Absence_No_8
4
Another Office
9
Absence_No_9
Optionally, a return time can be input. Example Return Times for Absence Messages include:
Input
Display
No input
Return
9
Return 9:00
11
Return 11:00
615
Return 6:15
1035
Return 10:35
Operation
To set an Absence Message
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Absence Message code (default = 729).
3. Enter the Absence Message number. (See Table 1.)
4. If desired, enter the 4-digit returning time.
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Replace the handset.
To cancel an Absence Message
Action
1. Lift the handset .
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Absence Message code (default = 729).
3. Press the HOLD key.
4. Replace the handset.
Related Programming
•
6-4
FF1 (System): Extension Class of Service Setting
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
•
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
FF3 (Extension): Extension Class of Service Assignment
FF8 (Maintenance): Absence Messages
Considerations
•
•
•
Calling parties without a display get a busy signal, rather than the Absence Message.
Regardless of setting an Absence Message on a DID/DIL extension, DID/DIL calls are routed
according to the trunk ringing setting.
An absence message may also be cancelled by dialing 7**. This cancels Do Not Disturb and Call
Forwarding-All Calls as well.
Account Codes
Description
You can assign account codes to clients to facilitate billing and to track call dates and times, numbers
called, and outside line numbers used. This information is printed for each account on the System
Message Detail Recording (SMDR) record. In addition, verified account codes may be used to change
the TRS level to allow calls to numbers otherwise restricted.
Account codes may be either forced or unforced (voluntary) and either verified or unverified.
This feature works with SMDR. During a phone call, a station user can silently enter an accounting or
client billing code. The entered Code will display on the phone’s LCD as it’s dialed, so the user can
tell it’s being registered. Then later, the SMDR reports will show the Code dialed for each call, and
even sort the report by these Codes.
There are two different types of account codes: Non-Verified and Verified Account Codes. Prior to
Version 3.6, the maximum amount of account code numbers for both types could range from 1-10
digits. Beginning with Version 3.6, a second mode has been added that allows the user to set the
maximum amount of account code numbers from 1-4 digits. An account code error will occur when
more than the maximum number of digits are entered.
Non-Verified Account Codes
Non-Verified Codes are not checked by the system for validity. Depending on the setting, the user can
enter anything from 1-4 digits or 1-10 digits. Individual phones can be programmed to accept forced
Account Codes (the user must enter a code for every call) or voluntary Account Codes (the user can
enter a code, but doesn’t have to, for each call).
Non-Verified Account Codes can be assigned to incoming and/or outgoing calls. For incoming calls,
the user can enter the Code anytime during the call. For outgoing calls, the user either enters the Code
before accessing an outside line (for forced Codes), or anytime during the call (for voluntary Codes).
Verified Account Codes
Verified Account Codes entered by phone users must match a 4-digit code that has been
preprogrammed into an Account Code Table. Depending on the setting, the user can enter anything
from 1-4 digits or 1-10 digits. These codes can also be either forced or voluntary. You can program
these codes with their own Toll Restriction Service (TRS) Class assignment so that, when entered,
they will override the extension’s TRS Class. Thus, Verified Account Code users can “float” from
phone to phone, placing calls that would normally be restricted on that phone.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-5
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Non-Verified Account Codes
Non-Verified Account codes are voluntary codes. (i.e., You do not have to enter an account code
before making a call.)
You can assign Non-Verified Account codes to both incoming and outgoing calls. To assign an
account code to an outgoing call, you enter the account code before making the call or during the call.
To assign an account code to an incoming call, you enter the account code during the call.
Operation
To enter an account code before making a call:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Account Code feature code (default = 8#).
3. Enter the Account Code (up to 10 digits).
4. Press the # key.
5. Press a vacant CO key or enter a trunk access code.
6. Dial the phone number.
To enter an account code during an outside call:
Action
Result
1. During a call, press the AUTO key.
2. Press the # key.
3. Enter the Account Code (up to 10 digits).
4. Press the # key.
Verified Account Codes
Stations restricted from outside call origination by Toll Restriction Service (TRS) can be allowed to
make outgoing calls by entering a Verified Account code that changes the TRS. After a call is made,
the SMDR record for the call will show the verified account code.
Operation
To make an outside call that requires an account code:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Verified Account ID code (default = 8#).
3. Enter the Account Code (10 digits).
6-6
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Action
Result
4. Press a vacant CO key or enter a trunk access code.
5. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
•
An SMDR printer or external call accounting system is required to collect account code records.
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-19: TRS Class for Forced Account Code
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF3: Forced Account
•
FF3: Verified Account
•
FF8-1-04: Verified Account Codes with TRS Class
Considerations
•
Account codes are not available during conversation recording mode for the Built-In Voice Mail.
•
Even though up to 10 digits may be entered, the system verifies the ID based on the first 4 digits
only.
•
Account codes will be cancelled after using CO queuing.
•
Account Codes interact with TRS as shown in the following table:
Forced or Not Forced
Verified or
Non-Verified
Not Forced
Non-Verified
TRS Class
No Account Entry
Account Entry
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Verified
Forced
Account Code Based TRS
Class
Non-Verified
TRS Class for Forced
Account Code
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Verified
(FF1 0 19 0001)
Account Code Based TRS
Class
Attendant Group Calls
Description
You can call the attendant group from any extension by dialing the designated attendant number.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-7
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To call an attendant group:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the attendant pilot number (default = 0).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF3-0: Extension Number
•
FF5-0: Attendant Hunt Groups
Considerations
•
Up to 20 extensions can be included in an attendant group.
•
The attendant pilot number is flexible.
•
If a member of an attendant group is for a virtual extension, multiple extensions in the attendant
group can be made to ring at once when the virtual number is dialed.
•
Attendant calls are always tone calls (i.e., not voice calls).
Auto Repeat Dial
Description
If you press the REDIAL key while receiving busy tone on an outside call, the System automatically
redials the number. The System continues to redial the number at set intervals until the called number
answers, the caller hangs up, or the maximum of 15 redial attempts is made.
Operation
To use Auto Repeat Dial:
Action
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter a trunk access code.
6-8
3. Dial the phone number.
Busy tone
4. Press the REDIAL key.
System automatically redials number
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Auto Repeat Dial)
FF3: Extension COS Assignment
Considerations
•
N/A
Background Music
Description
If your System is set up to provide Background Music, music can be played from the speakers of idle
telephones. If a call is made to an extension receiving Background Music, the music stops and the
phone rings. Background Music is also interrupted when the phone goes offhook.
The System can also provide Music-on-Hold (MOH) using a separate music source (except with
CPC-HS.) If MOH is provided, callers automatically hear music when they are placed on hold. (For
more information on “MOH”, see page 3-39.)
Operation
To turn Background Music on:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Background Music code (default = *30).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To turn Background Music off:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Background Music code (default = *30).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-9
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
The music source must be purchased separately. It is not provided with the System.
Important: A license may be required from the American Society of Composers, Authors, and Publishers (ASCAP) or similar organizations to transmit radio
or recorded music through the MOH and/or Background Music feature. Panasonic Telecommunication Systems Company, its distributors, and affiliates
assume no liability should users of Panasonic equipment fail to obtain such a
license.
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS
Considerations
•
N/A
Busy Override
Description
Busy Override allows you to break into one another’s outside or intercom calls to relay urgent
information or to create three-party conference calls.
Operation
To use Extension Busy Override:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy tone
3. Enter the Busy Override code (default = 9).
• Alert tone sounds to both extensions
(system programming required)
• Connected to both parties
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
•
6-10
FF1-0-01: Splash Tone (Busy Override)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Manual DND Override Send)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Forced DND Override)
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3: Extension COS
FF3: Data Security
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Considerations
•
•
You cannot break in on three-party conference calls.
The default for the Override Alert Tone is off. If the Override Alert Tone is enabled, the tone will
be sent to both parties when a call is overridden.
Callback Request
Description
If you dial a busy extension, Callback Request enables the System to call you back when that
extension becomes free. When you answer, the System automatically rings the called party again.
Operation
To set a Callback Request:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy tone
3. Enter the Callback Request code (default = 3).
Ringback tone
4. Replace the handset after you hear the ringback tone.
System calls back when called extension
becomes free
To respond to the callback request:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
System automatically redials extension
To cancel a Callback Request:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Callback cancellation code (default = 769).
3. Replace the handset .
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Callback Request Send)
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-11
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Callback Request Receive)
•
FF3: Extension COS
•
FF1-2-03: Dial Plan (Callback Cancel)
Considerations
•
N/A
Call Forwarding
Description
Call Forwarding allows you to send your calls to another extension, to an outside line, or to Voice
Mail. Call Forwarding can be set or canceled under the following conditions from either your own
extension or from an alternate extension:
•
Call Forwarding - All Calls
•
Call Forwarding - Busy
•
Call Forwarding - No Answer
Call Forwarding-All Calls
When Call Forwarding - All Calls is set, all incoming calls to an extension are immediately
forwarded.
Operation
To set Call Forwarding-All Calls:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 721.
• For another extension, enter 741.
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward.
4. Enter the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programed into speed dialing. (For instructions,
see “Speed Dialing” on page 6-42.)
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
6-12
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
To cancel Call Forwarding-All Calls:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 731.
• For another extension, enter 751.
3. If canceling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
extension number.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Call Forwarding - Busy
When Call Forwarding - Busy is set, all incoming calls to a busy extension are forwarded.
Operation
To set Call Forwarding - Busy:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 722.
• For another extension, enter 742.
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you want to forward
4. Enter the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programed into speed dialing. (For instructions,
see “Speed Dialing” on page 6-42.)
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel Call Forwarding - Busy:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
3. For your extension, enter 732.
4. For another extension, enter 752.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-13
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
5. If canceling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
extension number.
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Call Forwarding - No Answer
When Call Forwarding - No Answer is set, a call will ring until the Call Forward - No Answer timer
expires. When the timer expires, the unanswered call is forwarded.
Operation
To set Call Forwarding - No Answer:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 723.
• For another extension, enter 743.
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward
4. Dial the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programed into speed dialing. (For instructions,
see “Speed Dialing” on page 6-42.)
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel Call Forwarding - No Answer:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 733.
• For another extension, enter 753.
3. If canceling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
extension number.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
6-14
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb
The System allows you to set or cancel both Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb (DND) for your
own extension in one step.
To cancel Call Forwarding and DND:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the CF/DND All Clear code (default = 7**).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/All/Busy/No-Answer and DND Cancel)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/All Calls)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/Busy)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/No Answer)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/Other)
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Calls cannot be forwarded to an extension that already has Call Forwarding DND activated.For
example, extension 220 can only forward to extension 225 if 225 is not forwarded.
If forwarding to an outside number, the destination number must be pre-programmed into a
System Speed Dial (SSD) code.
Call Forwarding - Busy and Call Forwarding - No Answer can both be set at the same time.
You can set Call Forwarding - All Calls while Call Forwarding - No Answer and/or Call
Forwarding - Busy are set. Canceling one mode only affects that mode; however, the other
modes will remain set until canceled individually.
An auto camp-on to a busy extension will forward to the Call Forward No Answer destination. A
manual camp-on to a busy extension will not forward.
If Call Forwarding No Answer and DND are both set, calls immediately forward to the Call
Forward No Answer destination.
You can cancel both Call Forwarding and DND by entering 7 * *.
Call Hold
Description
The system provides the following types of Call Hold:
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-15
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
•
•
•
•
•
Section 700 - Operation
System Hold
Floating Hold
Exclusive Hold
Broker’s Hold
Call Park (Station)
System Hold
You can place either an outside or intercom call on System Hold. You can retrieve a call placed on
System Hold from any extension that has a line appearance for the held call.
Operation
To place a call on System Hold:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
To retrieve a call placed on System Hold:
Action
1. Press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
To retrieve a held call on a specific trunk:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Specified Trunk Answer code (default = *0).
3. Enter the trunk number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-0-01: Floating Hold by HOLD Key
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Hold Key Operation)
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
N/A
Floating Hold
Floating Hold is a type of System Hold that allows you to retrieve a held call from any extension by
dialing the Floating Hold orbit number for the held call.
6-16
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Floating Hold is useful when the intended recipient of a call must be located via a page. The call can
be placed in a Floating Hold “orbit” and that orbit number announced during the page. The paged
party can then pick up the call by dialing the orbit number.
Operation
To place a call on Floating Hold:
Action
Result
1. Press the HOLD key.
Intercom dial tone
To retrieve a call from Floating Hold:
Action
Result
1. Enter the Floating Hold Pickup feature access code (default
= *9).
2. Enter the Floating Hold orbit number (001-576 (CPC-288/
576), 01-96 (CPC-96) or 001-099 (CPC-288/576) or 01-09
(CPC-96) (See considerations below.)
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-01: Floating Hold on HOLD Key
•
FF1-0-02: Dial Control for Floating Hold Answer.
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
The number of floating hold orbits available may very depending on the Station Park/Floating
Hold Pickup setting (FF1-0-02-0025). The floating hold pickup access code can set to *9
(default). The “*9” access code operates as follows:
System Size
96
Above 96
Virtual Line Number and Operation
01-09 Floating Hold pick up
10-96: For Station Park Hold pick up purpose
001-099 Floating Hold pick up
100-576: Station Park Hold pick up purpose
Exclusive Hold
With Exclusive Hold, only the extension that held the call can retrieve it. Exclusive Hold can be used
to hold CO calls and extension calls.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-17
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To place a call on Exclusive Hold:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
To retrieve a call from Exclusive Hold:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Hold Key Operation - System vs. Exclusive)
•
FF3-0: Extension COS Assignment
Considerations
•
Intercom calls will be held as Exclusive when placed on hold by pressing the HOLD key.
Broker’s Hold
Broker’s Hold allows you to toggle between the current call and the last held call by pressing the
HOLD key.
Operation
To place a call on Broker’s Hold:
Action
Result
1. Pick up the first call.
2. Press the HOLD key.
First call on hold
3. Pick up the second call.
4. Press the HOLD key.
Second call on hold, first call retrieved
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
6-18
N/A
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Considerations
•
N/A
Call Park
You can use the Call Park function to transfer a call, even if you cannot locate the intended recipient
of the call.
CO, Extension, and Network calls may be parked.
There are two ways for an extension to park a call on the DBS 576. One way is to park the call at the
receiving extension and to retrieve the parked call at another extension by dialing the park answer
code plus the parking extension number. The other way is to park the call at another extension and dial
the park transfer answer code at the other extension to retrieve the call. Beginning with Version 3.6, an
Extension Group Pickup code allows the user to pick up a Transfer Recall (only on non-appearing
calls), a Hold Recall, and a Station Park Recall.
To park a call on this extension:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
• Current call on hold
2. Enter the Call Park Hold access code (default = 771).
3. If necessary, page the party that needs to retrieve the call.
To retrieve a call parked at the originating extension from another extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Call Park Answer/Other Ext. access code (default
= 773).
OR...
Enter the Call Park/Floating Hold Answer feature access
code (default = *9). (Version 2.0 or higher)
3. Dial the number of the extension that parked the call.
• Connected to parked call
To park a call at another extension:
Action
1. Press the HOLD key.
Result
• Current call on hold
•
2. Enter the Call Park Transfer access code (default = 774).
3. Dial the extension number to receive the parked call.
4. If necessary, page the party that needs to retrieve the call.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-19
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To retrieve a transferred call park:
Action
Result
1. At the extension with the transferred park call, lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Call Park Answer/Self access code (default =
772).
• Connected to parked call
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1 (System): Extension Park Hold Recall Timer
FF1-0-02: Dial Control for Floating Hold Answer
Considerations
•
•
•
You cannot park more than one call at a time.
No more than one Call Park Answer key may be assigned to a single telephone.
If two calls are on hold and the last call is parked, the other call is then considered the last held
call. If a transfer is performed, the remaining held call would be the call transferred, not the
parked call.
Call Pickup
Description
The System allows the following types of call pickup:
•
•
•
•
Extension Group Pickup
Extension Direct Pickup
Trunk Group Pickup
Trunk Direct Pickup
Extension Group Pickup
Extension Group Pickup allows you to pick up a direct ringing call (within your extension pickup
group or in a different pickup group) without having to dial the number of the ringing extension.
Three types of Extension Group Pickup are available:
•
•
•
6-20
Call Pickup - All Calls: You can pick up a call ringing anywhere within your own extension
group.
Call Pickup - External Calls: You can pick up only external calls ringing within your own
extension group.
Specified Group Pickup: You can pick up a call ringing to an extension in another extension
group.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Operation
To use Extension Group Pickup - All Calls:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Group Pickup - All Calls code (default
= 701).
3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
To use Extension Group Pickup - External Calls:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Group Pickup - External Calls code
(default = 702).
3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
To use Specified Group Pickup:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Specified Group Pickup code (default = 703).
3. Enter the number of the call pickup group (01-72) where the
call is ringing.
4. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-02: Intercom Voice Call Pickup
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF5-6: Call Pickup Group Assignment
Considerations
•
Extension Group Pickup - 12 / cabinet - maximum 72 group / 6 cabinet configuration
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-21
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Extension Direct Pickup
Extension Direct Pickup allows you to answer a call to another extension by dialing the number of the
ringing extension.
Operation
To use Extension Direct Pickup:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Direct Call Pickup code (default = 704).
3. Dial the number of the ringing extension.
4. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-02: Intercom Voice Call Pickup
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
N/A
Trunk Group Pickup
Trunk Group Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing to any extension within your own MCO
incoming trunk group.
Operation
To use Trunk Group Pickup:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Trunk Group Pickup code (default = 709).
3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
6-22
FF1-3: MCO - Inbound Trunk Group Members
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
•
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
N/A
Trunk Direct Pickup
Trunk Direct Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing on a specific trunk number.
Operation
To use Trunk Direct Pickup:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Trunk Direct Pickup code (default = *0).
3. Dial the number of the ringing or holding (system hold)
trunk.
4. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
Call on exclusive hold cannot be picked up.
Call Transfer
Description
The System allows you to transfer calls to either another extension or to an outside number. The
transferred calls can be either supervised or unsupervised. (You can also use the Camp-on feature to
transfer a call to a busy extension.)
Supervised Transfer
When completing a supervised transfer, the transferring party remains on the line until the third party
answers, then he/she announces the call.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-23
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To supervise the transfer of a call to another extension:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. When the call is answered, inform the third party of the
transfer.
4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing
the ON/OFF key.
To supervise the transfer of a call to an outside number:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Seize a trunk line and dial the number to which the call is to
be transferred.
3. When the call is answered, inform the third party of the
transfer.
4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing
the ON/OFF key.
Unsupervised Transfer
When completing an unsupervised transfer the transferring party hangs up before the third party
answers.
Operation
To transfer a call to another extension without supervising the transfer:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing
the ON/OFF key.
6-24
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
To transfer a call to an outside number without supervising the transfer:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter a trunk access code.
3. Dial the number to which the call is to be transferred.
4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing
the ON/OFF key.
Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension
Operation
To camp a call onto a busy extension:
Action
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. If your extension does not have Auto Camp-On activated,
enter the Camp-On (Call Waiting) code (default = 2).
Camp-on tone heard at called extension
4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing
the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Onhook Transfer at Ringback)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Onhook Transfer at Talk)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Onhook Transfer at Camp-on)
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
On-Hook Transfer is not enabled for the transferring party’s Extension Class of Service (COS),
he/she cannot complete the transfer.
If the call is not answered by the third party before the Transfer Recall Timer expires, the call
will recall to the transferring extension.
If a Transfer Recall is not answered before the Recall Duration Timer expires, the call will revert
to the Attendant group.
If the called party does not exist, the call recalls to the transferring extension.
You cannot transfer a call to an extension that has Do-Not-Disturb (DND) activated.
You can transfer a call to an extension that has Call Forwarding activated. The transferred call
will follow the call forwarding path of the extension it is transferred to. For example, if extension
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-25
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
221 is forwarded to extension 225, calls that are transferred to extension 221 will be forwarded to
extension 225.
Calls can be transferred from paging using supervised transfer.
If a call is unsupervised transferred to a busy extension, the call will camp on to the busy
extension.
To transfer to a outside party, it is best to use supervised transfer. If the trunk-to-trunk on-hook
transfer restriction is enabled, a blind transfer will result in the loss of the second call but the
second call will be kept on hold. If not enabled and the second outside party is busy, the
transferred party will receive busy.
•
•
•
Camp-On (Call Waiting)
Description
If you dial a busy extension, you can camp onto that extension and send a Call Waiting signal to the
called party. The called party then needs only to replace the handset and pick it up again to be
automatically connected to the new call. The called party can also press the HOLD key to place the
first call on hold and then answer the waiting call.
The System provides two types of call waiting:
•
•
Automatic Call Waiting: You do not need to enter a code to send the Call Waiting signal to
the busy extension. You need only to remain on the line.
Manual Call Waiting: You must enter a code to send a Call Waiting signal to the busy
extension.
Operation
To set Automatic Camp-on:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
• Called party hears alert tone
• Calling party hears ringback tone
3. Remain on the line until the called party answers.
To set Manual Camp-on:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy tone
3. Enter the Camp-on (Call Waiting) code (default = 2).
• Called party hears alert tone
• Calling party hears ringback tone
4. Remain on the line until the called party answers.
6-26
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
To answer a Camp-on (Call Waiting) signal:
Action
Result
1. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key again to be connected to the waiting call.
• Current call placed on hold
• Connected to waiting call
OR....
Press the HOLD key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Manual Camp-on Send)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Manual Camp-on Receive)
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3: Extension COS
FF3-0: Auto Camp-on
Considerations
•
You can transfer an outside call to a busy extension using Camp-on. See “Camping a Call Onto a
Busy Extension” on page 6-25.
Conference Calls
Description
Conference Calls allow you to add another party to an existing conversation. With the standard
system configuration, up to 3 parties can be included in a conference call at any one time. If the
optional Conference Card is installed, additional parties up to a total of 8 can participate in a
conference call.
Any combination of extensions and CO lines can be in the conference as long as the original
extension is in the conference and the total number of parties does not exceed 8. Only one operation is
used to establish and add to a conference. You simply have to place the current call on hold, dial the
next party and press the CONF key. No different operation or access code is required to add
additional parties to the call.
When no optional conference card is installed, the system supports the following types of three-party
conference calls:
•
•
•
3 extensions
2 extensions and 1 CO line
1 extension and 2 CO lines
When the optional 8-party conference card is installed, the System supports any combination of
conference calls, except all outside lines.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-27
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To establish a conference call:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key or the line key of your
current call.
2. If adding an outside party, dial a trunk access code.
• Outside dial tone
3. Dial the number of the party you wish to add to the call.
4. Press the CONF key when your call is answered.
5. To add additional parties, repeat steps 1-4
6. To drop out of the conference call, hang up.
To establish a two-party private conversation from a 3-party conference (Version 2.5
or higher and higher):
Action
1. While on a call, press CONF + 1 (2) to have a private conversation with the CNF 1 (2) party.
Result
You and the selected party are in a separate conversation from the other conference parties.
2. To reestablish the conference, press the CONF key.
To remove a Busy Tone (Hang up) from an 8-party conference (Version 2.5 or higher):
Action
1. During an conference with more than 3 parties, press
CONF + (n) (where n is the number 1-8 for the conference
parties) to individually select a conference party.
Result
The other party is placed on hold.
2. If you did not select the conference party that is giving busy
tone, re-enter the conference by pressing the CONF key.
3. If you selected the conference party that is giving busy tone,
hang up and then go off-hook again and press the CONF
key to re-enter the conference call.
Hardware Requirements
•
A Conference Card (VB-44120) must be installed in the System in order to conference more than
three parties.
Related Programming
6-28
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (8-Party Conference)
•
FF3: Extension COS
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Considerations
•
If all the internal parties hang up, the conference call will be disconnected. If the internal party
remains in the conversation, the conference call remains in progress.
•
When three parties are conferenced, a built-in 3-party conference circuit is used. If no 3-party
conference circuit is available, a conference cannot be established.
•
When a fourth party is added, the conference is moved to a conference circuit on the 8-party
conference card. If an 8-party conference circuit is not available, a fourth party cannot be added
to a conference.
•
Once an 8-party conference circuit is used, it continues to be used as long as the conference
continues.
•
An 8-party conference card supports up to four 8-party conference circuits. However, the card
must be placed in cabinet slots 1, 5, or 9 to support more than one 8-party conference circuit (and
jumpered accordingly).
Do-Not-Disturb
Description
You can make an extension unavailable by activating the Do-Not-Disturb (DND) feature. When DND
is activated, calls to that extension receive busy tone.
You can set or cancel DND from either your extension or from an alternate extension.
Operation
To set DND for your own extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Set/Cancel code (default = 720).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel DND for your own extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Set/Cancel code (default = 720).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-29
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To set DND for another extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Set by Other Phone code (default = 740).
3. Dial the extension number.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel DND for another extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Cancel by Other Phone code (default = 750).
3. Dial the extension number.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Manual DND Override Send)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Forced DND Override)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (DND Set/Clear)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (DND Set/Clear Other)
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
•
Forced DND override is available.
DND override function is available by Busy Override code.
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion
Description
Dial Pulse (DP) to Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Signal Conversion allows you to switch from
DP to DTMF signaling when using a DP trunk. For instance, if you dial into a Voice Mail system
using a DP trunk, you can switch to DTMF signaling to communicate with the Voice Mail system.
(The System can automatically change DP to DTMF tones based on the incoming and outgoing
timers).
6-30
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Operation
To switch from DP to DTMF dialing:
Action
Result
1. Press the * key or the # key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1: DTMF
•
FF2: DP to DTMF (Outgoing)
•
FF2: DP to DTMF (Incoming)
Considerations
•
N/A
Flash
Description
You can send a flash signal on your telephone to release an outside line and then either automatically
reseize the same outside line or switch to extension dial tone status by pressing the FLASH key.
Trunk programming determines whether your phone reseizes the outside line or switches to extension
dial tone status.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-1: Flash Timer
•
FF2: Flash Pattern
•
FF2: Flash Key Operation
•
FF3: Flash on PROG (Recall)
Considerations
•
N/A
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-31
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hot Line
Description
Hot Line enables you to immediately connect to another pre-assigned extension or speed dial number
simply by lifting the handset. You do not have to dial any digits.
Operation
To immediately connect to a pre-assigned extension or speed dial number:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Automatically connected to pre-assigned
extension or speed dial number
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF5-5: Hot Line
Considerations
•
N/A
Intercom Calling
Description
The System provides two methods of intercom calling:
•
•
Voice Calling: Extension calls are connected immediately, without a ringing tone.
Tone Calling: A ringing tone is sent to the called extension.
Extension Class of Service (COS) programming determines whether the default for the originating
extension is voice or tone calling. Regardless of the default, you can toggle between voice or tone
calling by entering the Tone-Voice Call feature code. For example, if the extension default is tone
calling, you can make a voice call to another extension by entering the Tone-Voice Call feature access
code.
6-32
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Operation
To make a call using Intercom Calling:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
3. If your extension is set for tone calling and you want to
make a voice call, enter 1.
Or, if your extension is set for voice call and you want to
make a tone call, enter 1.
4. Speak when your call is answered
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Intercom Calling Type)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Voice Call Send)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Voice Call Receive)
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
•
Both the called and calling parties must belong to an Extension COS that allows Voice Calling.
You cannot change from voice call to tone call.
Last Number Redial
Description
Last Number Redial allows you to automatically redial the last number dialed by pressing the
REDIAL key.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-33
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To automatically redial the last number dialed:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
OR...
Result
Outside dial tone (if trunk access code
entered)
Enter a trunk access code.
2. Press the REDIAL key.
3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Intercom Redialing)
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
Extension Class of Service (COS) determines whether Last Number Redial can be used for both
intercom and CO calls, or CO calls only.
Message Waiting/Callback
Description
If you try to call an extension that is busy or does not answer, you can leave a message wait indication
at that extension, requesting a return call.
Operation
To leave a message waiting indication:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Ring or busy tone
3. While the telephone is still ringing, or when you hear the
busy tone, enter the Message Wait Set code (default = 4).
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
6-34
Message lamp flashes at called extension
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
To answer a message waiting indication (callback):
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Message Wait Callback code (default = *6).
• Telephone automatically dials extension that sent message waiting indication
• Message lamp goes off when your call
is answered
To cancel a Callback Message:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Callback Request Cancel code (default = *5).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Message lamp goes off
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Message Wait set/Cancel)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Priority Message Wait set/Cancel)
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
The System has priority message waiting for 3rd-party Voice Mail. See “Voice Mail Integration
(Third Party)” on page 3-60.
Offhook Signaling
Description
Offhook Signaling sends a tone to a busy extension to indicate that another CO call has arrived or a
call is camped on.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-35
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
After receiving an offhook signal during a call:
Action
Result
1. Press the HOLD key.
2. Press the flashing FF key for the CO line of the incoming
call.
Note: For details about handling multiple calls, see “Call Hold” on page 6-15.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF3: CO Off-Hook Signal.
Considerations
•
•
The CO call type may be either multiple ring, direct, or camp-on.
The system does not send the offhook signal under the following conditions:
• During a conference call
• During an OHVA or Busy override
• Data Privacy is enabled
• the receiving telephone is a 3rd party voice mail.
Offhook Voice Announce
Description
You can interrupt a busy extension when making an Intercom Call, and then use the Off-Hook Voice
Announce (OHVA) feature to make an announcement that only the called party can hear. You can
also transfer a held call to a busy extension after making the announcement using this feature.
Operation
To make an OHVA:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy signal
3. Enter the OHVA feature access code (default = 8).
4. Make your announcement
6-36
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
To transfer a call using OHVA:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.
Current call on hold
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is being transferred.
Busy signal
3. Enter OHVA feature access code (default = 8) and announce
the call to be transferred.
4. If transfer is: not accepted, press the FLASH key.
Transfer canceled
5. Replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
FF1 0 03 (System): Extension COS OHVA Originate
FF1 0 03 (System): Extension COS OHVA Receive
FF3 (Extension): Extension COS Assignments
FF4: FF Key Assignments
Considerations
•
•
•
•
If Onhook Transfer is enabled, the held call is transferred as soon as the extension sending the
OHVA hangs up.
If the transferred call is not answered immediately, it will queue for a set time limit, then return
to the extension sending the OHVA by Transfer Recall Timer.
You cannot receive a Call Waiting message during an OHVA.
If you make an OHVA to an SLT, the SLT user and the other party will hear the announcement.
Onhook Dialing
Description
Onhook Dialing allows users to dial without lifting the handset. However, the Digital Single Line
Telephone (DSLT) does not have a microphone so you must lift the handset to talk.
Operation
To use onhook dialing:
Action
1. Press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter a trunk access code, or dial an extension number.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-37
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
3. If you entered a trunk access code in step 2, dial the phone
number. Otherwise, proceed to step 4.
4. When the call is answered, lift the handset to talk.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
N/A
Paging
Description
The System allows you to make both internal and external pages and announcements. Internal pages
are made via the System’s key telephone speakers. External pages are made through the speakers of
an external paging system connected to the System.
Paging calls can be answered from any extension using the Meet-Me Answer feature.
Operation
To make a page:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Group Paging code (default = #).
3. Enter the number of the desired paging group (0-9).
4. Make your announcement.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Meet-Me Answer
To answer a page using Meet-Me Answer:
Action
6-38
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Meet Me Answer code (default = ##).
Connected to specified party
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Hardware Requirements
•
External relays, amplifier, and speakers are required for external paging.
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-02: Paging Override
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Paging)
FF1-0-04: Trunk COS (Paging)
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF2: Trunk COS
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
•
•
•
If an external paging system has been connected, pages can be made to paging groups 0-9
through the external speakers. Voice paging can also be heard over the extensions in groups 0-9.
An extension can belong to more than one paging group.
Only one page may be performed at a time. If you attempt to make a page while another
extension is paging, you will receive a busy signal.
Beginning with Version 3.5 and higher, the paging system can be set to “timeout” if a page
remains unanswered for a specified length of time (0 to 255 seconds). If this feature is set and the
timeout period has elapsed, the page originator’s handset will emit a Fast Busy Tone.
Reset Call
Description
If you dial a busy extension, the System allows you to quickly dial another extension by simply
pressing the last digit of the new extension number.
Operation
To use Reset Call to dial another extension (after a busy extension):
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial an extension number.
Busy tone
3. Dial the last digit of the next extension number.
Example: You dial extension 213, but it is busy. To dial extension 214, enter 4.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-39
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
•
Section 700 - Operation
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
The second extension called using the Reset Call feature must have the same number of digits as
the first extension.
•
If you program the System for Reset Call, the following features are not available: Camp-on
(Ext. no. + 2), Callback Request (Ext. no. + 3), Message Waiting (Ext. no. + 4, Ext. no. + 5),
Intercom Busy Override (Ext. no. + 9).
Room Monitoring
Description
This feature allows the user to monitor the sounds in a room from another extension or room. The
transmitter in the telephone handset is used as a remote “microphone” for monitoring these sounds.
To activate this feature, the monitored extension must enable the Room Monitor feature before the
monitoring extension can listen to the sounds in the room. The monitored extension can be enabled
using an SLT, DSLT, or Key Telephone. No special programming is required to allow an extension to
enable the monitored mode.
Operation
To set up the monitored extension:
Action
1. Dial the monitored extension access code (default 775),
OR...
Note: The handset must be off-hook to activate the
Room Monitor feature.
Result
You will hear a confirmation tone after
the monitored extension has enabled the
Room Monitor feature. (If the monitored
extension has an LCD display, a confirmation message will also be shown.)
Press an FF key assigned with the monitored access code
When a monitored extension receives a call, the caller hears a busy tone. Additional operations may
be performed from the monitored extension when it is in monitored mode:
Action
6-40
Result
1. Placing the handset back On Hook or pressing ON/OFF
Monitored mode is cancelled. Extension
returns to idle.
2. Pressing digits 0-9, *, #, HOLD, PROG, CONF, AUTO,
REDIAL, MSG, FF Key,
No response is given. Extension remains
in monitored mode.
3. Flash
Monitored mode is cancelled. Dial tone is
returned to handset.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
To set up the monitoring extension:
Action
Result
1. Dial the monitoring extension access code (default 776)
and the extension number of the monitored extension, OR...
The monitoring extension enters the monitoring mode. (If the monitored extension
has an LCD display, a confirmation message will also be shown.)
Press an FF key assigned the monitored access code and the
extension number of the monitored extension, OR...
While the handset is on-hook, press an FF key assigned to
the Room Monitor followed by the monitored extension
number.
The monitoring extension will automatically enter the monitoring mode.
The monitoring operation can be allowed or denied by extension COS and is controlled by the Busy
Override feature. If Busy Override is denied and the user attempts to monitor an extension, the user
will hear a fast busy tone.
Additional operations may be performed from the monitoring extension when it is in monitoring
mode:
Action
Result
1. Placing the handset back On Hook or pressing ON/OFF
Monitoring mode is cancelled. Extension
returns to idle.
2. Pressing digits 0-9, *, #, HOLD, PROG, CONF, AUTO,
MSG, FF Key
No response is given. Extension remains
in monitoring mode.
3. Flash
Monitoring mode is cancelled. Dial tone
is returned to handset.
Services available on the monitoring extension while the Room Monitoring feature is active:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Camp On
Call Back
Message displayed on LCD when extension is busy
Message Waiting On/Off
Cancellation of DND and Call Forwarding by another extension
Busy Transfer
DIL Incoming Call (Queuing)
Services NOT available to either the monitored or monitoring extension when this feature is active:
•
•
•
•
Busy Override
On-Hook VA
The ability to receive a text message
Silent Monitor
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Allow/deny Busy Override Send—Monitoring extension)
FF1-2-02: Dial Plan at DT Pattern 1
FF1-2-03: Dial Plan at DT Pattern 2
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-41
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Considerations
•
•
Be sure all phones that should NOT be allowed to monitor have a COS that restricts monitoring.
If the monitored extension is placed on-hook while Room Monitoring is activated, the
monitoring extension will hear a fast busy tone.
If the monitoring extension goes on-hook while Room Monitoring is activated, the monitored
extension will remain in the monitored mode, and can be accessed by any other extension
allowed to access the room monitoring mode.
A room cannot be monitored from more than one extension at a time. If an attempt is made to
monitor an extension while the extension is being monitored, the user will hear a fast busy tone.
ISDN (s-point) extensions cannot access the Room Monitor feature in either the monitor or
monitored modes.
A monitoring extension cannot forward a call on hold to a monitored extension.
A monitored extension cannot receive a transferred call.
If DND is enabled on either the monitoring or monitored extension, DND status is displayed on
the calling extension’s telephone.
If the monitoring or monitored extension has an absence message set, the absence message will
be displayed on the calling extension’s telephone.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Speed Dialing
Description
The System supports the following speed dial features:
•
•
•
•
Personal Speed Dial (PSD)
System Speed Dial (SSD)
Speed Dial Linking
Speed Dial Name Assignment
Personal Speed Dial
You can store frequently called numbers using the PSD feature. Up to 20 PSD numbers can be stored
in PSD bins numbered 80-99.
Operation
To assign PSD numbers:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2.
Result
Intercom dial tone
Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710).
3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
4. Dial the phone number.
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
6-42
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
To dial a PSD number by entering the speed dial bin number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. If necessary, access an outside line.
Outside dial tone
3. Press the AUTO key.
OR...
Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).
4. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
5. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/
OFF key.
To delete a PSD number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2.
Intercom dial tone
Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710).
3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF8-1: PSD Numbers
•
FF8-1: PSD Names
Considerations
•
Storing a new number erases any previously stored data.
•
Speed Dial numbers can contain up to 24 characters. The following table reflects which keys to
use.
To indicate . . .
576-36-700
Enter/Press
Digit or character
0, 1 - 9, *, #
Intercom Level *
AUTO * #
MCO Code **
AUTO * 0
Pause
REDIAL
DP - DTMF Code
AUTO * *
SSD Code
AUTO NN(N)
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-43
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To indicate . . .
Enter/Press
Hyphen (-)
PROG
DTMF Conversion After the
Other Party Answers
AUTO * 3
(Version 2.1 or
higher)
*
Indicates that the digits that follow are either a feature access code or an extension
number. (Not needed if your System is set for Intercom Level.) See Note below.
** Indicates that the digits that follow are for an outside number and the System should
seize the next available trunk when dialing. (Not needed if your System is set for CO
Level.) See Note below.
Note:
The System has two levels - CO Level and Intercom Level. If set at CO Level
(default), you must enter the code for Intercom Level when programming a feature access
code or extension number for speed dialing. If the System is set at Intercom Level, you must
enter the MCO Code when programming an outside number for speed dialing.
System Speed Dial
You can store frequently called numbers using the SSD feature. Either 80 or 800 SSD numbers can be
programmed, depending on how the System is configured. In an 80 SSD-number system, the SSD
numbers are stored in bins 00-79. In 800 SSD-number systems, the SSD numbers are stored in bins
000-799.
Operation
To assign SSD numbers:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710).
3. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
4. Dial the phone number.
5. Press the HOLD key.
6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To dial an SSD number by entering the speed dial bin number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. If necessary, access an outside line.
Outside dial tone
3. Press the AUTO key.
OR...
Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).
6-44
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Action
Result
4. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
5. Complete call and replace the handset or press the ON/OFF
key.
To delete an SSD number:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710).
3. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or -799).
4. Press the HOLD key.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-15, 16, & 17 SSD Blocks
•
FF1-0-02 SSD Digits
•
FF1-0-03 Extension COS (SSD Assignment)
•
FF8-1-02: SSD Number
•
FF8-1-02: SSD Name
Considerations
•
The system can be programmed to allow SSD Numbers to override toll restrictions.
Speed Dial Linking
You can automatically link together up to 5 SSD numbers in 1 PSD bin to handle telephone numbers
longer than 24 characters. You can then dial the entire number by pressing the programmed PSD key
or by entering the speed dial bin number.
Alternatively, any combination of PSDs and SSDs can be manually linked together by pressing the
keys in the desired sequence. This can be useful for prepending account codes or long distance carrier
access codes, etc.
Note: Before linking multiple SSD numbers to a PSD bin, the SSD bins must already have been
programmed with the appropriate speed dial information.
Operation
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-45
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To link multiple SSD numbers to a PSD bin:
Action
Result
1. Determine the SSD bin numbers to be linked
2. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
3. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710).
4. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
5. Press the AUTO key.
6. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799) that contains
the first part of the number to be called.
7. Repeat steps 5-6 up to 5 more times for all additional SSDs
to be dialed.
8. Press the HOLD key when finished.
To use a PSD that links multiple SSDs:
Action
Result
1. If necessary, select the trunk group (9, 81-8). (Normally the
trunk is selected by the speed dial numbers.)
2. Press the AUTO key.
3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
To manually link speed dials together:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. If necessary, access an outside line.
Outside dial tone
3. Press the AUTO key, then enter the PSD or SSD bin number.
4. Press the AUTO key and enter the PSD or SSD codes to
dial the parts of the phone number until it is completed.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
6-46
N/A
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Considerations
•
N/A
Station Lockout
Description
Use the Station Lockout feature to limit use of your phone by others when you are away from your
telephone. When the Station Lockout feature is in use, the TRS Class of your telephone is changed.
Anyone using your telephone is limited to the calling abilities defined by this Lockout TRS Class.
In addition, with the appropriate COS, you can set or cancel Station Lockout for other telephones.
To activate Station Lockout feature:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Lockout feature code (default = 746).
3. Replace the handset.
To cancel Station Lockout feature:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Lockout Cancel feature code (default =
746).
3. Enter the Walking TRS/Station Lockout security code.
4. Replace the handset.
To activate Station Lockout feature for another extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Lockout for another extension feature code
(default = 747).
3. Dial the extension number to activate station lockout.
4. Replace the handset.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-47
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To cancel Station Lockout feature for another extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Lockout Cancel for another extension feature code (default = 748).
3. Dial the extension number to activate station lockout.
4. Enter the Walking TRS/Station Lockout security code.
5. Replace the handset.
To change the Walking TRS/Station Lockout security code:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Lockout Security Code Change code
(default = 749).
3. Enter the current Walking TRS/Station Lockout security
code.
4. Enter the new Walking TRS/Station Lockout security code.
5. Replace the handset.
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Station Lockout Enable/Disable)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Station Lockout for another Extension Enable/Disable)
•
FF1-2-02: Feature Codes (Station Lockout Code)
•
FF1-2-02: Feature Codes (Station Lockout other Extensions Code)
•
FF1-2-02: Feature Codes (Station Lockout Cancel other Extensions Code)
•
FF1-2-02: Feature Codes (Walking TRS/Station Lockout Security Code Changing Code)
•
FF1-0-19: TRS Class Under Station Lockout
•
FF8-1-08: Walking TRS/Station Lockout Security Code
Considerations
6-48
•
Walking TRS and Station Lockout use the same security code.
•
You cannot override station lockout using Walking TRS feature.
•
If you enter an incorrect key code and then try to dial, the phone will issue a busy tone.
•
If station lockout is set, the phone is limited to the Station Lockout TRS Class outside calling
abilities. This TRS Class should be carefully selected to only allow the desired call types.
•
Without Walking TRS/Station Lockout Security Code, you cannot set the Station Lockout
feature.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Timed Reminder Call
Description
Your telephone can act as an alarm clock with the Timed Reminder Call feature.
Operation
To set the Timed Reminder Call feature:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Timed Reminder Set code (default = *31).
3. Enter the time you want the Timed Reminder Call to sound.
(Enter the time in 24-hour format. For example, 0100 for 1
AM, 1300 for 1 PM.)
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
To cancel the Timed Reminder Call feature:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Timed Reminder Cancel code (default = *39).
3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
•
•
•
An alarm tone (default = 60 seconds) will be issued at the specified time.
An extension can have only one Reminder Call set at a time.
To change the Reminder Call, simply enter a new time.
If the extension is in use when the reminder call is scheduled, the reminder call is issued 3
minutes later.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-49
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Trunk Access
Description
The System supports the following ways to seize an idle trunk to make an outside call:
•
Direct Trunk Access
•
MCO Trunk Access
Direct Trunk Access
Extensions can seize a specific trunk for outgoing calls. Extensions can also use Direct Trunk Access
to test trunks or to access data trunks.
Operation
To use Direct Trunk Access:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
2. Enter the Direct Trunk Access code (default = 88).
3. Enter the desired trunk number.
Outside dial tone
4. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Direct Trunk Access)
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
N/A
MCO Trunk Access
The System supports up to 5 MCO groups for each MCO tenant group. You can seize an idle trunk
from the MCO trunk group by entering the MCO access code.
Operation
To seize an idle trunk:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
6-50
Result
Intercom dial tone
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Action
Result
2. Enter the desired trunk access number (9 or 81-84). (See
Table 2.)
Outside dial tone
3. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1: MCO Access
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF5-2: MCO Trunk Group (Outbound)
•
FF7: ARS/TRS
Considerations
•
The System supports up to 576 outside lines in a six-cabinet configuration. These lines can be
divided into 99 different trunk groups.
•
Each trunk group can support up to 50 outside lines.
•
Each MCO Tenant Group can have up to 5 MCO trunk access codes. System defaults for MCO
trunk access codes are displayed in the following table.
•
MCO1 can have up to 5 trunk groups assigned by the Advanced Trunk Group feature.
•
MCO1 access code is used for Automatic Route Selection (ARS) access code.
Table 2.
MCO Trunk Access Codes
MCO Group
Trunk Access Code
MCO1
MCO2
MCO3
MCO4
MCO5
9
81
82
83
84
Trunk Queuing
Description
When you try to originate a call by MCO (enter 9) and all outside lines in a trunk group are busy, the
System can call you when a line becomes free. Simply pick up the handset and dial the telephone
number when the Trunk Callback alert tone rings.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-51
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To set Trunk Queuing:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter a trunk access code (9 or 81-84).
Busy tone
3. Enter the Callback Request code (default = 3.)
4. Press the ON/OFF key.
5. Wait for the Trunk Callback alert tone.
To respond to the Trunk Callback alert tone:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Result
Outside dial tone
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Trunk Queuing)
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
Response to the Trunk Callback must be within 15 seconds or Trunk Queuing will be canceled.
•
The Trunk Queuing feature may also be used if you hear a busy tone when trying to make a call
using the MCO Trunk Access feature.
Universal Night Answer to Page
Description
During night mode, Universal Night Answer (UNA) sends incoming calls for selected trunks to ring
external paging speakers. UNA calls can be picked up from any extension, provided the extension’s
Class of Service allows UNA answer.
6-52
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
To answer a UNA call using the UNA to Page Pickup code:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the UNA to Page Pickup code (default = 705).
Call is received.
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
•
FF2-0: Trunk Ring Assignments
FF1-2: Dial Plan (UNA Pickup Code)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (UNA Pickup)
FF3: Extension COS
FF3: Extension (External Ring Extension Number)
FF1-0-27: System (UNA Ringing Port by Tenant Group)
Hardware Requirements
•
External paging speakers and associated equipment are not provided; they must be purchased
separately.
Considerations
•
The UNA Ringing port can be specified by the caller’s tenant group or by the trunk ringing
assignment.
Walking TRS Class of Service
Description
Walking Toll Restriction Service (TRS) Class of Service (COS) allows an extension user to “carry”
his or her toll restrictions to another phone.
Before the Walking TRS COS feature can be used, a Walking TRS COS code must be entered at your
extension before using dialing privileges at another extension.
Operation
To use a Walking TRS COS code:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key of an extension
other than your own.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Walking TRS Access code (default = 87).
3. Dial your extension number.
4. Enter your Walking TRS COS code (0001-9999)
5. Enter a trunk access code (9 or 81-84)
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
6-53
Chapter 6. DSLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
6. Dial the phone number.
Result
Walking TRS COS remains in effect until
you replace the handset.
7. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF8-1-08: Walking TRS COS Code
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
6-54
The same Walking TRS COS code can be used on more than one extension.
Walking TRS Class of Service mode is kept until the user goes on-hook.
ARS and TRS dialing privileges follow the Walking TRS COS.
Before entering a new Walking TRS COS code, you must first clear the existing code.
When Walking TRS COS is used, Wxxxx (where xxxx is the user’s extension number) appears
in SMDR.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Single Line Telephones (SLTs) are industry-standard 2500 sets. SLTs are not equipped with feature
keys or line keys, so basic telephone operations are performed by pressing dialpad keys and/or using
the switchhook.
This chapter describes the following features that are available with SLTs.
Topic
Page
Absence Message
7-3
Account Codes
Non-Verified Account Codes
7-4
Verified Account Codes
7-5
7-5
Attendant Group Calls
7-7
Busy Override
7-7
Callback Request
7-8
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding-All Calls
7-9
Call Forwarding - Busy
7-10
Call Forwarding - No Answer
7-11
Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb
7-12
7-9
Call Hold
System Hold
7-13
7-13
Floating Hold (Retrieve Only)
7-14
Exclusive Hold
7-15
Broker’s Hold
7-15
Call Park
7-16
Call Pickup
Extension Group Pickup
7-18
Extension Direct Pickup
7-19
Trunk Group Pickup
7-20
Trunk Direct Pickup
7-20
Call Transfer
Supervised Transfer
7-21
7-18
7-21
Unsupervised Transfer
7-21
Camp-On (Call Waiting)
7-23
Conference Calls
7-24
Do-Not-Disturb (DND)
7-25
Flash Send
7-27
Intercom Calling
7-28
Last Number Redial
7-29
Message Waiting/Callback
7-29
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
7-1
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Topic
7-2
Page
Offhook Signaling
7-30
Offhook Voice Announce
7-31
Paging
Meet-Me Answer
7-32
7-33
Reset Call
7-33
Room Monitoring
7-34
Speed Dialing
Personal Speed Dial
7-35
7-36
System Speed Dial
7-37
Speed Dial Linking
7-38
Station Lockout
7-39
Timed Reminder Call
7-40
Trunk Access
Direct Trunk Access
7-41
7-42
MCO Trunk Access
7-42
Trunk Queuing
7-42
Universal Night Answer to Page
7-44
Walking TRS Class of Service
7-45
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Absence Message
Description
Extension users can leave text messages related to their phones when they are away. When the
unattended extension is dialed, the text message displays on the caller’s phone. Any one of the
following messages can be selected. Messages 5 to 9 have no default message text. All the messages
can be changed through system programming.
Table 7-1. Absence Messages
Message No.
Message Text Displayed on
Called Party’s Key Telephone
Message No.
Message Text Displayed on
Called Party’s Key Telephone
0
In Meeting
5
Absence_No_5
1
At Lunch
6
Absence_No_6
2
Out of Office
7
Absence_No_7
3
Vacation
8
Absence_No_8
4
Another Office
9
Absence_No_9
Optionally, a return time can be input. Example Return Times for Absence Messages include:
Input
Display
No input
Return
9
Return 9:00
11
Return 11:00
615
Return 6:15
1035
Return 10:35
Operation
To set an Absence Message
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Absence Message code (default = 729).
3. Enter the Absence Message number. (See Table 1 above.)
4. If desired, enter the 4-digit returning time.
5. Flash the hookswitch.
6. Replace the handset.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
7-3
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To cancel an Absence Message
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Absence Message code (default = 729).
3. Flash the hookswitch.
4. Replace the handset.
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1 (System): Extension Class of Service Setting
FF3 (Extension): Extension Class of Service Assignment
FF8 (Maintenance): Absence Messages
Considerations
•
•
•
Calling parties without a display get a busy signal, rather than the Absence Message.
Regardless of setting an Absence Message on a DID/DIL extension, DID/DIL calls are routed
according to the trunk ringing setting.
An absence message may also be cancelled by dialing 7**. This cancels Do Not Disturb and Call
Forwarding-All Calls as well.
Account Codes
Description
You can assign account codes to clients to facilitate billing and to track call dates and times, numbers
called, and outside line numbers used. This information is printed for each account on the System
Message Detail Recording (SMDR) record.
In addition verified account codes may be used to change the TRS level to allow calls to numbers
otherwise restricted.
Account codes may be either forced or unforced (voluntary) and either verified or unverified.
This feature works with Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR). Before making an outgoing call,
a station user can silently enter an accounting or client billing code. Then later, the SMDR reports will
show the Code dialed for each call, and even sort the report by these Codes.
There are two different types of account codes: Non-Verified and Verified Account Codes. Prior to
Version 3.6, the maximum amount of account code numbers for both types could range from 1-10
digits. Beginning with Version 3.6, a second mode has been added that allows the user to set the
maximum amount of account code numbers from 1-4 digits. An account code error will occur when
more than the maximum number of digits are entered.
Non-Verified Account Codes
Non-Verified Codes are not checked by the system for validity. Depending on the setting, the user can
enter anything from 1-4 digits or 1-10 digits. Individual phones can be programmed to accept forced
Account Codes (the user must enter a code for every call) or voluntary Account Codes (the user can
enter a code, but doesn’t have to, for each call).
7-4
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Non-Verified Account Codes can be assigned to outgoing calls. The user either enters the Code before
accessing an outside line (for forced or voluntary Codes).
Verified Account Codes
Verified Account Codes entered by phone users must match a 4-digit code that has been
preprogrammed into an Account Code Table. Depending on the setting, the user can enter anything
from 1-4 digits or 1-10 digits. These codes can also be either forced or voluntary. You can program
these codes with their own Toll Restriction Service (TRS) Class assignment so that, when entered,
they will override the extension’s TRS Class. Thus, Verified Account Code users can “float” from
phone to phone, placing calls that would normally be restricted on that phone.
Non-Verified Account Codes
Non-Verified Account codes are voluntary codes. (i.e., You do not have to enter an account code
before making a call.)
You can assign Non-Verified Account codes to outgoing calls only. To assign an account code to an
outgoing call, you enter the account code before making the call.
Operation
To enter an account code before making a call:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Account Code feature code (default = 8#).
3. Enter the Account Code (up to 10 digits).
4. Press the # key.
5. Enter a trunk access code.
6. Dial the phone number.
Verified Account Codes
Stations restricted from outside call origination by Toll Restriction Service (TRS) can be allowed to
make outgoing calls by entering a Verified Account code that changes the TRS. After a call is made,
the SMDR record for the call will show the verified account code.
Operation
To make an outside call that requires an account code:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Verified Account ID code (default = 8#).
3. Enter the Account Code (max. 10 digits).
4. Press the # key.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
7-5
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
5. Enter a trunk access code.
6. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
•
An SMDR printer or external call accounting system is required to collect account code records.
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-19: TRS Class for Forced Account Code
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF3: Forced Account
•
FF3: Verified Account
•
FF8-1-04: Verified Account Codes with TRS Class
Considerations
•
Account codes are not available during conversation recording mode for the Built-In Voice Mail.
•
Even though up to 10 digits may be entered, the system verifies the ID based on the first 4 digits
only.
•
Account codes will be cancelled after using CO queuing.-
•
Account codes are not available for a Dial Pulse SLT.
•
SLT telephones can only use account codes with outgoing calls only.
•
Account Codes interact with TRS as shown in the following table:
Forced or Not Forced
Verified or
Non-Verified
Not Forced
Non-Verified
TRS Class
No Account Entry
Account Entry
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Verified
Forced
Non-Verified
Verified
Account Code Based TRS
Class
TRS Class for Forced
Account Code
(FF1 0 19 0001)
•
FF1-0-19: TRS Class for Verified Account Code
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF8-1-04: Verified Account Codes
Extension Port Based TRS
Class
Account Code Based TRS
Class
Considerations
•
7-6
N/A
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Attendant Group Calls
Description
You can call the attendant group from any extension by dialing the designated attendant number.
Operation
To call an attendant group:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the attendant pilot number (default = 0).
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF3-0: Extension Number
•
FF5-0: Attendant Hunt Groups
Considerations
•
Up to 20 extensions can be included in an attendant group.
•
The attendant pilot number is flexible.
•
If a member of an attendant group is for a virtual extension, multiple extensions in the attendant
group can be made to ring at once when the virtual number is dialed.
•
Attendant calls are always tone calls (i.e., not voice calls).
Busy Override
Description
Busy Override allows you to break into another user’s outside or intercom calls to relay urgent
information or to create three-party conference calls.
Operation
To set Extension Busy Override:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
576-36-700
Result
Intercom dial tone
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
7-7
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy tone
3. Enter the Busy Override code (default = 9).
• Alert tone sounds to both extensions
(System programming required)
• Connection to both parties
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-01: Splash Tone (Busy Override)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Manual DND Override Send)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Forced DND Override)
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF3: Extension COS
•
FF3: Data Security
Considerations
•
You cannot break in on three-party conference calls.
•
The default for the override alert tone is off. If the override alert tone is enabled, the tone will be
sent to both parties when a call is overridden.
Callback Request
Description
If you dial a busy extension, you can have the System call you back when that extension becomes
free. When you answer, the System automatically rings the called party again.
Operation
To set a Callback Request:
Action
7-8
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy tone
3. Enter the Callback Request code (default = 3).
Ringback tone
4. Replace the handset after you hear the ringback tone.
System calls back when called extension
becomes free
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
To respond to the callback request:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
System automatically redials extension
To cancel a Callback Request:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the Callback Cancel code (default = 769).
3. Replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Callback Request Send)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Callback Request Receive)
•
FF3-0: Extension COS
•
FF1-2-03: Dial Plan (Callback Cancel)
Considerations
•
N/A
Call Forwarding
Description
Call Forwarding allows you to send your calls to another extension, to an outside line, or to voice
mail. Call Forwarding can be set or canceled under the following conditions from either your own
extension or from an alternate extension:
•
Call Forwarding - All Calls
•
Call Forwarding - Busy
•
Call Forwarding - No Answer
Call Forwarding-All Calls
When Call Forwarding - All Calls is set, all incoming calls to an extension are immediately
forwarded.
Operation
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
7-9
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To set Call Forwarding-All Calls:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 721.
• For another extension, enter 741.
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward.
4. Enter the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programed into speed dialing. (For instructions,
see “Speed Dialing” on page 276.)
5. Replace the handset.
To cancel Call Forwarding-All Calls:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 731.
• For another extension, enter 751.
3. If canceling Call Forwarding for another extension, enter
the extension number.
4. Replace the handset.
Call Forwarding - Busy
When Call Forwarding - Busy is set, all incoming calls to a busy extension are forwarded.
To set Call Forwarding - Busy:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 722.
• For another extension, enter 742.
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you want to forward.
7-10
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Action
Result
4. Enter the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programed into speed dialing. (For instructions,
see “Speed Dialing” on page 276.)
5. Replace the handset.
To cancel Call Forwarding - Busy:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 732.
• For another extension, enter 752.
3. If canceling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
extension number.
4. Replace the handset.
Call Forwarding - No Answer
When Call Forwarding - No Answer is set, a call will ring until the Call forward No Answer timer
expires. When the timer expires, the unanswered call is forwarded.
To set Call Forwarding - No Answer:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 723.
• For another extension, enter 743.
3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
7-11
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
4. Dial the destination number:
• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension
number.
• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then
enter the SSD bin number.
Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must
already be programed into speed dialing. (For instructions,
see “Speed Dialing” on page 276.)
5. Replace the handset.
To cancel Call Forwarding - No Answer:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:
• For your extension, enter 733.
• For another extension, enter 753.
3. If canceling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the
extension number.
4. Replace the handset.
Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb
The System allows you to cancel both Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb (DND) for your own
extension in one step.
To cancel Call Forwarding and DND:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the CF/DND All Clear code (default = 7**).
3. Replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
7-12
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/All Calls)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/Busy)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/No Answer)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/Other)
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF3-0: Extension COS Assignment
Considerations
•
Calls cannot be forwarded to an extension that already has Call Forwarding or DND activated.
For example, extension 220 can only forward to extension 225 if 225 is not forwarded.
•
Call Forwarding - Busy and Call Forwarding - No Answer can both be set at the same time.
•
You can cancel both Call Forwarding and DND by entering 7 * *.
•
An auto camp-on to a busy extension will forward to the Call Forward No Answer destination. A
manual camp-on to a busy extension will not forward.
•
If Call Forwarding No Answer and DND are both set, calls immediately forward to the Call
Forward No Answer destination.
Call Hold
Description
The system provides the following types of Call Hold:
•
System Hold
•
Floating Hold (Retrieve Only)
•
Exclusive Hold
•
Broker’s Hold
•
Call Park (Station)
System Hold
You can place either an outside or intercom call on System Hold. You can retrieve a call placed on
System Hold from any extension that has a line appearance for the held call.
Operation
To place a call on System Hold:
Action
1. While on a call, hookflash.
Result
Intercom dial tone
To retrieve a call placed on System Hold:
Action
Result
1. If onhook, go offhook.
Intercom dial tone
2. Hookflash.
Retrieve call
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
7-13
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To retrieve a held call on a specific trunk:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Specified Trunk Answer code (default = *0).
3. Enter the trunk number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Hookflash Operation for SLT)
•
FF3-0: Extension COS
Considerations
•
N/A
Floating Hold (Retrieve Only)
Floating Hold allows calls to be placed in a hold orbit (position) for retrieval elsewhere in the system.
Floating Hold is most commonly used by the attendant group when they are unable to locate the
desired party. If the desired party does not answer his/her phone, the attendant places the caller on
Floating Hold and asks over the paging system that the desired party dial *9XXX to retrieve the held
call.
Note: Single Line Telephone (SLT) positions are not able to place a call on Floating Hold.
However, an SLT can retrieve a call on floating.
To retrieve a call from Floating Hold:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
2. Enter *9 followed by the Floating Hold Orbit number (001576 (CPC-288/576), 01-96 (CPC-96) or 001-099 (CPC288/
576) or 01-09 (CPC-96) (See considerations below.)
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
7-14
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF1-0-02: Dial Control for Floating Hold Answer.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Considerations
•
The number of floating hold orbits available may very depending on the Station Park /Floating
Hold Pickup setting (FF1-0-02-0005). The floating hold pickup access code can set to *9
(default). The “*9” access code operates as follows:
System Size
Virtual Line Number and Operation
01-09 Floating Hold pick up
10-96: For Station Park Hold pick up purpose
001-099 Floating Hold pick up
100-576: Station Park Hold pick up purpose
96
Above 96
Exclusive Hold
With Exclusive Hold, only the extension that held the call can retrieve it. Exclusive Hold can be used
to hold CO calls and extension calls.
Operation
To place a call on Exclusive Hold:
Action
1. While on a call, hookflash.
Result
Intercom dial tone
To retrieve a call from Exclusive Hold:
Action
Result
1. If onhook, lift the handset.
2. Hookflash.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Hookflash Control on SLTs)
Considerations
•
Intercom calls will be held as Exclusive.
Broker’s Hold
Broker’s Hold allows you to toggle between the current call and the last held call by hookflash.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
7-15
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To place a call on Broker’s Hold:
Action
Result
1. Pick up the first call.
2. Hookflash.
First call on hold
3. Pick up the second call.
4. Hookflash.
Second call on hold, first call retrieved
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
F1-0-03: Extension COS (Hookflash Control on SLTs - Broker’s Hold or Conference)
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
If Broker’s Hold is enabled, it is not possible to establish a conference call from an SLT position.
Call Park
You can use the Call Park function to transfer a call, even if you cannot locate the intended recipient
of the call.
CO, Extension, and Network calls may be parked.
There are two ways for an extension to park a call. One way is to park the call at the receiving
extension and to retrieve the parked call at another extension by dialing the park answer code plus the
parking extension number. The other way is to park the call at another extension and dial the park
transfer answer code at the other extension to retrieve the call. Beginning with Version 3.6, an
Extension Group Pickup code allows the user to pick up a Transfer Recall (only on non-appearing
calls), a Hold Recall, and a Station Park Recall.
To park a call on this extension:
Action
1. While on a call, press the hookswitch..
Result
• Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Call Park code (default = 771).
3. If necessary, page the party that needs to retrieve the call.
7-16
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
To retrieve a call parked at the originating extension from another extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Call Park Answer/Other Ext. code (default
= 773).
OR...
Enter the Station Call Park/Floating Hold Answer code
(default = *9) (Version 2.0 or higher).
3. Dial the number of the extension that parked the call.
• Connected to parked call
To park a call at another extension:
Action
1. While on a call, press the hookswitch.
Result
• Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Call Park Transfer code (default = 774).
3. Dial the extension number to receive the parked call.
4. If necessary, page the party that needs to retrieve the call.
To retrieve a transferred call park:
Action
Result
1. At the extension with the transferred park call, lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Station Call Park Answer/Own code (default =
772).
• Connected to parked call
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1 (System): Extension Park Hold Recall Timer
•
FF1-0-02: Dial Control for Floating Hold Answer
Considerations
•
You cannot park more than one call at a time.
•
If two calls are on hold and the last call is parked, the other call is then considered the last held
call. If a transfer is performed, the remaining held call would be the call transferred, not the
parked call.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
7-17
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Call Pickup
Description
The System allows the following types of call pickup:
•
Extension Group Pickup
•
Extension Direct Pickup
•
Trunk Group Pickup
•
Trunk Direct Pickup
Extension Group Pickup
Extension Group Pickup allows you to pick up a direct ringing call (within your extension pickup
group or in a different pickup group) without having to dial the number of the ringing extension.
Three types of Extension Group Pickup are available:
•
Call Pickup - All Calls: You can pick up a call ringing anywhere within your own extension
group.
•
Call Pickup - External Calls: You can pick up only external calls ringing within your own
extension group.
•
Specified Group Pickup: You can pick up a call ringing to an extension in another extension
group.
Operation
To use Extension Group Pickup - All Calls:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Group Pickup - All Calls code (default
= 701).
3. Complete the call and replace the handset.
To use Extension Group Pickup - External Calls:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Group Pickup - External Calls code
(default = 702).
3. Complete the call and replace the handset.
7-18
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
To use Specified Group Pickup:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Specified Group Pickup code (default = 703).
3. Enter the number of the call pickup group (01-72) where the
call is ringing.
4. Complete the call and replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-0-02: Intercom Voice Call Pickup
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3: Call Pickup Group Assignment
Considerations
•
Extension Group Pickup - 12 / cabinet - maximum 72 group / 6 cabinet configuration
Extension Direct Pickup
Extension Direct Pickup allows you to answer a call to another extension by dialing the number of the
ringing extension.
Operation
To use Extension Direct Pickup:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Extension Direct Call Pickup code (default = 704).
3. Dial the number of the ringing extension.
4. Complete the call and replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-02: Intercom Voice Call Pickup
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
N/A
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
7-19
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Trunk Group Pickup
Trunk Group Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing to any extension within your own MCO
incoming trunk group.
Operation
To use Trunk Group Pickup:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Trunk Group Pickup code (default = 709).
3. Complete the call and replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF5-3: MCO Inbound Trunk Group Members
Considerations
•
N/A
Trunk Direct Pickup
Trunk Direct Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing on a specific trunk number.
Operation
To use Trunk Direct Pickup:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Trunk Direct Pickup code (default = *0).
3. Dial the number of the ringing or holding (system) trunk.
4. Complete the call and replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
7-20
FF1-2: Dial Plan
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Considerations
•
Calls on exclusive hold cannot be picked up.
Call Transfer
Description
The System allows you to transfer calls to either another extension or to an outside number. The
transferred calls can be either supervised or unsupervised. (You can also use the Camp-on feature to
transfer a call to a busy extension.)
Supervised Transfer
When completing a supervised transfer, the transferring party remains on the line until the third party
answers, then he/she announces the call.
Operation
To supervise the transfer of a call to another extension:
Action
1. While on a call, hookflash to place the call on hold.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. When the call is answered, inform the third party of the
transfer.
4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset.
To supervise the transfer of a call to an outside number:
Action
1. While on a call, hookflash to place the call on hold.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter a trunk access code.
3. Dial the number to which the call is to be transferred.
4. When the call is answered, inform the third party of the
transfer.
5. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset.
Unsupervised Transfer
When completing an unsupervised transfer the transferring party hangs up before the third party
answers.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
7-21
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To transfer a call to another extension without supervising the transfer:
Action
1. While on a call, hookflash to place the call on hold.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset.
To transfer a call to an outside number without supervising the transfer:
Action
1. While on a call, hookflash to place the call on hold.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter a trunk access code.
3. Dial the number to which the call is to be transferred.
4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset.
Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension
Operation
To camp a call onto a busy extension:
Action
1. While on a call, hookflash to place the call on hold.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.
3. If your extension does not have Auto Camp-On activated,
enter the Camp-On (Call Waiting) code (default = 2).
Camp-on tone heard at called extension
4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
7-22
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Onhook Transfer at Ringback)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Onhook Transfer at Talk)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Onhook Transfer at Camp-on)
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Considerations
•
On-Hook Transfer must be enabled for the transferring party’s Extension Class of Service
(COS).
•
If the call is not answered by the third party before the Transfer Recall Timer expires, the call
will recall to the transferring extension.
•
If a Transfer Recall is not answered before the Recall Duration Timer expires, the call will revert
to the Attendant group.
•
If the called party does not exist, the call recalls to the transferring extension.
•
You cannot transfer a call to an extension that has Do-Not-Disturb (DND) activated.
•
You can transfer a call to an extension that has Call Forwarding activated. The transferred call
will follow the call forwarding path of the extension it is transferred to. For example, if extension
221 is forwarded to extension 225, calls that are transferred to extension 221 will be forwarded to
extension 225.
•
Calls can be transferred from paging using supervised transfer.
Camp-On (Call Waiting)
Description
If you dial a busy extension, you can camp onto that extension and send a Call Waiting signal to the
called party. The called party then needs only to replace the handset and pick it up again to be
automatically connected to the new call. The called party can also place the first call on hold by
Hookflashing and then answering the waiting call.
The System provides two types of call waiting:
•
Automatic Call Waiting: You do not need to enter a code to send the Call Waiting signal.
You need only to remain on the line.
•
Manual Call Waiting: You must enter a code to send a Call Waiting signal to the busy
extension.
Operation
To use Automatic Camp-on:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
• Called party hears alert tone
• Calling party hears ringback tone
3. Remain on the line until the called party answers.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
7-23
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To use Manual Camp-on:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy tone
3. Enter the Camp-On (Call Waiting) code (default = 2).
• Called party hears alert tone
• Calling party hears ringback tone
4. Remain on the line until the called party answers.
To answer a Camp-on (Call Waiting) signal:
Action
Result
1. Replace the handset.
2. Lift the handset again to be connected to the waiting call.
OR....
• Current call placed on hold
• Connected to waiting call
Hookflash.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF1-0-03: Extension COS
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
You can transfer an outside call to a busy extension using Camp-on. See “To camp a call onto a
busy extension:” on page 266.
Conference Calls
Description
Conference Calls allow you to add another party to an existing conversation. With the standard
system configuration, up to 3 parties can be included in a conference call at any one time. If the
Note: The SLT does not support 8 party conference calling.
The system supports the following types of three-party conference calls:
•
•
•
7-24
3 extensions
2 extensions and 1 CO line
1 extension and 2 CO lines
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Operation
To establish a conference call:
Action
Result
1. While on a call, hookflash to place your current call on hold.
2. If adding an outside party, dial a trunk access code.
• Outside dial tone
3. Dial the number of the party you wish to add to the call.
4. Hookflash when your call is answered.
5. To drop out of the conference call, hang up.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
If all the internal parties hang up, the conference call will be disconnected. If the internal party
remains in the conversation, the conference call remains in progress.
•
When three parties are conferenced, a built-in 3-party conference circuit is used. If no 3-party
conference circuit is available, a conference cannot be established.
Do-Not-Disturb (DND)
Description
You can make an extension unavailable by activating the Do-Not-Disturb (DND) feature. When DND
is activated, calls to that extension receive busy tone.
You can set or cancel DND from either your extension or from an alternate extension.
Operation
To set DND for your own extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Set code (default = 720).
3. Replace the handset.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
7-25
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To cancel DND for your own extension:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Cancel code (default = 720).
DND/CD LED light goes off
3. Replace the handset.
To set DND for another extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Set by Other Phone code (default = 740).
3. Dial the extension number.
4. Replace the handset.
To cancel DND for another extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the DND Cancel by Other Phone code (default = 750).
3. Dial the extension number.
4. Replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Manual DND Override Send)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Forced DND Override)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (DND Set/Clear)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (DND Set/Clear Other)
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF3-0: Extension COS
Considerations
7-26
•
Forced DND override is available.
•
DND override function is available by Busy Override code.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Flash Send
Description
Flash send allows you to send a flash to a CO line.
Operation
To send a flash on a CO line:
Action
Result
1. Hookflash to place the current CO call on hold.
Dial tone is returned
2. Enter the SLT Flash Send access code (default = 765).
A flash is sent on the CO line. The CO
line will respond according.
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF5-5: Hot Line
Considerations
•
N/A
Hot Line
Description
Hot Line enables you to immediately connect to another pre-assigned extension or speed dial number
simply by lifting the handset. You do not have to dial any digits.
Operation
To immediately connect to a pre-assigned extension or speed dial number:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Automatically connected to pre-assigned
extension or speed dial number
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF5-5: Hot Line
Considerations
•
N/A
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
7-27
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Intercom Calling
Description
The System provides two methods of intercom calling:
•
Voice Calling: Extension calls are connected immediately, without a ringing tone.
•
Tone Calling: A ringing tone is sent to the called extension.
Extension Class of Service (COS) programming determines whether the default for the originating
extension is voice or tone calling. Regardless of the default, you can toggle between voice or tone
calling by entering the Tone-Voice Call feature code. For example, if the extension default is tone
calling, you can make a voice call to another extension by entering the Tone-Voice Call feature access
code.
Operation
To make a call using Intercom Calling:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
3. If your extension is set for tone calling and you want to
make a voice call, enter 1.
Or, if your extension is set for voice call and you want to
make a tone call, enter 1.
4. Speak when your call is answered
5. Replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Intercom Calling Type)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Voice Call Send)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Voice Call Receive)
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
7-28
•
Both the called and calling parties must belong to an Extension COS that allows Voice Calling.
•
You cannot change from voice calling to tone calling.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Last Number Redial
Description
Last Number Redial allows you to automatically redial the last number dialed.
Operation
To automatically redial the last number dialed:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
2. Enter the SLT Redial code (default = 712).
3. Complete the call and replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Intercom Redialing)
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
Extension Class of Service (COS) determines whether Last Number Redial can be used for both
intercom and CO calls or CO calls only.
Message Waiting/Callback
Description
If you try to call an extension that is busy or does not answer, you can leave a message wait indication
at that extension, requesting a return call.
Operation
To leave a message waiting indication:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the extension number.
Ring or busy tone
3. While the telephone is still ringing, or when you hear the
busy tone, enter the Message Wait Set code (default = 4).
4. Replace the handset.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
7-29
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To answer a message waiting indication (Callback):
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Stutter dial tone
2. Enter the Message Wait Callback code (default = *6).
Telephone automatically dials extension
that set Message Waiting Indication
To cancel a Callback Message:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Callback Request Cancel code (default = *5).
3. Replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Message Wait set/cancel)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Priority Message Wait set/cancel)
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
The System has priority message waiting for 3rd-party voice mail. See “Voice Mail Integration
(Third Party)” on page 69.
Offhook Signaling
Description
Offhook Signaling sends a tone over the handset to a busy extension to indicate that a CO call has
arrived or a call is camped-on. Prior to Version 3.6, users receiving an offhook signal during a
conversation had to end the call before answering an incoming call. Beginning with Version 3.6, users
receiving an offhook signal during conversation can press and release the hook quickly (hookflash) to
place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call.
7-30
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Operation
After receiving an offhook signal during a call:
Action
Result
1. Complete the first call and place the handset on hook.
First call is terminated.
2. After the telephone rings, go off hook.
Incoming call is answered.
OR
Action
Result
1. Press and release the hook quickly (hookflash).
First call is placed on hold; incoming call
connects.
2. Press and release the hook quickly to go back to the
original call.
First call connects again.
NOTE: The steps outlined above can be performed only when the necessary settings have been
programmed into the system.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF3: CO Off-Hook Signal
•
FF1-1: Off-Hook Signal Timer
Considerations
•
The CO call type may be either multiple ring, or DID/DIL whose destination is set to Auto campon (Call Waiting).
•
Offhook signaling is not supported for an ISDN terminal.
•
The System does not send the offhook signal under the following conditions:
• During a conference call
• During an OHVA or Busy override
• Data Privacy is enabled
• Receiving telephone is a 3rd party voice mail.
Offhook Voice Announce
Description
You can interrupt a busy extension when making an Intercom Call, and then use the Off-Hook Voice
Announce (OHVA) feature to make an announcement.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
7-31
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Operation
To make an OHVA :
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the extension number.
Busy signal
3. Enter the OHVA Access code (default = 8).
4. Make your announcement
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
FF1 0 03 (System): Extension COS OHVA Originate
FF1 0 03 (System): Extension COS OHVA Receive
FF3 (Extension): Extension COS Assignments
FF4: FF Key Assignment
Considerations
•
•
•
If On hook Transfer is enabled, the held call is transferred as soon as the extension sending the
OHVA hangs up.
You cannot receive a Call Waiting message during an OHVA.
If you make an OHVA to an SLT, the SLT user and the other party will hear the announcement.
Paging
Description
The System allows you to make both internal and external pages and announcements. Internal pages
are made via the System’s key telephone speakers. External pages are made through the speakers of
an external paging system connected to the System.
Paging calls can be answered from any extension using the Meet-Me Answer feature.
Operation
To make a page:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Group Paging code (default = #).
3. Enter the number of the desired Paging group (0-9).
7-32
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Action
Result
4. Make your announcement.
5. Replace the handset.
Meet-Me Answer
To answer a page using Meet-Me Answer:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Meet Me Answer code (default = ##).
Connected to specified party
Hardware Requirements
•
External relays, amplifier, and speakers are required for external paging.
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-02: Paging Override
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Paging)
•
FF1-0-04: Trunk COS (Paging)
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
•
FF2: Trunk COS
•
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
If an external paging system has been connected, pages can be made to Paging groups 0-9
through the external speakers. Voice paging can also be heard over the extensions in groups 0-9.
•
An extension can belong to more than one paging group.
•
Only one page may be performed at a time. If you attempt to make a page while another
extension is paging, you will receive a busy signal unless your system allows Paging Override.
•
Beginning with Version 3.5 and higher, the paging system can be set to “timeout” if a page
remains unanswered for a specified length of time (0 to 255 seconds). If this feature is set and the
timeout period has elapsed, the page originator’s handset will emit a Fast Busy Tone.
Reset Call
Description
If you dial a busy extension, the System allows you to quickly dial another extension by simply
pressing the last digit of the new extension number.
Operation
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
7-33
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To use Reset Call to dial another extension (after a busy extension):
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial an extension.
Busy tone
3. Enter the last digit of the next extension.
Example: You dial extension 213, but it is busy. To dial extension 214, enter 4.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
Considerations
•
The second extension called using the Reset Call feature must have the same number of digits as
the first extension.
Room Monitoring
Description
This feature allows the user to monitor the sounds in a room from another extension or room. The
transmitter in the telephone handset is used as a remote “microphone” for monitoring these sounds.
To activate this feature, the monitored extension must enable the Room Monitor feature before the
monitoring extension can listen to the sounds in the room. The monitored extension can be enabled
using an SLT, DSLT, or Key Telephone. No special programming is required to allow an extension to
enable the monitored mode.
Operation
To set up the monitored extension:
Action
1. Dial the monitored extension access code (default 775)
Note: The handset must be off-hook to activate the
Room Monitor feature.
7-34
Result
You will hear a confirmation tone after
the monitored extension has enabled the
Room Monitor feature.
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
When a monitored extension receives a call, the caller hears a busy tone. Additional operations may
be performed from the monitored extension when it is in monitored mode:
Action
Result
1. Placing the handset back on-hook
Monitored mode is cancelled. Extension
returns to idle.
2. Pressing digits 0-9, *, #
No response is given. Extension remains
in monitored mode.
3. Flash
Monitored mode is cancelled. Dial tone is
returned to handset.
It is not possible to monitor an extension from an SLT telephone.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Allow/deny Busy Override Send—Monitoring extension)
FF1-2-02: Dial Plan at DT Pattern 1
FF1-2-03: Dial Plan at DT Pattern 2
Considerations
•
•
Be sure all phones that should NOT be allowed to monitor have a COS that restricts monitoring.
If the monitored extension is placed on-hook while Room Monitoring is activated, the
monitoring extension will hear a fast busy tone.
If the monitoring extension goes on-hook while Room Monitoring is activated, the monitored
extension will remain in the monitored mode, and can be accessed by any other extension
allowed to access the room monitoring mode.
A room cannot be monitored from more than one extension at a time. If an attempt is made to
monitor an extension while the extension is being monitored, the user will hear a fast busy tone.
ISDN (s-point) extensions cannot access the Room Monitor feature in either the monitor or
monitored modes.
A monitoring extension cannot forward a call on hold to a monitored extension.
A monitored extension cannot receive a transferred call.
•
•
•
•
•
Speed Dialing
Description
The System supports the following speed dial features:
•
•
•
•
576-36-700
Personal Speed Dial (PSD)
System Speed Dial (SSD)
Speed Dial Linking
Speed Dial Name Assignment
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
7-35
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Personal Speed Dial
You can store frequently called numbers using the PSD feature. Up to 20 PSD numbers can be stored
in PSD bins numbered 80-99.
Operation
To assign PSD numbers:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
2.
Result
Intercom dial tone
Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710).
3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
4. Dial the number.
5. Hookflash.
6. Replace the handset.
To dial a PSD number by entering the speed dial bin number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. If necessary, access an outside line.
Outside dial tone
3. Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).
4. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
5. Complete the call and replace the handset.
To delete a PSD number:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
2.
Result
Intercom dial tone
Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710).
3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).
4. Hookflash.
5. Complete the call and replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
7-36
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
•
Storing a new number erases any previously stored data.
•
Speed Dial numbers can contain up to 24 characters.
•
Single Line Telephone SLT can only enter 0, 1-9, *, and #. If a pause, MCO code, intercom
level, Dial Pulse (DP) - Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) code, or SSD code needs to be
programmed, use User Maintenance to program the speed dial.
System Speed Dial
You can store frequently called numbers using the SSD feature. Either 80 or 800 SSD numbers can be
programmed, depending on how the System is configured. In an 80 SSD-number system, the SSD
numbers are stored in bins 00-79. In 800 SSD-number systems, the SSD numbers are stored in bins
000-799.
Operation
To assign SSD numbers:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710).
3. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
4. Dial the phone number.
5. Hookflash.
6. Replace the handset.
To dial an SSD number by entering the speed dial bin number:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. If necessary, access an outside line.
Outside dial tone
3. Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).
4. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
5. Complete the call and replace the handset.
To delete an SSD number:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710).
3. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).
4. Hookflash.
5. Replace the handset.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
7-37
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-15, 16, & 17 SSD Blocks
•
FF1-0-02 SSD Digits
•
FF1-0-03 Extension COS (SSD Assignment)
•
FF8-1-02: SSD Number
•
FF8-1-02: SSD Name
Considerations
•
The system can be programmed to allow SSD Numbers to override toll restrictions.
Speed Dial Linking
You can automatically link together up to 6 SSD numbers in 1 PSD bin to handle telephone numbers
longer than 24 characters.
Alternatively, any combination of PSDs and SSDs can be manually linked together by pressing the
keys in the desired sequence. This can be useful for prepending account codes or long distance carrier
access codes, etc.
Operation
To use a PSD that links multiple SSDs:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
1. If necessary, access an outside line.
Outside dial tone
2. Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).
3. Enter the desired PSD bin number (80-99).
4. Complete the call and replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
7-38
N/A
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Station Lockout
Description
Use the Station Lockout feature to limit use of your phone by others when you are away from your
telephone. When the Station Lockout feature is in use, the TRS Class of your telephone is changed.
Anyone using your telephone is limited to the calling abilities defined by this Lockout TRS Class.
In addition, with the appropriate COS, you can set or cancel Station Lockout for other telephones.
To activate Station Lockout feature:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the Station Lockout Set/Cancel (Own EXT) code
(default = 746).
3. Replace the handset.
To cancel Station Lockout feature:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the Station Lockout Set/Cancel (Own EXT) code
(default = 746).
3. Dial the Walking TRS/Station Lockout security code.
4. Replace the handset.
To activate Station Lockout feature for another extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the Station Lockout Set (Other EXT) code (default =
747).
3. Dial the extension number to activate station lockout.
4. Replace the handset.
To cancel Station Lockout feature for another extension:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the Station Lockout Cancel (Other EXT) code (default
= 748).
3. Dial the extension number to activate station lockout.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
7-39
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Action
Result
4. Dial the Walking TRS/Station Lockout security code.
5. Replace the handset.
To change the Station Lockout security code:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Dial the Walking TRS/Station Lockout Security Code
Change code (default = 749).
3. Dial the current Walking TRS/Station Lockout security
code.
4. Dial the new Walking TRS/Station Lockout security code.
5. Replace the handset.
Related Programming
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Station Lockout Enable/Disable)
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Station Lockout for another Extension Enable/Disable)
•
FF1-2-02: Feature Codes (Station Lockout Code)
•
FF1-2-02: Feature Codes (Station Lockout other Extensions Code)
•
FF1-2-02: Feature Codes (Station Lockout Cancel other Extensions Code)
•
FF1-2-02: Feature Codes (Walking TRS/Station Lockout Security Code Changing Code)
•
FF1-0-19: TRS Class Under Station Lockout
•
FF8-1-08; Walking TRS/Station Lockout Security Code
Considerations
•
Walking TRS and Station Lockout use the same security code.
•
You cannot override station lockout using Walking TRS feature.
•
If you enter an incorrect key code and then try to dial, the phone will issue a busy tone.
•
If station lockout is set, the phone is limited to the Station Lockout TRS Class outside calling
abilities. This TRS Class should be carefully selected to only allow the desired call types.
•
Without Walking TRS/Station Lockout Security Code, you cannot set the Station Lockout
feature.
Timed Reminder Call
Description
Your telephone can act as an alarm clock with the Timed Reminder Call feature.
7-40
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Operation
To set the Timed Reminder Call feature:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Timed Reminder Set code (default = *31).
3. Enter the time you want the Timed Reminder Call to sound.
(Enter the time in 24-hour format. For example, 0100 for 1
AM, 1300 for 1 PM).
4. Replace the handset.
To cancel the Timed Reminder Call feature:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Timed Reminder Cancel code (default = *39).
3. Replace the handset.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
N/A
Considerations
•
An alarm tone (default = 60 seconds) will be issued at the specified time.
•
An extension can have only one Reminder Call set at a time.
•
To change the Reminder Call, simply enter a new time.
•
If the extension is in use when the reminder call is scheduled, the reminder call is issued 3
minutes later.
Trunk Access
Description
The System supports the following ways to seize an idle trunk to make an outside call:
•
Direct Trunk Access
•
MCO Trunk Access
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
7-41
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
Direct Trunk Access
Extensions can seize a specific trunk for outgoing calls. Extensions can also use Direct Trunk Access
to test trunks or to access data trunks.
Operation
To use Direct Trunk Access:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
2. Enter the Direct Trunk Access code (default = 88).
3. Enter the desired trunk number.
Outside dial tone
4. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Direct Trunk Access)
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
N/A
MCO Trunk Access
The System supports up to 5 MCO groups for each MCO tenant group. You can seize an idle trunk
from the MCO trunk group by entering the MCO access code.
Operation
To seize an idle trunk:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the desired trunk access number (9 or 81-84). (See
Table 2 on page 7-43.)
Outside dial tone
3. Dial the phone number.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
7-42
FF1: MCO Access
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
•
FF5-2: MCO Trunk Group (Outbound)
•
FF7: ARS/TRS
Considerations
•
The System supports up to 576 outside lines in a six-cabinet configuration. These lines can be
divided into 99 different trunk groups.
•
Each trunk group can support up to 50 outside lines.
•
Each MCO Tenant Group can have up to 5 MCO trunk access codes. System defaults for MCO
trunk access codes are displayed in the following table.
•
MCO1 can have up to 5 trunk groups assigned by the Advanced Trunk Group feature.
•
MCO1 access code is used for Automatic Route Selection (ARS) access code.
Table 2.
MCO Trunk Access Codes
MCO Group
Trunk Access Code
MCO1
MCO2
MCO3
MCO4
MCO5
9
81
82
83
84
Trunk Queuing
Description
When you try to originate a call by MCO (enter 9) and all outside lines in a trunk group are busy, the
System can call you when a line becomes free. Simply pick up the handset and dial the telephone
number when the Trunk Callback alert tone rings.
Operation
To set Trunk Queuing:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter a trunk access code.
Busy tone
3. Enter the Callback Request code (default = 3).
4. Replace the handset.
5. Wait for the Trunk Callback alert tone.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
7-43
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Section 700 - Operation
To respond to the Trunk Callback alert tone:
Action
1. Lift the handset.
Result
Outside dial tone
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
•
•
FF1-2: Dial Plan
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Trunk Queuing)
FF3: Extension COS
Considerations
•
•
Response to the Trunk Callback must be within 15 seconds or Trunk Queuing will be canceled.
The Trunk Queuing feature may also be used if you hear a busy tone when trying to make a call
using the MCO Trunk Access feature.
Universal Night Answer to Page
Description
During night mode, Universal Night Answer (UNA) sends incoming calls for selected trunks to ring
external paging speakers.
UNA calls can be picked up from any extension, provided the extension’s Class of Service allows
UNA answer.
Operation
To answer a UNA call:
Action
Result
1. Lift the handset.
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the UNA Pickup code (default = 705).
Call is received.
Related Programming
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-44
FF2-0: Trunk Ring Assignments
FF1-2: Dial Plan (UNA Pickup Code)
FF1-0-03: Extension COS (UNA Pickup)
FF3: Extension COS
FF3: Extension (External Ring Extension Number)
FF1-0-27: System (UNA Ringing Port by Tenant Group)
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Chapter 7. SLT Features
Hardware Requirements
•
External paging speakers and associated equipment are not provided; they must be purchased
separately.
Considerations
•
The UNA Ringing port can be specified by tenant group or by trunk ring assignment.
Walking TRS Class of Service
Description
Walking Toll Restriction Service (TRS) Class of Service (COS) allows an extension user to “carry”
his or her toll restrictions to another phone.
Before the Walking TRS COS feature can be used, a Walking TRS COS code must be entered at your
extension before using dialing privileges at another extension.
Operation
To use a Walking TRS COS code:
Action
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key of an extension
other than your own.
Result
Intercom dial tone
2. Enter the Walking TRS Access code (default = 87).
3. Dial your extension number.
4. Enter your Walking TRS COS code (0001-9999).
5. Enter a trunk access code (9 or 81-84).
6. Dial the phone number.
Walking TRS COS remains in effect until
you replace the handset.
7. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.
Hardware Requirements
•
N/A
Related Programming
•
FF8-1-08: Walking TRS COS Code
Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
The same Walking TRS COS code can be used on more than one extension.
Walking TRS COS mode is kept until the user goes on-hook.
ARS and TRS dialing privileges follow the Walking TRS COS.
Before entering a new Walking TRS COS, you must first clear the existing code.
When Walking TRS COS is used, Wxxxx (where xxxx is the user’s extension number) appears
in SMDR.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
7-45
Chapter 7. SLT Features
7-46
Section 700 - Operation
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Appendix A. ARS and TRS Operation
Introduction
This appendix provides an overview of the Toll Restriction Service (TRS) and Automatic
Route Selection (ARS) features that are available with the DBS 576 PBX.
• TRS provides the ability to block selected outgoing calls while allowing others.
• ARS automatically finds the lowest cost way to send out a call. This feature is
sometimes called Least Cost Routing (LCR).
With the DBS 576 system, it is possible to utilize TRS without ARS (called TRS) or to utilize
both TRS and ARS together (called ARS/TRS or simply ARS).
Once TRS is set up, it is automatic. Whenever a call is originated, the TRS tables are checked
to see if the call is restricted or not. This restriction is based on the originator and the number
dialed. Separate TRS classes are assigned for Day mode and Night mode.
ARS operates when ARS is enabled and the caller dials the first MCO Access Number
(usually 9). Direct trunk access and the second to fifth MCO Access numbers (usually 81 to
84) do not utilize ARS.
ARS use may be required based on the extension originating the call. This is enabled by the
Forced ARS extension setting.
The ARS feature is exceptionally flexible, depending on the implementation plan. Call
routing can consider the day of the year, day of the week, time of day, the originating
extension or trunk and the number dialed. If the preferred route is busy, up to 4 additional
routes can be considered. When all trunks in a call route are busy, the call can optionally be
queued to continue trying all trunks while moving to the additional routes.
Once the trunk group is selected, prefix digits can be deleted and digits added. In addition,
digits can be added as a suffix.
A high cost toll call warning can also be issued before connecting to a high cost trunk, giving
the caller an opportunity to terminate the call attempt before a higher cost connection is
established.
Both TRS and ARS/TRS utilize various tables that are linked together. These tables together
determine the TRS and ARS/TRS operation. Data must be collected determining the
customer’s needs, requirements and facilities. Then the data must be analyzed to organize a
TRS or ARS plan. This plan must then be implemented using the appropriate TRS or ARS/
TRS tables.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
A-1
Section 700 - Operation
Detailed Description
This section provides a description of the TRS and ARS options on the DBS 576 PBX.
TRS Features
TRS Class Features
Each trunk and extension is assigned to one of 50 TRS classes. Each TRS class is assigned a
Day TRS level and a Night TRS level for each Trunk group. This assigned origination party
TRS level is compared to the restriction TRS Level determined by the dialed number. If the
Origination Party TRS level is not higher than the restriction party TRS level, the call is
denied.
In addition, each TRS class is assigned settings such as Outgoing Dial Digit Restriction,
Incoming Dialing Restriction, Outgoing SSD Dialing Restriction, and * and # Dialing
Restriction.
Outgoing Dialed Digit Maximum
This TRS Class-based parameter sets the maximum number of digits that can be dialed for
outgoing calls in a TRS Class. The maximum number of digits can be set from 0-20. When
set to 0 (default), there is no restriction.
Dialing Restriction During Inbound Calls
Determines whether dialing during an incoming call is restricted on trunks in a TRS Class.
TRS Override on SSD Dialing
Determines whether SSD dialing will override TRS on extensions for a TRS Class.
Star (*) and Pound (#) Dialing Restriction
Determines if the * or # key can be used in dialing for a TRS Class.
TRS Level for Non-ARS Routing
For each of the 50 TRS classes, an originator’s TRS level of 0-9 may be assigned for each
possible trunk group. When a call is originated on a particular trunk group, this value is used
to determine the originator’s TRS level. From the dialed digits, a restriction TRS level (0-8)
is determined. If the originator’s TRS level does not exceed the restriction TRS level, the call
is restricted. The higher the originator’s TRS level, the less the restriction. If the originator’s
TRS level is 0, no outside calls are allowed. If the originator’s TRS level is 9, all outside calls
are allowed since this always exceeds the restriction TRS value which has a maximum value
of 8.
Dialing Analysis
When a trunk is accessed, the dialed digits can be analyzed to determine if the call will be toll
restricted.
A-2
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Leading Digits Table
The leading digits table considers the initial dialed digits in determining the restriction TRS level.
Up to 10 digits can be considered. The digits may be any number 0, 1-9. In addition a wild card (*) may be used
to occupy any digit position. For instance *11 would consider the numbers 011, 111, 211, 311, 411, 511, 611,
711, 811, 911.
When considering the prefix string, the system will always consider the longest exact match first. For instance,
the prefix string 404 match would be followed before 40.
A wild card is always considered last. For instance if 911 were dialed and both 911 and *11 were prefix strings,
the 911 would be followed.
If additional digits need to be considered, a prefix ID can be used to cross-reference the Analyze Digits Table.
Once the system determines an exact match, the system will determine from this table the number of digits that
are to be dialed and the restriction TRS level. (There are two other entries in the Leading Digits Table - Route
Type and Route Number. These are not used for TRS-only operation.)
Note that TRS operation is a match then restrict feature. If there is no match, there is no restriction. Make
certain that there is a match. As a catch all, use the * wild card.
Note: With TRS is used in a system behind another PBX, the PBX access code does not have to be processed
by TRS
Analyze Digits Table
If the Leading Digits Table contains a Prefix ID, the system will consider all appearances of this Prefix ID to
look for an exact match. Up to 8 digits are considered (in addition to the prefix dial digits).
Once the system determines an exact match, the system determines from this table the number of digits that can
are expected to be dialed and the restriction TRS level. (There are two other entries in the Analyze Digits Table
- Route Type and Route Number. There are not used for TRS-only operation.)
ARS/TRS Features
When ARS is used in the DBS 576, TRS also operates.
TRS Class Features
These are the same features as for TRS (see above).
TRS Class - ARS Routing
TRS Level
For each of the 50 TRS classes, a TRS Level of 0-9 may be assigned. (This is not done on a Trunk group basis
since the ARS system determines the trunk group used.)
When a call is originated, this TRS value is used to determine the originator’s TRS level. From the dialed
digits, a restriction TRS level (0-8) is determined. If the originator’s TRS level does not exceed the restriction
TRS level, the call is restricted. The higher the originator’s TRS level, the less the restriction. If the originator’s
TRS level is 0, no outside calls are allowed. If the originator’s TRS level is 9, all outside calls are allowed since
this will always exceed the restriction TRS value (maximum of 8).
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
A-3
Section 700 - Operation
ARS Level
An ARS level is also assigned to each of the 50 TRS classes. This originator’s ARS value is used to determine
if the caller can proceed to use a particular priority route based on the associated ARS requirement in the Route
List (described later). The originator’s ARS value may be 0-9 where the higher number allows more calling
access.
Queuing Point
The Route List provides up to 5 route possibilities for handling a call. Each route is considered in a sequential
order. When the Queuing Point is set to operate, the system will search all previously considered routes and
then the current route for an available trunk for the Queuing time period.
Dialing Analysis
When ARS is active, the dialed digits can be analyzed to determine if the call is toll restricted and what type of
routing the call will follow.
Leading Digits Table
The leading digits table considers the initial dialed digits in determining the restriction TRS level and ARS
routing.
Up to 10 digits can be considered. The digits may be any number 0, 1-9. In addition a wild card (*) may be used
to occupy any digit position. For instance *11 would consider the numbers 011, 111, 211, 311, 411, 511, 611,
711, 811, 911.
When considering the prefix string, the system considers the longest exact match first. For instance, the prefix
string 404 match would be followed before 40.
A wild card is always considered last. For instance if 911 were dialed and both 911 and *11 were prefix strings,
the 911 would be followed.
If additional digits need to be considered, a prefix ID can be used to cross-reference the Analyze Digits Table.
Once the system determines an exact match, the system will determine from this table the number of digits that
are expected to be dialed and the restriction TRS level.
If the TRS level allows the call to proceed, then the route type and its associated pattern number (entry index
number) are followed. There are three possible route types; the Route Table, the Route List Table and the Time
List Table.
Analyze Digits Table
If the Leading Digits Table contains a Prefix ID, the system considers all appearances of this Prefix ID to look
for an exact match. Up to 8 digits are considered (in addition to the prefix dial digits).
Once the system determines an exact match, the system determines from this table the number of digits
expected to be dialed and the restriction TRS level.
If the TRS level allows the call to proceed, then the route type and its associated pattern number (entry index
number) are followed. There are three possible route types; the Route Table, the Route List Table and the Time
List Table.
A-4
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Time List Table
Time List Table is used when the time of day, the day of week or the date affects the desired route. The Time
List Table allows up to 50 patterns to be entered. Each pattern may specify up to five Route List patterns to
used based on the current time of day.
Up to four Time List tables may be used. The referenced time list table is determined by the Special Day Table
or the Day of Week Table. This is useful when rates change for certain days (such as weekend rates versus
weekday rates).
Route List Table
The Route List Table is used when there are multiple route possibilities. Up to 5 possible route table patterns
may be considered in sequential priority when attempting to find an available trunk. Before a route is tried, the
system compares the route ARS to the originator’s ARS level. If the route ARS exceeds the originator’s ARS,
the call processing will stop and the caller will receive busy tone.
When the call is first presented, the first priority route is tried. If there is no available trunk in the first route and
queuing point is not enabled the system continues to the next priority route, compares the ARS levels and if
acceptable checks for an available trunk. If no trunk is available, it will continue to the next priority trunk, and
so forth until all routes have been attempted.
If an available trunk is found and warning tone is enable, the system will first issue a warning tone to the caller
to allow the caller the opportunity to hang up before using a more expensive trunk.
If the queuing point is enabled, the system will wait for an available trunk (beginning with the first priority
trunk) until the queuing point timer expires before moving to the next possible route.
Route Table
The Route Table provides a simple trunk group selection and selects any digit dialing modification needed.
This table is directly referenced when there is only one route to use. It is also indirectly reference from the
Route List Table.
Digit Modify Table
Once a route is selected, the actual dialed digits can be changed based on the Digit Modify Table. Digits can be
deleted from the beginning of the number (such as removing an unneeded area code), digits can be added to the
beginning of the number (such as adding an area code or equal access number) and digits can be added to the
end of a number.
TRS Configuration and Operation
This section provides the following:
• An overview of the TRS operation.
• An example TRS configuration - This is a simple example intended to introduce TRS planning and
implementation. Example worksheets are included.
• Worksheets for planning and implementing a TRS plan.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
A-5
Section 700 - Operation
TRS Programming/Operation Overview
The purpose of TRS is to restrict outside call origination based on the number dialed and the originator.
As shown in Figure A-4 TRS Operation (Non-ARS) at the end of this appendix, up to 50 TRS Classes settings
are assigned. When a call is originated, several general settings for the originator are always considered:
• Digit Restriction - This is the maximum number of digits that can be dialed.
• Incoming Dialing Restriction - If this is enabled, an outside call cannot be originated during an
incoming call.
• Outgoing SSD Dialing Restriction - This determines if SSD dialing is allowed or not.
• Star (*) and Pound (#) Dialing Restriction - This determines if the * and # digits can be outdialed.
When a call is originated, the system determines the TRS class for the originator from either the Trunk Class
Assignments or the Extension Class Assignments. It then determines the originator TRS level for the trunk
group selected.
When the call is dialed, the system collects the digits and compares the leading digits to the leading digits table
entry. The system will look for the longest available exact match. A * may be entered as a wild card for any
digit position.
If an exact match is found, the system will look to see if there is a Prefix ID. If so, it will jump to the analyze
digits table. If not, the system will compare the entered TRS Restriction value to the call originator’s assigned
TRS level. If the originator’s TRS level is not greater than the Restriction TRS level, the call is denied.
Otherwise, the call is allowed to proceed.
A-6
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Figure A-1. TRS Flowchart
Extension or trunk
accesses trunk
System checks originating
ext. or trunk TRS Class
User dials digit
System checks class
assignment for TRS level
for this trunk group
Yes
System compares
dialed digit(s) to
Leading Digits
Table Prefix Dial
entries
No exact
match
Match
Is there a Prefix ID
entry in Leading
Digits Table?
Origination
TRS Level
Are additional
digits required
for match?
No
Allow call
No
Yes
Wait for user to
dial additional digit
Yes
System compares
additional digit(s) to
Analyze Digits Table
Prefix Dial entries
No Match
System checks Restriction
TRS Level in Leading Digit
Table
No
Match
Allow call
System checks Restriction
TRS Level in Analyze Digit
Table
Is Origination TRS
Level greater than
Restriction TRS Level?
Are additional
digits required
for match?
Yes
System outdials digit(s)
on trunk
Has the Max. # of
Following Digits been
outdialed?
No
No
Restrict call
576-36-700
System collects
additional digit
and outdials
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
A-7
Section 700 - Operation
If the analyze digits table is referenced by a Prefix ID, the system will consider at all entries with the Prefix ID
and analyze any additional digits dialed. The system will look for the longest exact match. If there is an exact
match, the system compares the entered TRS Restriction value to the call originator’s assigned TRS level. If the
Restriction value is equal to or greater than the originator’s TRS level, the call is denied. Otherwise, the call is
allowed to proceed.
Example TRS Configuration
As an example of setting up TRS, assume that XYZ Department Store is using the DBS 576 PBX.
Situation
This example installation has the following considerations:
• Only one tenant (one MCO tenant group operation)
• 75 retail floor store phones
• restricted to local telephone use only except for 1800, 1888 and calls to a city where a sister store
and many suppliers are located
• restrict special calling numbers (976, 1900, outside operator, etc.)
• public emergency numbers always allowed
• 40 general office phones
• long distance allowed during day mode
• restrict special calling numbers (976, 1900, outside operator, etc.)
• public emergency numbers always allowed
• 10 purchaser/buyer telephones
• no time restriction
• restrict special calling numbers (976, 1900, outside operator, etc.)
• public emergency numbers always allowed
• 25 executive office telephones
• no time restriction
• no calling restrictions
• 2 attendant group phones
• no restrictions during the day
• local calls only at night to prevent abuse
• 7 warehouse phones
• extension and public emergency numbers only
• Trunks 1-24 are in Trunk Group 1 and are to the local CO (exchange line) for local calls. In addition,
long distance carriers are accessed using these trunks.
A-8
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Implementation
The configuration of this system is described in the following steps:
1.
The system needs are listed in Table 1, “Example - User Needs Worksheet,” on page 10.
Most of the information is straight forward. The Day TRS and Night TRS classes are determined by
assigning consecutive Class numbers to each unique calling need. When a duplicate need is encountered,
the same class number is assigned.
The system trunk equipment is listed in Table 2, “Example - MCO Tenant/Trunk Groups Worksheet,” on
page 11.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
A-9
Section 700 - Operation
Table A-1. Example - User Needs Worksheet
Tenant Name XYZ Department Stores
Day Calling Needs
(Long Distance, 411,
specific number, etc.)
Tenant # 1 (1-72)
Day TRS
Classa
(1-50)
Night TRS
Classa
(1-50)
No Restrictions
1
1
No Restrictions except
special numbers (976, 1900,
411, operator access, collect
calls, etc.)
No Restrictions except
special numbers (976, 1900,
411, operator access, collect
calls, etc.)
2
2
1126-1165
Long Distance Allowed
No special numbers (976,
1900, 411, operator access,
collect calls, etc.)
Local calls only
No special numbers (976,
1900, 411, operator access,
collect calls, etc.)
Allowed to call City B
3
4
Attendant Group
1176-1177
No Restriction
Local calls only
No special numbers (976,
1900, 411, operator access,
collect calls, etc.)
Allowed to call City B
1
4
Retail floor
1178-1253
Local calls only
No special numbers (976,
1900, 411, operator access,
collect calls, etc.)
Allowed to call City B
Local calls only
No special numbers (976,
1900, 411, operator access,
collect calls, etc.)
Allowed to call City B
4
4
Warehouse
1254-1260
Extension calling and
emergency calling only
Extension calling and
emergency calling only
5
5
User Type
(office,
executive, lobby)
User Extension
(or Trunk) Ports
(BSSC) and
Numbers
Executive
1101-1125
No Restrictions
Buyers
1166 - 1175
General Office
Night Calling Needs
(Long Distance, 411,
specific number, etc.)
a. After all user data has been entered, then assign class numbers.
A-10
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Table A-2. Example - MCO Tenant/Trunk Groups Worksheet
Tenant Name XYZ Department Stores
Tenant Number
1
Trunk Group
Number (0-99)
Description
(Two-Way CO LS, Tie Line, FX,
etc.)
Trunks in Trunk Group (Number/BSSC)
Usage (MCO1 - Dial “9”,
MCO2 - dial “81”, Direct
Access Only, etc.)
1
Two-Way CO (Exchange Line)
Loop Start
1-24
MCO 1 - Dial “9”
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
A-11
Section 700 - Operation
2.
From the User Needs and Tenant Trunk Groups Worksheets, TRS levels are determined. This list is created
by reviewing the different calling needs and assigning the most restrictions to the lowest TRS level and
working up to the least restriction level.
Table A-3. Example - Origination TRS Level Plan
Originator
TRS Level
TRS Level Properties
9
No Restriction
8
7
6
5
4
All long distance calls allowed except special numbers (976, 1900, 411,
operator access, collect calls, etc.)
Allow public emergency numbers
3
North America long distance calls allowed except special numbers (976,
1900, 411, operator access, collect calls, etc.)
Allow public emergency numbers
2
Local Calls Allowed
No long distance or special numbers (976, 1900, 411, operator access,
collect calls, etc.)
Allow calls to (205) 555-XXXX, (205) 556-XXXX, and (205) 557-XXXX
Allow public emergency numbers
1
Public emergency numbers only
0
No Outside Calling/PBX Centrex & Extension only
A-12
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
3.
Next the Origination TRS Level is determined for each Trunk group per class.
Using Table 1, “Example - User Needs Worksheet,” on page 10, each unique origination class is
determined. Then using Table 3, “Example - Origination TRS Level Plan,” on page 12 the TRS level is
determined for each class. (If there were multiple trunk groups available, a TRS level would be assigned
for each trunk group for each class.)
Table A-4. Example - Origination TRS Class/Level Worksheet
Origination TRS Class
Number
User Type(s)
(Executive, Office,
loading dock)
Origination TRS Level (0-9)
Trunk Group
Trunk Group
Trunk Group
Trunk Group
Trunk Group
1
Description:
___
Description:
___
Description:
___
Description:
___
Description:
Used for all
outside calls.
1
Executive (Day/Night)
Attendant (Day
9
Buyer (Day/Night)
4
General Office (Day)
3
General Office (Night)
Attendant Group (Night)
Retail Floor (Day/Night)
2
Warehouse (Day/Night)
1
2
3
4
5
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
A-13
Section 700 - Operation
4.
Calls are screened by first considering the initial digits dialed. In this case, the first Prefix Dialed entry is a
1. This will look at any number that starts with 1. A * is available as a wild card. This represents any single
digit 1-9.
When prefix dial is being considered by the system, the system looks for the longest exact match first. The
system will consider a wildcard last. For instance, 911 is considered before *11 or even *. Notice also in
this example there are multiple entries that begin with 9.
If the leading digits are not enough to determine the handling of the call, then additional digits can be
considered by entering a Prefix ID that references entries in the Analyze Digits Table. Otherwise, the
Prefix ID is left blank and the additional items are considered.
In this example, we cross reference Prefix ID 1 in the Analyze Digits Table for any dialed number that
begins with 1. The remaining digits are analyzed in the Analyze Digits Table.
From Table 1, “Example - User Needs Worksheet,” on page 10 and Table 3, “Example - Origination TRS
Level Plan,” on page 12, the restriction levels are determined for each type of dialed call.
Route Type and Route Pattern Number are not used with TRS-only operation.
Table A-5. Example - Leading Digits Worksheet
Pattern
Number
(1-100)
Prefix Dial
(up to 10
digits)
1
1
2
3
4
5
Prefix ID
(Go to this
Prefix ID in
Analyze
Digits
Tables)
1
7
7
8
95
10
A-14
(Any
Origination TRS
at this level or
below will be
restricted)
Route Type
Route Table (0)
Route List (1)
Time List (2)
Route Pattern
Number
Route Table (1-200)
Route List (1-100)
or Time List (1-50)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
101****
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
10***
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
101
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
10
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
8
N/A
N/A
0
6
Number of
Following
Digits
Restriction
TRS Level
01
2
N/A
8
N/A
N/A
911
0
N/A
0
N/A
N/A
*11
0
N/A
4
N/A
N/A
976
0
N/A
4
N/A
N/A
*
0
N/A
1
N/A
N/A
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
5.
In this case, Prefix ID 1 links calls that have a dialed prefix of 1. Several entries are made to determine the
restriction TRS level and the Route Type. The call originator must have a Origination TRS Level
exceeding 1 for the call to be allowed. If any other analyze digits are dialed this would be covered by the
three * wildcards (***). In this case; the call originator must have a TRS level exceeding 2 for the call to
be allowed.
Table A-6. Example - Analyze Digits Worksheet
Digits to Analyze
Number of
Following
Digits
Pattern
Number
(1-500)
Prefix ID
1
20555*
(120555XXXXX)
N/A
1
1
***976
(1NXX976XXXX)
N/A
2
1
***5551212
(1NXX5551212)
N/A
3
1
800
(1800XXXXXXX)
N/A
4
1
888
(1888XXXXXXX)
N/A
5
1
900
(1900XXXXXXX)
N/A
6
1
***
(1NXXXXXX)
N/A
7
2
***
(0XXXX... - Collect
Call)
N/A
8
576-36-700
(in addition to the
leading digits)
Restriction
TRS Level
Route Type
Route Pattern
Number
Route Table (0)
Route List (1)
Time List (2)
Route Table (1-200)
Route List (1-100)
or Time List (1-50)
1
N/A
N/A
8
N/A
N/A
2
N/A
N/A
1
N/A
N/A
1
N/A
N/A
8
N/A
N/A
2
N/A
N/A
8
N/A
N/A
(Any
Origination
TRS at this level
or below will be
restricted)
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
A-15
Section 700 - Operation
ARS Configuration and Operation
This section provides the following:
• An overview of ARS.
• An example ARS configuration.
• Worksheets for planning and implementing an ARS plan.
ARS/TRS Programming/Operation Overview
The purpose of TRS is to restrict outside call origination based on the dialed number and the originator. The
purpose of ARS is to automatically select the lowest cost route available for a call based on the dialed number.
The system allows separate TRS operation or TRS operation concurrent with ARS operation.
TRS-only operation is described in the previous section of this appendix. The TRS portion of ARS/TRS works
in the same manner.
As shown in Figure A-5 “ARS/TRS Operation” found at the end of this appendix, up to 50 TRS/ARS Class
Settings are assigned. When a call is originated, several general settings for the originator are always
considered:
• Digit Restriction - This is the maximum number of digits that can be dialed.
• Incoming Dialing Restriction - If this is enabled, an outside call cannot be originated during an
incoming call.
• Outgoing SSD Dialing Restriction - This determines if SSD dialing is allowed or not.
• Star (*) and Pound (#) Dialing Restriction. - This determines if the * and # digits can be outdialed.
When a call is originated, the system determines the TRS/ARS Class for the originator from either the
Extension Class Assignments or the Trunk Class Assignments. It then determines the originator TRS level and
originator TRS level from the TRS/ARS Class Assignments. In addition, the Queuing Point continue parameter
setting is considered.
When the call is dialed, the system collects the digits and compares the leading digits to the leading digits table
entry. The system looks for the longest available exact match. A * may be entered as a wild card for any digit
position.
If an exact match is found, the system looks to see if there is a prefix ID. If so, it will jump to the analyze digits
table. If not, the system will compare the entered TRS Restriction value to the call originator’s assigned TRS
level. If the Restriction value is equal to or greater than the originator’s TRS level, the call is denied. Otherwise,
the Route Type and associated Pattern # are determined and the system jumps there.
A-16
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Figure A-2. ARS/TRS Flowchart Page 1 of 2
Systemchecks originating
ext. or trunk TRS Class
Extension or trunk dials first
MCOCode (usually "9")
Systemchecks class
assignment for TRS level
and ARS Level
User dials digit
Yes
Systemcompares
dialed digit(s) to
Leading Digits
Table Prefix Dial
entries
No exact
match
Match
No
Origination TRS
and ARS Level
Are additional
digits required
for match?
No
Deny call
Is there a Prefix ID
entry in Leading
Digits Table?
Yes
Yes
Systemcompares
additional digit(s) to
Analyze Digits Table
Prefix Dial entries
No Match
Are additional
digits required
for match?
No
Match
Deny call
Systemchecks Restriction
TRSLevel in Leading Digit
or Analyze Digit Table
Time
List Pattern
Is Origination TRS
Level greater than
Restriction TRS Level?
Yes
What Route
Type/Pattern
is entered?
Route
List Pattern
No
Restrict call
576-36-700
Route
Pattern
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
A-17
Section 700 - Operation
Figure A-3. ARS/TRS Flowchart Page 2 of 2
Time
List Pattern
Yes
Systemselects Time List
associated with Special Day
No
Systemselects Time List
associated with Day
of the Week
Is there an available
trunk in the listed
route?
Fromthe Time List Pattern
the systemdetermines the
active time period and its
associated Route List
Yes
No
Is the originator ARS
Level less than the first
priority ARSLevel
Route
List Pattern
Deny the call
Deny the call
Yes
No
Is there an available
trunk in the listed
route?
Yes
Is Warning Tone
enabled?
Yes
Issue Warning Tone
to call originator
No
No
Yes
Is Queuing Point
enabled?
Is there an available
trunk (beginning with
first priority route)?
Yes
Is there an associated
digit modify table entry?
Yes
Systemmodifies
outdialed digits
per Digit Modify
Table
No
No
No
No
Yes
Is this the last
Priority Level entry?
Yes
Has the Queuing
Timer expired?
Deny the call
Has the Max. # of
Following Digits
been outdialed?
No
Is the originator ARS
Level less than the next
priority ARSLevel
A-18
The systemconnects to
trunk and outdials all
collected digits
(modified as specified)
Systemcollects and
outdials a digit
No
Yes
Deny the call
Yes
No more digits
outdialed
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
If the analyze digits table is referenced by a prefix ID, the system will consider at all entries with the prefix ID
and analyze any additional digits dialed. The system looks for the longest exact match. If there is an exact
match, the system compares the entered TRS Restriction value to the call originator’s assigned TRS level. If the
Restriction value is equal to or greater than the originator’s TRS level, the call is denied. Otherwise, the route
type and associated pattern # are determined and the system jumps there.
Three route types are available. These include the Routing Table (a direct trunk group selection), the Route List
Table (a route priority consideration), and the Time List Table (selects a route list based on date, day of the
week, and time of day).
The simplest call routing method is the Route Table. This determines a trunk group to use and, if programmed,
a digits modification pattern to use. Up to 24 prefix digits may be deleted, up to 10 prefix digits can be added
and up to 10 suffix digits may be added.
If multiple trunk groups are to be considered for the call, the Route List Table is used. This table consists of up
to 5 possible routes and an associated ARS level required. If the ARS level for the first priority route is equal to
or less than the ARS level associated with the call originator, then the listed route will be tried. If the first listed
Route Table trunk group has no available trunks busy, then the next priority route is considered. If Queuing
Point is set to continue, then the first priority trunks are retried first before trying to a next priority route. If the
Warning Tone is enabled, then before a call is connected to a found trunk, a warning tone is sounded to allow
the caller to hang up before the more expensive trunks are used.
If time of day, day of week and day of the year need be considered in routing the call, then the Time List Table
should be referenced first. The Time List Table allows up to 50 patterns to be entered. Each pattern can specify
up to 5 route list patterns to used based on the current time of day.
Up to four time list tables may be used. The referenced time list table is determined by the Special Day Table or
the Day of Week Table. This is useful when rates change for certain days (such as weekend rates versus
weekday rates).
Example ARS Configuration
As an example of setting up ARS, assume that XYZ Department Store is based in City A and is using the DBS
576 PBX.
Situation
This example installation has the following considerations:
• 75 retail floor store phones
• restricted to local telephone use only except for 1800, 1888 and calls to another city where a
sister store and many suppliers are located
• restrict special calling numbers (976, 1900, outside operator, etc.)
• public emergency numbers allowed
• 40 general office phones
• long distance allowed during day mode
• restrict special calling numbers (976, 1900, outside operator, etc.)
• public emergency numbers allowed
• 10 purchaser/buyer telephones
• no time restriction
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
A-19
Section 700 - Operation
• restrict special calling numbers (976, 1900, outside operator, etc.)
• public emergency numbers allowed
• 25 executive office telephones
• no time restriction
• no calling restrictions
• 2 attendant group phones
• no restrictions during the day
• local calls only at night to prevent abuse
• 7 warehouse phones
• extension and public emergency numbers allowed
• Trunks 1-24 are in trunk group 1 and are to the local CO (exchange line) for local calls. In addition, long
distance carriers are accessed using these trunks by dialing the equal access codes. Long distance carrier
A (equal access code 101XXXX) is the least expensive carrier during the weekday times of 8 to 6. Long
distance carrier B is the least expensive long distance carrier during nights, weekends, and holidays.
• Trunks 25 and 26 are in trunk group 2 and are toll-free out-going trunks from Long Distance Carrier C.
These trunks are less expensive than either of the other long distance carrier lines.
• Trunks 27 and 28 are Foreign Exchange lines to a central office exchange in City B where a sister store
and several suppliers are located. These trunks are always preferred for any call to City B area code
with exchanges 555, 556, and 557.
A-20
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Figure A-4. Example System Configuration
101XXXX
Long Distance
Carrier A (less
expensive from
8 to 6)
Legacy System
Trunks
1-24
CO
101YYYY
Long Distance
Carrier B (less
expensive nights
and weekends)
75 Retail Floor Ext.
40 General Office Ext.
Toll-Free
Trunks 25, 26
(least expensive
long distance)
10 Buyer Ext.
25 Executive Ext.
2 Attendant Group Ext.
7 Warehouse Ext.
Foreign Exchange
Trunks 27, 28
(least expensive to City B)
CO
City B
(area code) 55X XXXX
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
A-21
Section 700 - Operation
Figure A-5. Example Foreign Exchange Lines From City A to City B
City A
City B
FX
In this case we have two Foreign Exchange (FX) lines to a City B Central Office Exchange. Using these lines are like dialing directly
from the City B exchange. We pay a flat fee for the FX line. There is no additional charge for calls to City B.
For this example, there are three office exchange numbers in City B (555, 556, and 557) that we want to be able to call that are local
calls. There are no other exchanges that begin with 55X.
Implementation
The configuration of this system is described in the following steps:
1.
The system needs are listed in Table 7, “Example - User Needs Worksheet,” on page 23.
Most of the information is straight forward. The Day TRS and Night TRS Classes are determined by
assigning consecutive Class numbers to each unique calling need. When a duplicate need is encountered,
the same class number is assigned.
The system trunk equipment is listed in Table 8, “Example - MCO Tenant/Trunk Groups Worksheet,” on
page 24.
A-22
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Table A-7. Example - User Needs Worksheet
Tenant Name XYZ Department Stores
Day Calling Needs
(Long Distance, 411,
specific number, etc.)
User Type
(office,
executive, lobby)
User Extension
(or Trunk) Ports
(BSSC) and
Numbers
Executive
1101-1125
No Restrictions
Buyers
1166 - 1175
General Office
Tenant # 1 (1-72)
Night Calling Needs
(Long Distance, 411,
specific number, etc.)
Day TRS
Classa
(1-50)
Night TRS
Classa
(1-50)
No Restrictions
1
1
No Restrictions except
special numbers (976, 1900,
411, operator access, collect
calls, etc.)
No Restrictions except
special numbers (976, 1900,
411, operator access, collect
calls, etc.)
2
2
1126-1165
Long Distance Allowed
No special numbers (976,
1900, 411, operator access,
collect calls, etc.)
Local calls only
No special numbers (976,
1900, 411, operator access,
collect calls, etc.)
Allowed to call City B
3
4
Attendant Group
1176-1177
No Restriction
Local calls only
No special numbers (976,
1900, 411, operator access,
collect calls, etc.)
Allowed to call City B
1
4
Retail floor
1178-1253
Local calls only
No special numbers (976,
1900, 411, operator access,
collect calls, etc.)
Allowed to call City B
Local calls only
No special numbers (976,
1900, 411, operator access,
collect calls, etc.)
Allowed to call City B
4
4
Warehouse
1254-1260
Extension calling and
emergency calling only
Extension calling and
emergency calling only
5
5
a. After all user data has been entered, then assign class numbers.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
A-23
Section 700 - Operation
Table A-8. Example - MCO Tenant/Trunk Groups Worksheet
Tenant Name XYZ Department Stores
Tenant Number
1
Trunk Group
Number (0-99)
Description
(Two-Way CO GS, Tie
Line, FX, etc.)
Trunks in Trunk Group
(Number/BSSC)
1
Local CO (Exchange Line)
Access
1-24
Local, access to long distance carriers A (least
cost Day carrier) and B (least cost night and
weekend carrier) via equal access numbers
2
Foreign Exchange lines to
City B
25, 26
Foreign Exchange lines for calls to City B area
code and exchanges 555, 556, and 557.
3
Toll-free outgoing numbers
27, 28
Toll-free service to the complete US. Less
expensive than carriers A and B
A-24
Usage Notes
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
2.
From the User Needs and Tenant Trunk Groups Worksheets, TRS levels are determined. This list is
created by reviewing the different calling needs and assigning the most restrictions to the lowest TRS level
and working up to the least restriction level.
Table A-9. Example - Origination TRS Level Plan
Originator
TRS Level
TRS Level Properties
9
No Restriction
8
7
6
5
4
All long distance calls allowed except special numbers (976, 1900, 411,
operator access, collect calls, etc.)
Allow public emergency numbers
3
North America long distance calls allowed except special numbers (976,
1900, 411, operator access, collect calls, etc.)
Allow public emergency numbers
2
Local Calls Allowed
No long distance or special numbers (976, 1900, 411, operator access,
collect calls, etc.)
Allow calls to (205) 555-XXXX, (205) 556-XXXX, and (205) 557-XXXX
Allow public emergency numbers.
1
Public emergency numbers only
0
No Outside Calling
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
A-25
Section 700 - Operation
3.
From the User Needs and Tenant Trunk Groups Worksheets, ARS levels are determined. This list is
created by reviewing the different calling needs and assigning the least cost access levels to the lowest
ARS level and working up to the highest cost ARS level.
Table A-10. Example - Origination ARS Level Plan
Originator
ARS Level
9
ARS Level Properties
Full ARS Access
8
7
6
5
4
A-26
3
In addition to ARS levels 0-2 access, allows high cost long distance trunk
access.
2
In addition to ARS levels 0 and 1 access, allows medium cost long distance
trunk access
1
In addition to ARS levels 0 access, allows local call access
0
Allows City B (sister store) FX ARS access only
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
4.
Next the Origination TRS and ARS level and queuing point enable/disable operation is determined for
each class.
Using Table 7, “Example - User Needs Worksheet,” on page 23, each unique origination class is listed.
Using Table 9, “Example - Origination TRS Level Plan,” on page 25 the TRS Level is determined for each
class. Using Table 8, “Example - MCO Tenant/Trunk Groups Worksheet,” on page 24 and Table 10,
“Example - Origination ARS Level Plan,” on page 26, the ARS level is determined for each class.
In this example, we enable Queuing Point so that the system will continuously check for the availability of
a lower cost trunk before selecting a higher cost trunk.
Table A-11. Example - Origination TRS/ARS Class to Level Worksheet
Origination TRS Class
Class
Number
1
Origination TRS/ARS Level (0-9)
User Type(s)
(Executive, Office,
loading dock)
TRS Level
ARS Level
Queuing Point
Continue?
Executive (Day/Night)
Attendant (Day)
9
3
Y
Buyers (Day/Night)
4
3
Y
General Office (Day)
3
2
Y
General Office (Night)
Attendant Group (Night)
Retail Floor (Day/Night)
2
1
Y
Warehouse (Day/Night)
1
0
Y
2
3
4
5
Calls are screened by examining the initial digits dialed. A * is available as a wild card. This represents
any single digit 1 to 9.
When prefix dial is being considered by the system, the system looks for the longest exact match first. The
system considers a wildcard last.
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
A-27
Section 700 - Operation
5.
Calls are screened by first considering the initial digits dialed. In this case, the first Prefix Dialed entry is a
1. This will look at any number that starts with 1. A * is available as a wild card. This represents any single
digit 1-9.
When prefix dial is being considered by the system, the system looks for the longest exact match first. The
system considers a wildcard last. For instance, 911 is considered before *11 or even *. Notice also in this
example there are multiple entries that begin with 9.
If the leading digits needed are to determine the handling of the call, then additional digits can be
considered by entering a Prefix ID that references entries in the Analyze Digits Table. Otherwise, the
Prefix ID is left blank and the additional items are considered.
In this example, we cross reference Prefix ID 1 in the Analyze Digits table for any dialed number that
begins with 1 and Prefix ID 2 for any dialed number that begins with 0. The remaining digits are analyzed
in the Analyze Digits Table.
From Table 7, “Example - User Needs Worksheet,” on page 23 and Table 9, “Example - Origination TRS
Level Plan,” on page 25, the restriction levels are determined for each type of dialed call.
We determine the Route Type depending on the type of call. If the time and or day impacts the cost, then
the time list is used. If the time is not a factor, but multiple trunk groups could be used, then the Route List
is used. If a specific trunk should be used, then we directly reference the Route Table.
Table A-12. Example - Leading Digits Worksheet
Pattern
Number
Prefix
Dial
(1-100)
(up to 10
digits)
1
1
2
101****
3
10***
4
01
5
0*
6
0
7
911
8
*11
9
976
10
*
A-28
Prefix ID
(Go to this
Prefix ID in
Analyze Digits
Tables)
Number of
Following
Digits
1
1
1
2
2
NA
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Restriction
TRS Level
Route Type
Route Pattern
Number
(Any Origination
TRS at this level or
below will be
restricted)
Route Table (0)
Route List (1)
Time List (2)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
8
N/A
N/A
N/A
0
Route Table (0)
1
N/A
4
Route Table (0)
1
N/A
4
Route Table (0)
1
N/A
1
Route Table (0)
1
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
Route Table (1-200)
Route List (1-100)
or Time List (1-50)
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
6.
In this case, Prefix ID 1 links calls that have a dialed prefix of 1. Several entries are made to determine the
restriction TRS level and the Route Type. The call originator must have a Origination TRS Level
exceeding 1 for the call to be allowed. If any other analyze digits are dialed this would be covered by the
three * wildcards (***). In this case; the call originator must have a TRS level exceeding 2 for the call to
be allowed.
Table A-13. Example - Analyze Digits Worksheet
Pattern
Number
(1-500)
Prefix
ID
Restriction
TRS Level
Digits to
Analyze (in
Number of
Following
Digits
addition to the
leading digits)
(Any
Origination
TRS at this
level or below
will be
restricted)
Route Type
Route Pattern
Number
Route Table (0)
Route List (1)
Time List (2)
Route Table (1-200)
Route List (1-100) or
Time List (1-50)
1
1
20555*
(120555XXXXX)
1
Time List (2)
1
2
1
***976
(1NXX976XXXX)
8
Time List (2)
2
3
1
***5551212
(1NXX5551212)
2
Route Table (0)
1
4
1
800
(1800XXXXXXX)
1
Route Table (0)
1
5
1
888
(1888XXXXXXX)
1
Route Table (0)
1
6
1
900
(1900XXXXXXX)
8
Route Table (0)
1
7
1
***
(1NXXXXXX)
2
Time List (2)
2
8
2
8
Time List (2)
3
576-36-700
***
(0XXXX... Collect Call)
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
A-29
Section 700 - Operation
7.
If call routing varies by day of week or special day, then separate time lists must be prepared. In this
example, weekday call routing varies from weekends and holidays. Therefore two time list tables are
completed. When a call is made, the system will check to see if this is a special day listed in a Time List
Table. If so, it will use that table. If not, then it will check the day of week and use the associated table.
On weekdays, we know that Carrier B is less expensive from midnight (0000) to 7:59am and from 6pm
(1800) to midnight). Carrier A is less expensive from 8am (0800) to 1759).
We then reference a route list pattern for each call entry.
Table A-14. Example -Time List Table 1
Time List Table 1
Day Of Week: Sun
Mon X Tue X Wed X Thu X Fri X Sat
Special Days ___________________________________________________________
Time List
Pattern
Number
(1-500)
Time Period 1
Time Period 2
Time Period 3
Start
Time
Route
List #
Start
Time
Route
List #
Start
Time
Route
List #
1
0000
1
0800
2
1800
1
2
0000
3
0800
4
1800
3
3
0000
5
0800
6
1800
5
Time Period 4
Start
Time
Route
List #
Time Period 5
Start
Time
Route
List #
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A-30
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
On weekends, the time of day is not a cost factor. Therefore there is only one time period used.
Table A-15. Example -Time List Table 2
Time List Table 2
Day Of Week: Sun X
Special Days:
Time List
Pattern
Number
(1-500)
Mon ___ Tue ___
Wed ___
Thu ___
Fri ___
Sat X
0101, 0704, 1127, 1225
Time Period 1
Start
Time
Route
List #
1
0000
1
2
0000
3
3
0000
5
Time Period 2
Start
Time
Route
List #
Time Period 3
Start
Time
Route
List #
Time Period 4
Start
Time
Route
List #
Time Period 5
Start
Time
Route
List #
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
A-31
Section 700 - Operation
8.
Each Route List Pattern consists of a one or more trunk groups in sequence to check for an available trunk.
Before a route is considered, the required ARS level is compared to the originator’s ARS level. If the
originator’s ARS level is greater than or equal to the required ARS level, the trunk group listed for the
route will be searched for an available trunk. If no trunk is found, the system will attempt to use the next
priority route.
In this example for Pattern 1, the system will first compare the Priority 1 ARS level for the call. If it is
determined that the ARS level is acceptable, the system looks at the route # 4 (FX trunk group). If there is
an available trunk, the system completes the call. If no FX trunk is available during the queuing time, the
system checks the ARS level for Priority 2. If acceptable, since Queuing Point is enabled the system will
first attempt to find an available Priority 1 trunk, and then attempt to find a Priority 2 toll-free trunk. If a
Priority 2 trunk is found, the system will first check to see if Warning Tone is set to Yes. In this example,
there is no warning tone. If Yes, the system would issue a warning tone to the user before connecting the
trunk to allow the caller to hang up before using the higher cost trunk. This process is repeated if necessary
for the Priority 3 - Long Distance Carrier B and then Priority 4 - Long Distance Carrier A.
Table A-16. Example - Route List Table
Route List Table
NO
2
Day
2
4
FX
1
5
TollFree
2
NO
2
Day
3
NO
3
Night
3
5
TollFree
2
3
Night
3
NO
2
Day
3
NO
4
5
TollFree
2
2
Day
3
NO
3
Night
3
NO
5
3
Night
2
2
Day
3
NO
5
2
Day
2
3
Night
3
NO
A-32
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3
No
576-36-700
Warning Tone
3
ARS Level
3
Night
Route #
NO
Warning Tone
2
Priority 5
ARS Level
5
TollFree
Route #
1
Route #
4
FX
ARS Level
1
Route #
Warning Tone
Priority 4
ARS Level
Priority 3
Route Table
Priority 2
Warning Tone
Priority 1
ARS Level
Route List
Pattern
Number
(1-500)
Section 700 - Operation
9.
In this example, there are only 5 route patterns needed. The first three use the same trunks to the local CO.
The first pattern does not modify the dialed digits. The second pattern uses the Digit Modify Pattern to add
the Equal Access Code prefix for Long Distance Carrier A (preferred in the day time). The third pattern
uses the Digit Modify Pattern to add the Equal Access Code prefix for Long Distance Carrier B (preferred
at night and on week ends).
The fourth pattern selects the FX lines to City B and selects a digit modify pattern that removes the first 4
digits dialed (1205) so that the call originates at the CO (Exchange Line) as a local call.
The fifth pattern selects the toll-free outgoing trunks. No digit modification is required for these trunks.
Table A-17. Example - Route Table
Route Pattern #
1
Digit Modify Pattern #
Trunk Group
0 (not modified), 1-50
1 - Local CO (Exchange Line)
0
2
3
4
1 - Local CO to Carrier “A” (Day preferred)
(101XXXX)
1
1 - Local CO (Exchange Line) to Carrier “B”
(Night/Weekend preferred (101YYYY)
2
2 - FX to City B
3
5
3 - Outgoing toll-free numbers
0
Table A-18. Example - Digit Modify Table Route Table
Delete Digits
Add Digits
Add Digits
(Prefix, up to 24 digits)
(Prefix, up to 10)
(Suffix, up to 10)
1
0
101XXXX
-
2
0
101YYYY
-
3
4
-
-
Digit Modify Pattern #
576-36-700
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
A-33
Section 700 - Operation
A-34
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Index
Index
A
About User Programming 4-2
Absence Message
DSLT 6-3
Key Telephone 5-4
Message No. and Text
Key Telephone 5-5
SLT 7-3
Absence Messages
Setting 4-3
Access Codes
MCO Trunk
DSLT 6-51
Key Telephone 5-97
SLT 7-43
Access Groups
Trunks 3-58
Account Codes
DSLT 6-5
Key Telephone 5-6
Non-Verified
Key Telephone 5-7
SLT 7-5
Non-Verified ID
DSLT 6-6
SLT 7-4
Verified ID
DSLT 6-6
Key Telephone 5-7
SLT 7-5
ACD (Automatic Call Distributor) 3-5
AEC Disconnet 3-4
Alarm Ringing 3-54
Alpha Tagging
Caller ID 3-11
Analog Device Capability
Extension Interface 3-31
Analyze Digits Table A-3, A-4
ANSWER Key 5-51
Answer Supervision for Voice Mail (Third Party) 3-60
Architecture
Non-Blocking 3-48
ARS (Automatic Route Selection) 3-6
ARS and TRS Operation A-1
ARS Configuration and Operation A-16
ARS Level A-4
ARS/TRS Features A-3
ARS/TRS Programming/Operation Overview A-16
Attendant
576-36-700
Attendant Reversion 3-46
Network Centralized 3-46
Attendant Group Calls
DSLT 6-7
Key Telephone 5-9
SLT 7-7
Attendant Groups 3-4
Auto Repeat Dial
DSLT 6-8
Key Telephone 5-9
Automatic Call Distributor (ACD) 3-5
Automatic Call Waiting
Camp-on
DSLT 6-26
Key Telephone 5-35
SLT 7-23
Automatic Day/Night Mode 3-27
Automatic Route Selection A-1
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 3-6
Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer
System 3-7
B
Background Music
DSLT 6-9
Key Telephone 5-10
System 3-7
Background Music/MOH Separation
System 3-7
Backup
Battery 3-8
Memory 3-38
Battery Backup 3-8
BGM/MOH Separation 3-7
Blocking Outgoing Audio
Mute Function 5-67
Box
Door 3-29
Broker’s Hold
DSLT 6-18
Key Telephone 5-21
SLT 7-15
Building Block Expansion Capability 3-8
Built-In Voice Mail Unit 3-9
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Delayed Ringing 3-53
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Ringing 3-53
Busy Override
DSLT 6-10
Key Telephone 5-11
SLT 7-7
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
I-1
Index
Section 700 - Operation
C
Call Forward Busy Destination Extension
Setting 4-5
Call Forward ID Code
Voice Mail (Third Party) 3-61
Call Forward ID Codes for Voice Mail
Setting 4-6
Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension
Setting 4-7
Call Forwarding
All Calls
DSLT 6-12
Key Telephone 5-14
SLT 7-9
Busy
DSLT 6-13
Key Telephone 5-15
SLT 7-10
Do-Not-Disturb
DSLT 6-15
Key Telephone 5-17
SLT 7-12
DSLT 6-12
Key Telephone 5-14
No Answer
DSLT 6-14
Key Telephone 5-16
SLT 7-11
SLT 7-9
Call Hold
Broker’s Hold
DSLT 6-18
Key Telephone 5-21
SLT 7-15
Call Park
DSLT 6-19
Key Telephone 5-21
SLT 7-16
DSLT 6-15
Exclusive Hold
DSLT 6-17
Key Telephone 5-20
SLT 7-15
Floating Hold
DSLT 6-16
Key Telephone 5-19
SLT 7-14
Key Telephone 5-18
SLT 7-13
System Hold
DSLT 6-16
Key Telephone 5-18
I-2
SLT 7-13
Call Park
DSLT 6-19
Key Telephone 5-21
SLT 7-16
Call Pickup
DSLT 6-20
Extension Direct Pickup
DSLT 6-22
Key Telephone 5-25
SLT 7-19
Extension Group Pickup
DSLT 6-20
Key Telephone 5-24
SLT 7-18
Key Telephone 5-23
SLT 7-18
Trunk Direct Pickup
DSLT 6-23
Key Telephone 5-26
SLT 7-20
Trunk Group Pickup
DSLT 6-22
Key Telephone 5-26
SLT 7-20
Call Progress Tones 3-10
Call Records
SMDR 3-55
Call Routing
Network 3-46
Call Transfer
DSLT 6-23
Key Telephone 5-27
Network 3-46
SLT 7-21
Supervised
DSLT 6-23
Key Telephone 5-27
SLT 7-21
Unsupervised
DSLT 6-24
Key Telephone 5-28
SLT 7-21
Call Waiting
(Automatic) Camp-on
DSLT 6-26
Key Telephone 5-35
SLT 7-23
(Manual) Camp-on
DSLT 6-26
Key Telephone 5-35
SLT 7-23
Camp-on
DSLT 6-26
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Key Telephone
SLT 7-23
Index
5-34
Callback
Message Key 5-65
Message Waiting
DSLT 6-34
Key Telephone 5-65
SLT 7-29
Callback Request
DSLT 6-11
Key Telephone 5-12
SLT 7-8
Caller ID
Call Log
Key Telephone 5-30
Setting Logging Extensions 4-8
Caller ID Alpha Tagging 3-11
Caller ID Call Log
Key Telephone 5-30
Caller ID Logging Extensions
Setting 4-8
Calling
Network Extension 3-46
Camping on Busy Extension
Call Transfer
DSLT 6-25
Key Telephone 5-29
SLT 7-22
Camp-on (Call Waiting)
Automatic
DSLT 6-26
Key Telephone 5-35
SLT 7-23
DSLT 6-26
Key Telephone 5-34
Manual
DSLT 6-26
Key Telephone 5-35
SLT 7-23
SLT 7-23
Centrex/PBX Compatibility 3-12
Changing Display Contrast
Display Information 5-45
Circular Hunt Group 3-35
Class of Service
Walking TRS
DSLT 6-53
Key Telephone 5-103
SLT 7-45
Class of Service - Ext/Ext Restriction 3-13
Class of Service - Extension (Station) Timers 3-16
Class of Service - Extension Feature 3-13
Class of Service - Trunk to Trunk Restriction 3-16
Class of Service - Trunk/Tie 3-12
576-36-700
Class of Service (COS) 3-12
CO Line Key Trunk Access 5-95
CO Ringing
DID Day/Night 3-52
Ringing Modes 3-51
CO Ringing Mode
Alarm Ringing 3-54
BLF Delayed Ringing 3-53
BLF Ringing 3-53
Day 3-51
Delayed Ringing 3-52
DID Delayed Ringing 3-52
Slide Ringing 3-53
CO Ringing Types 3-17
DID Ringing 3-17
DIL 3-18
DISA 3-20
Multiple Ringing 3-20
CO Trunk Interface 3-20
CO Trunk Interface - DID 3-21
CO Trunk Interface - ISDN BRI 3-21
CO Trunk Interface - ISDN PRI 3-22
CO Trunk Interface - Loop Start 3-22
CO Trunk Interface -Ground Start 3-21
Compatibility
Centrex/PBX 3-12
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Capability 3-22
Conference Calls
Busy Override
DSLT 6-10
Key Telephone 5-11
SLT 7-7
DSLT 6-27
Key Telephone 5-37
SLT 7-24
Connection
Tandem 3-47
Console
DSS/72 5-48
EM/24 5-48
COS
Extension
Enable/Disable Features 3-14
Trunk
Enable/Disable Features 3-13
COS - Ext/Ext Restriction 3-13
COS - Extension (Station) Timers 3-16
COS - Extension Feature 3-13
COS - Trunk to Trunk Restriction 3-16
COS - Trunk/Tie 3-12
COS (Class of Service) 3-12
CTI Capability 3-22
Customizing Tool 3-50
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
I-3
Index
Section 700 - Operation
D
Data Security
System 3-23
Date
Setting 4-31
Day
Setting 4-31
Day Mode
Automatic 3-27
Day, Day 2 3-24
Manual 3-25
Day of Week Mode
Addresses 4-10
Setting 4-9
Day Ringing 3-51
Day/Night Mode
Automatic 3-27
Manual 3-25
Day/Night System Mode
System 3-24
Daylight Saving Time 3-23
Delayed Ringing 3-52
Devices
Programming 3-50
Dial Pad
Hot
Key Telephone 5-58
Dialing
Onhook
DSLT 6-37
Key Telephone 5-74
Dialing Analysis A-2, A-4
Dialing Restriction During Inbound Calls A-2
DID Trunk Interface 3-21
DID/DNIS/DDI Voice Mail ID Code (Third Party) 3-61
Digit Modify Table A-5
Digital Key Line Telephone (DSLT) Features
Attendant Group Calls 6-7
Digital Key Telephones
Extension Interface 3-31
Digital Pad 3-27
Digital Pad Class 3-27
Digital Single Line Telehphone (DSLT) Features
Conference Calls 6-27
Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT) 6-3
Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT) Features
Absence Message 6-3
Account Codes 6-5
Auto Repeat Dial 6-8
Background Music 6-9
Busy Override 6-10
Call Forwarding 6-12
I-4
Call Hold 6-15
Call Pickup 6-20
Call Transfer 6-23
Callback Request 6-11
Camp-on (Call Waiting) 6-26
Do-Not-Distrub (DND) 6-29
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion 6-30
Flash Signal 6-31
Hot Line 6-32
Intercom Calling 6-32
Last Number Redial 6-33
Message Waiting/Callback 6-34
Offhook Signaling 6-35
Offhook Voice Announce 6-36
Onhook Dialing 6-37
Paging
Meet-Me Answer 6-38
Reset Call 6-39
Speed Dialing 6-42
Station Lockout 6-47
Timed Reminder 6-49
Trunk Access 6-50
Trunk Queuing 6-51
Universal Night Answer (UNA) to Page 6-52
Walking TRS Class of Service 6-53
DIL Delayed Incoming Ring Enhancement 3-19
DIL Ringing
Distinguishing Between Incoming Calls 3-18
Direct In Line (DIL) Ringing
CO Ringing Types 3-18
Direct Inward Dial (DID) Day/Night Ringing 3-52
Direct Inward Dial (DID) Delayed Ringing 3-52
Direct Inward Dial (DID) Ringing
CO Ringing Types 3-17
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
System 3-28
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ringing
CO Ringing Types 3-20
Direct Line Appearances 5-63
Direct Trunk Access
DSLT 6-50
Key Telephone 5-95
SLT 7-42
Directory Numbers
Key Telephone 5-39
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) 3-28
Disconnect Signal
Voice Mail (Third Party) 3-62
Display Contrast
Chaning 5-45
Display Information
Changing Display Contrast 5-45
Key Telephone 5-43
Large-Display Phone 5-44
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Index
Small-Display Phone 5-45
Distinctive Ringing 3-29
Distributed Hunt Group 3-34
DND (Do-Not-Disturb)
DSLT 6-29
Key Telephone 5-46
SLT 7-25
Do-Not-Distrub (DND)
DSLT 6-29
Key Telephone 5-46
Do-Not-Disturb
Call Forwarding
DSLT 6-15
Key Telephone 5-17
SLT 7-12
Do-Not-Disturb (DND)
SLT 7-25
Door Box 3-29
Door Box Sensor 3-30
Door Phone 3-29
DP
Signal Conversion
DSLT 6-30
Key Telephone 5-47
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion
DSLT 6-30
Key Telephone 5-47
DP/DTMF Single Line Telephones (SLTs)
Extension Interface 3-32
DSLT (DIgital Single Line Telephone (DSLT)
Illustration 6-3
DSLT Features 6-1
DSS/72 Console 5-48
DSS/BLF Appearances 5-61
DTMF
Signal Conversion
DSLT 6-30
Key Telephone 5-47
E
EM/24 Console 5-48
Example ARS Configuration A-19
Example TRS Configuration A-8
Exception Day Mode
Setting 4-11
Exclusive Hold
DSLT 6-17
Key Telephone 5-20
SLT 7-15
Expansion Capability 3-8
Extension
Set Call Forward Busy Destination
576-36-700
Set Call Forward No Answer Destination 4-7
Extension (Station) Timers
Class Assignment 3-17
Extension Calling 3-46
Extension COS
Enable/Disable Features 3-14
Extension Direct Pickup
DSLT 6-22
Key Telephone 5-25
SLT 7-19
Extension Feature COS 3-13
Extension Group Pickup
All Calls
DSLT 6-20
Key Telephone 5-24
SLT 7-18
DSLT 6-20
External Calls
DSLT 6-20
Key Telephone 5-24
SLT 7-18
Key Telephone 5-24
SLT 7-18
Specified Group Pickup
DSLT 6-20
Key Telephone 5-24
SLT 7-18
Extension Inferface
Analog Device Capability 3-31
DP/DTMF Single Line Telephones (SLTs) 3-32
Extension Interface 3-31
Digital Key Telephones
System 3-31
ISDN/BRI S-Point Interface 3-32
ISDN/PRI S-Point Interface 3-32
Extension Name Assignment
Large-Display Phone Example 3-41
Small-Display Phone Example 3-42
Extension Name Assignments 3-40
Extension Names
Setting 4-13
Extension Restriction COS 3-13
Extension Timers 3-16
F
4-5
Facilities
Network 3-45
Feature Access Codes
FF Key Assignment 5-52
FF Key Assignment
Feature Access Codes 5-52
FF Key Extender
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
I-5
Index
DSS/72 5-48
EM/24 5-48
FF Keys 5-49
Flash Send
SLT 7-27
Flash Signal
DSLT 6-31
Key Telephone 5-49
Flash Transfer
Network 3-47
Flexible Function Keys 5-49
Flexible Numbering Plan 3-33
Flexible Slot
Free Slot 3-33
Floating Hold
DSLT 6-16
Key Telephone 5-19
SLT 7-14
Virtual 3-59
Forwarding
All Calls
DSLT 6-12
Key Telephone 5-14
SLT 7-9
Busy
DSLT 6-13
Key Telephone 5-15
SLT 7-10
Do-Not-Disturb
DSLT 6-15
Key Telephone 5-17
SLT 7-12
DSLT 6-12
Key Telephone 5-14
No Answer
DSLT 6-14
Key Telephone 5-16
SLT 7-11
SLT 7-9
Free Slot 3-33
G
Ground Start Trunk Interface 3-21
Groups
Hunt Group
Circular 3-35
Next Extension 3-35
Pilot Distributed 3-34
Pilot Terminal 3-34
Switch Back 3-34
Hunting 3-33
MCO Tenant Group 3-38
I-6
Section 700 - Operation
Trunk Access 3-58
H
Handset
Mute Function 5-67
Handsfree
Answerback
Key Telephone 5-56
Operation
Key Telephone 5-57
Handsfree Answerback
Key Telephone 5-56
Handsfree Operation
Key Telephone 5-57
Headset
Operation
Key Telephone 5-57
Headset Operation
Key Telephone 5-57
High Priority Message Waiting
Voice Mail (Third Party) 3-62
Hold
Broker’s Hold
DSLT 6-18
Key Telephone 5-21
SLT 7-15
Exclusive Hold
DSLT 6-17
Key Telephone 5-20
SLT 7-15
Floating Hold
DSLT 6-16
Key Telephone 5-19
SLT 7-14
Internal Hold Tone 3-36
Music 3-39
Network 3-47
System Hold
DSLT 6-16
Key Telephone 5-18
SLT 7-13
Hot Dial Pad
Key Telephone 5-58
Hot Line
DSLT 6-32
Key Telephone 5-59
Hunt Group
Circular 3-35
Next Extension 3-35
Pilot Distributed 3-34
Pilot Terminal 3-34
Switch Back 3-34
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Index
Call Transfer 5-27
Callback Request 5-12
Caller ID Call Log 5-30
Camp-on (Call Waiting) 5-34
Conference Calls 5-37
Directory Numbers 5-39
Display Information 5-43
Do-Not-Distrub (DND) 5-46
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion 5-47
FF Keys 5-49
Flash Signal 5-49
Handsfree Answerback 5-56
Handsfree Operation 5-57
Headset Operation 5-57
Hot Dial Pad 5-58
Hot Line 5-59
Intercom Calling 5-59
Last Number Redial 5-60
Line Appearances 5-61
Message Key 5-65
Message Waiting/Callback 5-65
Mute Function 5-67
Offhook Monitor 5-68
Offhook Signaling 5-68
Offhook Voice Announce 5-69
One-Touch Keys 5-72
Onhook Dialing 5-74
Paging
Meet-Me Answer 5-74
Reset Call 5-76
Ringing Line Preference 5-76
Speed Dialing 5-81
Station Lockout 5-91
Timed Reminder Call 5-93
Trunk Access 5-94
Trunk Queuing 5-97
Universal Night Answer (UNA) to Page
Variable Mode 5-99
Voice Recognition 5-101
Volume Control 5-102
Walking TRS Class of Service 5-103
Zip Mode 5-104
Hunting Groups
System 3-33
I
ID Codes
Setting 4-6
Intercom Calling
DSLT 6-32
Key Telephone 5-59
SLT 7-28
Tone Calling
DSLT 6-32
Key Telephone 5-59
SLT 7-28
Voice Calling
DSLT 6-32
Key Telephone 5-59
SLT 7-28
Interface
Extension 3-31
ISDN/BRI 3-32
ISDN/PRI 3-32
Trunk 3-20
Internal Hold Tone
System 3-36
ISDN BRI Trunk Interface 3-21
ISDN Lines
QSIG 3-50
ISDN PRI Trunk Interface 3-22
ISDN/BRI S-Point Interface
Extension Interface 3-32
ISDN/PRI S-Point Interface
Extension Interface 3-32
K
Key
ANSWER 5-51
RELEASE 5-51
Key Telephone
Illustration 5-4
Key Telephone Features 5-1
Absence Message 5-4
Account Codes 5-6
Attendant Group Calls 5-9
Auto Repeat Dial 5-9
Background Music 5-10
Busy Override 5-11
Call Forwarding 5-14
Call Hold 5-18
Call Pickup 5-23
576-36-700
5-98
L
LAN TAPI 3-36
Large-Display Phone
Display Information 5-44
Example
Assigning Extension Names
Setting PSD Names 4-19
Main Menu Example 5-44
Last Number Redial
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
3-41
I-7
Index
DSLT 6-33
Key Telephone 5-60
SLT 7-29
Leading Digits Table A-3, A-4
Least Cost Routing A-1
Line Appearances
Direct Line Appearances 5-63
DSS/BLF Appearances 5-61
Key Telephone 5-61
Multi-CO (MCO) 5-63
List of features 2-1
Loop Start Trunk Interface 3-22
M
Maintenance
Power On 3-49
User 4-1
Manual Call Waiting
Camp-on
DSLT 6-26
Key Telephone 5-35
SLT 7-23
Manual Day/Night Mode 3-25
MCO Line Preference
Trunk Access 5-96
MCO Tenant Group 3-38
MCO Trunk Access
DSLT 6-50
Key Telephone 5-96
SLT 7-42
MCO Trunk Access Codes
DSLT 6-51
Key Telephone 5-97
SLT 7-43
Meet-Me Answer
Paging
DSLT 6-38
Key Telephone 5-74
SLT 7-32
Memory Backup 3-38
Message Key
Message Wait Callback 5-65
Priorty Message Wait Callback 5-65
Setting ID Code 4-14
Message Key ID Code
Setting 4-14
Voice Mail (Third Party) 3-61, 3-62
Message Keys
Key Telephone 5-65
Message Wait Callback
Message Key 5-65
Message Waiting
I-8
Section 700 - Operation
High Priority
Voice Mail (Third Party)
Message Waiting/Callback
DSLT 6-34
Key Telephone 5-65
SLT 7-29
Messages
Absence
DSLT 6-3
Key Telephone 5-4
SLT 7-3
Absence Message
Message No. and Text
3-62
Key Telephone 5-5
Setting
Absence Messages 4-3
Setting Send Text Messages 4-23
Setting Text Message Replies 4-37
Text Message
Replies 5-35
Send 5-35
Mode Schedule
Schedule Patterns - Addresses/Values 4-17
Setting 4-15
Modes
Automatic Day/Night 3-27
Day of Week
Addresses 4-10
Setting 4-9
Day, Day 2 3-24
Day/Night System 3-24
Exception Day
Setting 4-11
Manual Day/Night 3-25
Night, Night 1, Night 2 3-24
Special Day
Setting 4-24
Start Time/Mode - Addresses/Values 4-26
MOH 3-7
Internal Hold Tone 3-36
MOH (Music-on-Hold) 3-39
Multi-CO (MCO) Appearances 5-63
Multiple Ringing
CO Ringing Types 3-20
Music
Background
DSLT 6-9
Key Telephone 5-10
Music-on-Hold (Background)
DSLT 6-9
Key Telephone 5-10
Music-on-Hold (MOH) 3-39
Internal Hold Tone 3-36
Mute Function
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Key Telephone
Index
5-67
N
Name Assignments 3-39
Extension 3-40
Speed Dial 3-43, 5-87
Names
Extension 4-13
Network
Call Routing 3-46
Centralized Voice Mail 3-46
Network Attendant Reversion 3-46
Network Call Routing 3-46
Network Call Transfer 3-46
Network Centralized Attendant 3-46
Network Centralized Voice Mail 3-46
Network Extension Calling 3-46
Network Facilities 3-45
Attendant Reversion 3-46
Call Routing 3-46
Call Transfer 3-46
Centralized Attendant 3-46
Centralized Voice Mail 3-46
Network Extension Calling 3-46
Network Flash Transfer 3-47
Network Hold 3-47
Network Transfer Recall 3-47
Tandem Connection 3-47
Network Flash Transfer 3-47
Network Hold 3-47
Network Transfer Recall 3-47
Next Extension/Hunt Group 3-35
Night Mode
Automatic 3-27
Manual 3-25
Night, Night 2, Night 3 3-24
Non-Blocking Architecture 3-48
Non-Verified Account Codes
Key Telephone 5-7
SLT 7-5
Non-Verified ID Account Codes
DSLT 6-6
Numbering Plan
Flexible 3-33
O
Offhook
Monitor
Key Telephone
Signaling
576-36-700
5-68
DSLT 6-35
Key Telephone 5-68
SLT 7-30
Voice Announce
DSLT 6-36
Key Telephone 5-69
SLT 7-31
Offhook Monitor
Key Telephone 5-68
Offhook Signaling
DSLT 6-35
Key Telephone 5-68
SLT 7-30
Offhook Voice Announce
DSLT 6-36
Key Telephone 5-69
SLT 7-31
One-Touch Keys 5-72
Onhook Dialing
DSLT 6-37
Key Telephone 5-74
Outgoing Dialed Digit Maximum
Override
SSD TRS 3-54
A-2
P
Pad
Digital 3-27
Pad Class 3-27
Paging
DSLT 6-38
Key Telephone 5-74
Meet-Me Answer
DSLT 6-38
Key Telephone 5-74
SLT 7-32
SLT 7-32
PBX Compatability 3-12
PC-Based Customizing Tool 3-50
Personal Speed Dial (PSD)
Setting Names 4-17
Personal Speed Dial (PSD) Numbers
Setting 4-22
Personal Speed Dialing (PSD)
DSLT 6-42
Key Telephone 5-81
SLT 7-36
Pickup
DSLT 6-20
Extension Direct Pickup
DSLT 6-22
Key Telephone 5-25
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
I-9
Index
Section 700 - Operation
SLT 7-19
Extension Group Pickup
All Calls
R
DSLT 6-20
Key Telephone 5-24
SLT 7-18
DSLT 6-20
External Calls
DSLT 6-20
Key Telephone 5-24
SLT 7-18
Key Telephone 5-24
SLT 7-18
Specific Group
DSLT 6-20
Key Telephone 5-24
SLT 7-18
Key Telephone 5-23
SLT 7-18
Trunk Direct Pickup
DSLT 6-23
Key Telephone 5-26
SLT 7-20
Trunk Group Pickup
DSLT 6-22
Key Telephone 5-26
SLT 7-20
Pilot Distributed Hunt Group 3-34
Pilot Terminal Hunt Group 3-34
Port
Virtual 3-59
Power Failure Transfer 3-49
Power On Maintenance 3-49
Priority Message Wait Callback
Message Key 5-65
Programing Devices
Telephone 3-50
Programming Devices 3-50
PC-Based Customizing Tool 3-50
Programming Telephone 3-50
Progress Tones 3-10
PSD (Personal Speed Dial)
Setting Names 4-17
Large-Display Phone Example 4-19
Small-Display Phone Example 4-20
Setting Numbers 4-22
Q
QSIG ISDN Lines 3-50
Queuing Point A-4
I-10
Redial
Last Number
DSLT 6-33
Key Telephone 5-60
SLT 7-29
Redial Key
Busy Tone
DSLT 6-8
Key Telephone 5-9
Last Number
DSLT 6-33
Key Telephone 5-60
RELEASE Key 5-51
Reset Call
DSLT 6-39
Key Telephone 5-76
SLT 7-33
Restriction
Ext to Ext COS 3-13
Ringing
Alarm 3-54
BLF 3-53
BLF Delayed 3-53
Day 3-51
Delayed 3-52
DID 3-17
DID Day/Night 3-52
DID Delayed 3-52
DIL 3-18
DISA 3-20
Distinctive 3-29
Slide 3-53
Ringing Line Preference 5-76
Ringing Modes
System 3-51
Ringing Types 3-17
Room monitoring using DSLT 6-40
Room monitoring using Key Telephone 5-77
Room monitoring using SLT 7-34
Route List Table A-5
Route Table A-5
RS Level for Non-ARS Routing A-2
S
Schedule
Setting 4-15
Security
Data 3-23
Send Text Messages
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Index
Setting 4-23
Sensor
Door Box 3-30
Separation
BGM/MOH 3-7
Set Absence Messages 4-3
Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension 4-5
Set Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail 4-6
Set Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension 4-7
Set Caller ID Logging Extensions 4-8
Set Day of Week Mode 4-9
Set Exception Day Mode 4-11
Set Extension Names 4-13
Set Message Key ID Code 4-14
Set Mode Schedule 4-15
Set Personal Speed Dial (PSD) Names 4-17
Large-Display Phone Example 4-19
Small-Display Phone Example 4-20
Set Personal Speed Dial (PSD) Numbers 4-22
Set Send Text Messages 4-23
Set Special Day Mode 4-24
Set System Date/Time/Day 4-31
Set System Speed Dial (SSD) Index 4-32
Set System Speed Dial (SSD) Names 4-34
Set System Speed Dial (SSD) Numbers 4-35
Set Text Message Replies 4-37
Set Verified ID Codes 4-38
Set Walking TRS Codes 4-40
Signal Conversion
DP to DTMF
DSLT 6-30
Key Telephone 5-47
Silent Monitor 5-79
Single Line Telephone (SLT) Features 7-1
Absence Message 7-3
Account Codes 7-4
Attendant Group Calls 7-7
Busy Override 7-7
Call Forwarding 7-9
Call Pickup 7-18
Call Transfer 7-21
Callback Request 7-8
Camp-on (Call Waiting) 7-23
Conference Calls 7-24
Do-Not-Distrub (DND) 7-25
Flash Send 7-27
Intercom Calling 7-28
Last Number Redial 7-29
Message Waiting/Callback 7-29
Offhook Signaling 7-30
Offhook Voice Announce 7-31
Paging
Meet-Me Answer 7-32
Reset Call 7-33
576-36-700
Speed Dialing 7-35
Station Lockout 7-39
Timed Reminder 7-40
Trunk Access 7-41
Trunk Queuing 7-43
Universal Night Answer (UNA) to Page 7-44
Walking TRS Class of Service 7-45
Single Line Telephone (SLT)Features
Call Hold 7-13
Slide Ringing 3-53
SLT Flash Send 7-27
Small-Display Phone
Display Information 5-45
Example
Assigning Extension Names 3-42
Setting PSD Names 4-20
Menu Example 5-45
SMDR
Priority of Incoming Call Condition Codes 3-55
Priority of Outgoing Call Condition Codes 3-55
SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Call Records 3-55
Output Data Format 3-56
Software Version 1-1
Special Day Mode
Setting 4-24
Start Time/Mode - Addresses/Values 4-26
Speed Dial Linking
DSLT 6-45
Key Telephone 5-85
SLT 7-38
Speed Dial Name Assignments 3-43, 5-87
Speed Dialing
DSLT 6-42
Key Telephone 5-81
Personal
DSLT 6-42
Key Telephone 5-81
SLT 7-36
SLT 7-35
System
DSLT 6-44
Key Telephone 5-83
SLT 7-37
S-Point Interface
ISDN/BRI 3-32
ISDN/PRI 3-32
SSD (System Speed Dial)
Setting Names 4-34
Setting Numbers 4-35
Setting SSD Index 4-32
SSD TRS Override
System 3-54
Star (*) and Pound (#) Dialing Restriction A-2
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
I-11
Index
Section 700 - Operation
Station Lockout
DLST 6-47
Key Telephone 5-91
SLT 7-39
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Call Records 3-55
Output Data Format 3-56
Priority of Incoming Call Condition Codes 3-55
Priority of Outgoing Call Condition Codes 3-55
Station Timers 3-16
Class Assignment 3-17
Supervised Call Transfer
DSLT 6-23
Key Telephone 5-27
SLT 7-21
Switch Back Hunt Group 3-34
System
Background Music 3-7
System Architecture
Non-Blocking 3-48
System Features 3-1
System Hold
DSLT 6-16
Key Telephone 5-18
SLT 7-13
System Mode
Day 3-24
Day/Night 3-24
Night 3-24
System Speed Dial (SSD)
Setting Names 4-34
Setting Numbers 4-35
Setting SSD Index 4-32
TRS Override 3-54
System Speed Dialing (SSD)
DSLT 6-44
Key Telephone 5-83
SLT 7-37
T
T1 Line 3-57
Tandem Connection 3-47
Telephone Programming 3-50
Tenant Group
MCO 3-38
Tenant Operation
MCO 3-38
Text Message Replies
Setting 4-37
Text Messages
Replies 5-35
Send 5-35
I-12
Setting Replies 4-37
Setting Send Text Messages 4-23
Third Party Voice Mail
Integration 3-60
Time
Setting 4-31
Time List Table A-5
Timed Reminder Call
DSLT 6-49
Key Telephone 5-93
SLT 7-40
Timers
Station 3-16
Toll Restriction Service A-1
Toll Restriction Service (TRS) 3-57
Tone
Internal Hold 3-36
Tone Calling
Intercom Calling
DSLT 6-32
Key Telephone 5-59
SLT 7-28
Tones
Call Progress 3-10
Transfer
Automatic Trunk To Trunk 3-7
Camping on Busy Extension
DSLT 6-25
Key Telephone 5-29
SLT 7-22
DSLT 6-23
Key Telephone 5-27
Network Flash 3-47
Power Failure 3-49
SLT 7-21
Supervised
DSLT 6-23
Key Telephone 5-27
SLT 7-21
Unsupervised
DSLT 6-24
Key Telephone 5-28
SLT 7-21
Transfer Key
Voice Mail (Third Party) 3-63
Transfer Recall
Network 3-47
TRS (Toll Restriction Service) 3-57
TRS Class - ARS Routing A-3
TRS Class Features A-2, A-3
TRS Codes
Walking 4-40
TRS Configuration and Operation A-5
TRS Features A-2
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Section 700 - Operation
Index
TRS Level A-3
TRS Operation A-1
TRS Override
SSD 3-54
TRS Override on SSD Dialing A-2
TRS Programming/Operation Overview A-6
Trunk Access
CO Line Key Trunk Access 5-95
Direct Trunk Access
DSLT 6-50
Key Telephone 5-95
SLT 7-42
DSLT 6-50
Key Telephone 5-94
MCO
DSLT 6-50
Key Telephone 5-96
SLT 7-42
MCO Line Preference 5-96
SLT 7-41
Trunk Access Groups 3-58
Trunk COS
Enable/Disable Features 3-13
Trunk Direct Pickup
DSLT 6-23
Key Telephone 5-26
SLT 7-20
Trunk Group Pickup
DSLT 6-22
Key Telephone 5-26
SLT 7-20
Trunk Interface 3-20
DID 3-21
Ground Start 3-21
Loop Start 3-22
Trunk Interface - ISDN BRI 3-21
Trunk Interface - ISDN PRI 3-22
Trunk Queuing
DSLT 6-51
Key Telephone 5-97
SLT 7-43
Trunk to Trunk Restriction COS 3-16
Trunk To Trunk Transfer
Automatic 3-7
Trunk/Tie COS 3-12
U
UNA to Page
DSLT 6-52
Key Telephone 5-98
SLT 7-44
Universal Night Answer (UNA) to Page
576-36-700
DSLT 6-52
Key Telephone 5-98
SLT 7-44
Unsupervised Call Transfer
DSLT 6-24
Key Telephone 5-28
SLT 7-21
User Maintenance 4-1
Introduction 4-2
User Programming 4-2
V
Variable Mode 5-99
Verified ID Account Codes
DSLT 6-6
Key Telephone 5-7
SLT 7-5
Verified ID Codes
Setting 4-38
Virtual Extension
Virtual Port 3-59
Virtual Port 3-59
Floating Hold 3-59
Virtual Extension 3-59
Voice Calling
Intercom Calling
DSLT 6-32
Key Telephone 5-59
SLT 7-28
Voice Mail
Built-In Voice Mail Unit 3-9
Centralized 3-46
Voice Mail (Third Party)
Answer Supervision 3-60
Call Forward ID Code 3-61
DID/DNIS/DDI Voice Mail ID Code 3-61
Disconnect Signal 3-62
High Priority Message Waiting 3-62
Message Key ID Code 3-62
Voice Mail ID Codes
Setting 4-6
Voice Mail Integration
Third Party 3-60
Voice Mail Transfer Key (Third Party) 3-63
Voice Recognition 5-101
Volume Control 5-102
W
Walking TRS Class of Service
DSLT 6-53
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
I-13
Index
Section 700 - Operation
Key Telephone 5-103
SLT 7-45
Walking TRS Codes
Setting 4-40
Z
Zip Mode
I-14
5-104
DBS 576 (USA) issued October 2000
576-36-700
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement